Docstoc

Boulder Rural Fire Station

Document Sample
Boulder Rural Fire Station Powered By Docstoc
					   PROJECT MANUAL
     VOLUME 2 OF 2
Specification Divisions 15-16




  Boulder Rural
   Fire Station
           Boulder, CO




   2          Bid Set
           August 9, 2010



           OZ Architecture
           1805 29th Street
             Suite 2054
       Boulder, Colorado 80301
           OZ Project No. 18004
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                          AUGUST 9, 2010



DOCUMENT 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME 1 OF 2


GENERAL INFORMATION

00001     TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL
00002     PROJECT DIRECTORY


SERIES 0 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND INFORMATION

NO SECTIONS


DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100     SUMMARY
01230     ALTERNATES
01250     CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01290     PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01310     PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01320     CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01330     SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01400     QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01420     REFERENCES
01500     TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01524     CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01600     PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01700     EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01731     CUTTING AND PATCHING
01732     SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01770     CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01781     PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01782     OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL                          00001 - 1
OZ Architecture                                                Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                          AUGUST 9, 2010



DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02200     EARTHWORK
02221     TRENCHING
02270     TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL
02466     DRILLED PIERS
02470     STEEL HELIX (HELICAL) PIERS
02510     ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
02520     PORTLAND CEMENT PAVING
02521     CONCRETE CURBS & WALKS
02580     PAVEMENT MARKINGS
02665     WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
02720     DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
02730     SANITARY SEWER
02870     SITE FURNISHINGS
02920     SOIL PREPARATION
02930     SODDING
02950     TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS


DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03300     CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

04270     GLASS UNIT MASONRY
04812     BRICK MASONRY
04814     CONCRETE MASONRY
04816     MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING


DIVISION 5 - METALS

05120     STRUCTURAL STEEL
05310     STEEL DECK
05500     METAL FABRICATIONS
05511     METAL STAIRS
05512     ALTERNATING TREAD METAL STAIRS
05521     PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL                          00001 - 2
OZ Architecture                                                Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                     BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                        AUGUST 9, 2010



DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105     MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
06161     GYPSUM SHEATHING
06402     INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06640     PLASTIC PANELING


DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115     BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07210     BUILDING INSULATION
07213     SPRAYED FOAM INSULATION
07260     UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS
07411     METAL ROOF PANELS
07412     METAL WALL PANELS
07531     ETHYLENE-PROPOLYENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07543     THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
07620     SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07841     THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07842     FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07920     JOINT SEALANTS


DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110     STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08211     FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311     ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08361     SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08411     ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08710     DOOR HARDWARE
08716     AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
08800     GLAZING
08816     DECORATIVE GLASS
08830     MIRRORS




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL                        00001 - 3
OZ Architecture                                              Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                               AUGUST 9, 2010



DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09220     PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09250     GYPSUM BOARD
09310     CERAMIC TILE
09511     ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09622     RESILIENT SPORTS-FLOOR COVERINGS
09652     RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09653     RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09681     CARPET TILE
09912     INTERIOR PAINTING
09960     HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS


DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10101     VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
10125     DISPLAY CASES
10155     TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10265     IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
10310     MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
10350     FLAGPOLES
10431     SIGNAGE
10502     FIRE STATION GEAR LOCKERS
10522     FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10523     FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10525     FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY KEEPER
10550     POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10651     OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
10801     TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES


DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11132     PROJECTION SCREENS
11451     RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11491     EXTERIOR ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT


DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12375     ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS
12494     ROLLER SHADES




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL               00001 - 4
OZ Architecture                                     Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                      BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                         AUGUST 9, 2010



DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NO SECTIONS


DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14562     SLIDE POLES




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL         00001 - 5
OZ Architecture                               Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                          AUGUST 9, 2010



VOLUME 2 OF 2


DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

 15050    BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
 15055    MOTORS
 15060    HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
 15071    MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
 15075    MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
 15081    DUCT INSULATION
 15082    EQUIPMENT INSULATION
 15083    PIPING INSULATION
 15110    VALVES
 15121    PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
 15122    METERS AND GAGES
 15140    DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
 15150    SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
 15181    HYDRONIC PIPING
 15185    HYDRONIC PUMPS
 15194    FUEL GAS PIPING
 15300    FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
 15410    PLUMBING FIXTURES
 15415    DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
 15430    PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
 15486    FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
 15513    CONDENSING BOILERS
 15542    FUEL FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
 15550    BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
 15650    REFRIGERATION
 15700    VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM
15720     AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
 15766    CABINET UNIT HEATERS
 15767    PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
 15860    AIR TERMINAL UNITS
 15880    AIR DISTRIBUTION
 15900    HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
 15940    SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
 15990    TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL                            00001 - 6
OZ Architecture                                                  Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                          AUGUST 9, 2010



DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16010     ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
16020     WORK INCLUDED
16025     CODES AND FEES
16030     PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
16035     REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCE
16040     GUARANTEE
16045     MAINTENANCE MANUALS
16055     TEMPORARY LIGHTING
16060     IDENTIFICATION
16065     TESTING, ACCEPTANCE AND CERTIFICATION
16102     EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION
16110     RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16120     WIRE AND CABLE
16122     FIRE SEALS
16140     WIRING DEVICES
16160     PANELBOARDS
16170     DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16181     FUSES
16400     TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL
          CONNECTION
16403     GENERATOR
16440     SWITCHBOARD
16450     GROUNDING SYSTEMS
16490     TRANSFER SWITCHES
16500     LUMINAIRE AND ACCESSORIES
16601     LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
16721     FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16740     TELEPHONE RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES


END OF DOCUMENT 00001




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL                          00001 - 7
OZ Architecture                                                Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                      BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                         AUGUST 9, 2010




TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL         00001 - 8
OZ Architecture                               Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                     BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                        AUGUST 9, 2010


DOCUMENT 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY


Owner
Boulder Rural Fire Protection District
5075 Jay Road
Boulder, CO 80301

Architect
OZ Architecture
1805 29th Street, Suite 2054
Boulder, CO 80301
(303) 449-8900
Fax (303) 449-3886

Civil Engineer
Scott, Cox & Associates, Inc.
1530 55th Street
Boulder, CO 80303
(303) 444-3051
Fax (303) 444-3387

Landscape Architect
Outside L.A., LLC
2623 Burgess Creek Road
Steamboat Springs, CO 80487
(303) 517-9256
Fax (970) 879-6133

Structural Engineer
JVA, Incorporated
1319 Spruce Street
Boulder, CO 80302
(303) 444-1951
Fax (303) 444-1957

Mechanical/ Plumbing Engineer
Abeyta Engineering Consultants, Inc.
7800 E. Orchard Road, Suite 310
Greenwood Village, CO 80111
(303) 221-5668
Fax (303) 221-5892

Electrical Engineer
AE Design Group, Inc.
1900 Wazee Street, Suite 255
Denver, CO 80202
(303) 296-3531
Fax (303) 296-3035




PROJECT DIRECTORY                              00002 - 1
OZ Architecture                              Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO            AUGUST 9, 2010



END OF DOCUMENT 00002




PROJECT DIRECTORY                  00002 - 2
OZ Architecture                  Boulder, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section includes the following:

           1.    Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
           2.    Transition fittings.
           3.    Dielectric fittings.
           4.    Mechanical sleeve seals.
           5.    Sleeves.
           6.    Escutcheons.
           7.    Grout.
           8.    Mechanical demolition.
           9.    Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
           10.   Painting and finishing.
           11.   Concrete bases.
           12.   Supports and anchorages.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
           spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
           ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

      B.   Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors.       Examples include finished
           occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

      C.   Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
           temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

      D.   Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
           by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

      E.   Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
           conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
           temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                       15050 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


      F.   The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

           1.    ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
           2.    CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
           3.    PE: Polyethylene plastic.
           4.    PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

      G.   The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

           1.    EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
           2.    NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.


1.4        SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For the following:

           1.    Transition fittings.
           2.    Dielectric fittings.
           3.    Mechanical sleeve seals.
           4.    Escutcheons.

      B.   Welding certificates.


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
           "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

      B.   Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
           Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

           1.    Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
           2.    Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
                 involved and that certification is current.

      C.   Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
           characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing
           and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately
           modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply
           with requirements.


1.6        DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
           storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,
           and moisture.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                     15050 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


      B.   Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


1.7        COORDINATION

      A.   Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress
           of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

      B.   Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
           concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

      C.   Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring
           access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are
           specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MANUFACTURERS

      A.   In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
           requirements apply for product selection:
           1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
                 manufacturers specified.


2.2        PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

      A.   Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
           joining methods.

      B.   Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


2.3        JOINING MATERIALS

      A.   Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

      B.   Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:      Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
           system contents.

           1.    ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
                 thickness or specific material is indicated.

                 a.    Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
                 b.    Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.



BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                           15050 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


           2.    AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-
                 face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.   Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

      D.   Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
           ASTM B 813.

      E.   Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
           thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.


2.4        DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

      A.   Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
           joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

      B.   Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

      C.   Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
           pressure at 180 deg F.

           1.    Manufacturers:

                 a.    Capitol Manufacturing Co.
                 b.    Central Plastics Company.
                 c.    Eclipse, Inc.
                 d.    Epco Sales, Inc.
                 e.    Hart Industries, International, Inc.
                 f.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
                 g.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

      D.   Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
           minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

           1.    Manufacturers:

                 a.    Capitol Manufacturing Co.
                 b.    Central Plastics Company.
                 c.    Epco Sales, Inc.
                 d.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

      E.   Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,
           full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
           phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

           1.    Manufacturers:

                 a.    Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                        15050 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


                 b.    Calpico, Inc.
                 c.    Central Plastics Company.
                 d.    Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

           2.    Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
                 minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

      F.   Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
           lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

           1.    Manufacturers:

                 a.    Calpico, Inc.
                 b.    Lochinvar Corp.

      G.   Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
           lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
           deg F.

           1.    Manufacturers:

                 a.    Perfection Corp.
                 b.    Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
                 c.    Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
                 d.    Victaulic Co. of America.


2.5        MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

      A.   Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
           between pipe and sleeve.

           1.    Manufacturers:

                 a.    Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
                 b.    Calpico, Inc.
                 c.    Metraflex Co.
                 d.    Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

           2.    Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
                 and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
           3.    Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
           4.    Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
                 required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
                 element.


2.6        SLEEVES

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                        15050 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


      A.   Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
           longitudinal joint.

      B.   Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

      C.   Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
           ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

      D.   Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
           Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

           1.    Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

      E.   Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

      F.   PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

      G.   Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
           flange for attaching to wooden forms.


2.7        ESCUTCHEONS

      A.   Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
           closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely
           covers opening.

      B.   One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type:      Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-
           plated finish.

      C.   One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

           1.    Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

      D.   Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

           1.    Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

      E.   One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

      F.   Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
           chrome-plated finish.

      G.   One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

      H.   Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.


2.8        GROUT

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                         15050 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


      A.   Description:   ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
           grout.

           1.    Characteristics:  Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
                 nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
           2.    Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
           3.    Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
           piping systems.

      B.   Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
           piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
           friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
           indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

      C.   Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
           rooms and service areas.

      D.   Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
           right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
           indicated otherwise.

      E.   Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

      F.   Install piping to permit valve servicing.

      G.   Install piping at indicated slopes.

      H.   Install piping free of sags and bends.

      I.   Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

      J.   Install piping to allow application of insulation.

      K.   Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
           pressure.

      L.   Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

           1.    New Piping:



BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                           15050 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


             a.    Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
                   type.
             b.    Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
                   finish.
             c.    Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
             d.    Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
                   cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
             e.    Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
                   stamped-steel type.
             f.    Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-
                   brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
             g.    Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
                   steel type and set screw.
             h.    Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
                   polished chrome-plated finish.
             i.    Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
             j.    Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
                   type.

  M.   Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

  N.   Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

  O.   Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor
       and roof slabs.

  P.   Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
       partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

       1.    Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

             a.     Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
                    other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve
                    fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
       2.    Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
       3.    Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
             sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

             a.    Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
             b.    Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
                   partitions.
             c.    Stack Sleeve Fittings:        For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
                   waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of
                   cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer
                   to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

                   1)    Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.


BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                       15050 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


           4.    Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
                 pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
                 joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

      Q.   Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
           mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
           between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

           1.    Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
           2.    Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
           3.    Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
                 required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
                 mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
                 Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
                 make watertight seal.

      R.   Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
           Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-
           inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

           1.    Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
                 required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
                 mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
                 Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
                 make watertight seal.

      S.   Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
           floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to
           Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

      T.   Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

      U.   Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
           requirements and/or manufacturer’s installation instructions.


3.2        PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

      A.   Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
           specifying piping systems.

      B.   Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

      C.   Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
           assembly.

      D.   Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to
           tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
           using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                           15050 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     AUGUST 9, 2010


      E.   Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
           threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
           restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

           1.    Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
                 threading is specified.
           2.    Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
                 damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

      F.   Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
           welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

      G.   Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
           application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
           threads.


3.3        PIPING CONNECTIONS

      A.   Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

           1.    Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
                 connection to each piece of equipment.
           2.    Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
                 connection to each piece of equipment.
           3.    Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials
                 of dissimilar metals.
           4.    Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
                 materials of dissimilar metals.


3.4        EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
           are not indicated.

      B.   Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
           components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.   Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement
           of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
           to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

      D.   Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.


3.5        PAINTING



BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                        15050 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


      A.   Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9
           Section " Painting (Professional Line Products)."

      B.   Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
           and procedures to match original factory finish.


3.6        CONCRETE BASES

      A.   Concrete Bases:       Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
           manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

           1.    Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in
                 both directions than supported unit.
           2.    Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
                 indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
           3.    Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
                 concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
           4.    Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
                 setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
                 items to be embedded.
           5.    Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
                 equipment.
           6.    Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
           7.    Use [3000-psi], 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
                 specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


3.7        ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

      A.   Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

      B.   Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
           elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

      C.   Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.


3.8        GROUTING

      A.   Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
           equipment base plates, and anchors.

      B.   Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

      C.   Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

      D.   Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                                       15050 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                          AUGUST 9, 2010


  E.   Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

  F.   Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

  G.   Place grout around anchors.

  H.   Cure placed grout.




END OF SECTION 15050




BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS                                               15050 - 12
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15055 - MOTORS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting motors
               and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
         2.    Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor
               requirements for motor-driven equipment.


1.3      DEFINITIONS

   A.    Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a
         component of equipment.

   B.    Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an
         integral component of motorized equipment.


1.4      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide
         nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting
         arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground
         lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes.

   B.    Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and
         details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the
         following:

         1.    Each installed unit's type and details.
         2.    Nameplate legends.
         3.    Diagrams of power and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each
               type of motor and for each control scheme.


MOTORS                                                                                       15055 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
         clearances, and required area above and around field-installed motors. Show motor layout,
         mechanical power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical components
         and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
         and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

   D.    Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification:      Submit certification that motors,
         accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section
         "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:

         1.    Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
               of assembled components or on calculation.

               a.    The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
                     any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
               b.    The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
                     any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
                     the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

         2.    Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Motorized Equipment: Identify center of gravity and
               locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
         3.    Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
               based and their installation requirements.

   E.    Qualification Data: For testing agency.

   F.    Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3.

   G.    Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency,
         operation, and maintenance manuals.


1.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
         having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as
         documented according to ASTM E 548.

   B.    Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a
         single manufacturer.

   C.    Product Options for Field-Installed Motors:     Drawings indicate size, profiles, and
         dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer
         to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

   D.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
         NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
         marked for intended use.

   E.    Comply with NFPA 70.
MOTORS                                                                                       15055 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


1.6      PROJECT CONDITIONS

   A.    Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
         unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
         temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

         1.    Notify Architect at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Identify
               extent and duration of utility interruptions.
         2.    Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
         3.    Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
         4.    Motors shall be rated for use at site elevation of 5,200 feet.


1.7      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that
         are:

         1.    Compatible with the following:

               a.    Magnetic controllers.
               b.    Multispeed controllers.
               c.    Reduced-voltage controllers.

         2.    Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use
               throughout speed range without overheating.
         3.    Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
         4.    Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control
               sequence.

   B.    Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and
         motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding
         rails for belt tensioning.

   C.    Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
         Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows:

         1.    Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another
               Section.
         2.    Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or
               characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance
               specified.
MOTORS                                                                                        15055 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


2.2      MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

   A.    Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.

   B.    Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.

   C.    Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

   D.    Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to
         which motor is connected.

   E.    Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

   F.    Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet
         above sea level.

   G.    Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
         loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
         sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

   H.    Enclosure: Open dripproof.


2.3      POLYPHASE MOTORS

   A.    Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

   B.    Efficiency: Premium efficiency.

   C.    Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.

         1.    Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

   D.    Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.

   E.    Bearings:    Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
         loading.

   F.    Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.

   G.    Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

   H.    Code Letter Designation:

         1.    Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.
         2.    Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

   I.    Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5
         hp.


MOTORS                                                                                       15055 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Finish: Gray enamel.


2.4      POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
         controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to
         control method.

   B.    Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
         coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

         1.    Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller
               output.
         2.    Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
         3.    Insulation: Class H.
         4.    Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
               motors.

   C.    Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased
         bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with
         nonhygroscopic material.

         1.    Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

   D.    Source Quality Control:       Perform the following tests on each motor according to
         NEMA MG 1:

         1.    Measure winding resistance.
         2.    Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
         3.    Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
         4.    Perform high-potential test.


2.5      SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

   A.    Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
         application:

         1.    Permanent-split capacitor.
         2.    Split-phase start, capacitor run.
         3.    Capacitor start, capacitor run.

   B.    Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

   C.    Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
         when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
         insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature
         returns to normal range.

MOTORS                                                                                      15055 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   D.    Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
         motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

   E.    Source Quality Control:      Perform the following tests on each motor according to
         NEMA MG 1:

         1.    Measure winding resistance.
         2.    Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
         3.    Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
         4.    Perform high-potential test.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements,
         installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

   B.    Examine roughing-in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections
         before motor installation.

   C.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      MOTOR INSTALLATION

   A.    Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized
         according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with
         load transfer link.

   B.    Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3.

   C.    Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Section
         "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."


3.3      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

         1.    Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and
               speed at motor design load.
         2.    Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
         3.    Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.

   B.    Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-
         control testing:


MOTORS                                                                                      15055 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
         testing:

   D.    Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

         1.    Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
               NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
         2.    Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
               compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

   E.    Manufacturer's Field Service:      Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
         perform the following:

         1.    Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical
               connections for compliance with requirements.
         2.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
               and equipment.
         3.    Verify bearing lubrication.
         4.    Verify proper motor rotation.
         5.    Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

               a.    Test procedures used.
               b.    Test results that comply with requirements.
               c.    Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
                     achieve compliance.


3.4      ADJUSTING

   A.    Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
         written instructions.


3.5      CLEANING

   A.    After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
         and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

   B.    Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.


END OF SECTION 15055




MOTORS                                                                                       15055 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

      B.   Related Sections include the following:

           1.    Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and
                 supports to building structure.
           2.    Division 15300 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
           3.    Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
                 vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

      B.   Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
           Supports."


1.4        PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
           combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

      B.   Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
           combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

      C.   Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

      D.   Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers
           and supports for piping and equipment.


1.5        SUBMITTALS


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                          15060 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


      A.   Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and
           thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.

      B.   Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
           supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and
           characteristics of components and fabrication details.

      C.   Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.


1.6        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
           Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

      B.   Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
           each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

      C.   Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
           each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional
           engineer.

           1.   Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified
                to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
                engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
                performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated
                for this Project in material, design, and extent.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MANUFACTURERS

      A.   Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
           products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
           following:

      B.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
           following:

           1.   Pipe Hangers:

                a.    AAA Technology and Specialties Co., Inc.
                b.    B-Line Systems, Inc.
                c.    Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
                d.    Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
                e.    Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
                f.    Grinnell Corp.
                g.    GS Metals Corp.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                          15060 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


                h.    Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
                i.    National Pipe Hanger Corp.
                j.    PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
                k.    PHS Industries, Inc.
                l.    Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

           2.   Channel Support Systems:

                a.    B-Line Systems, Inc.
                b.    Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.
                c.    GS Metals Corp.
                d.    Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
                e.    National Pipe Hanger Corp.
                f.    Thomas & Betts Corp.
                g.    Unistrut Corp.
                h.    Wesanco, Inc.

           3.   Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

                a.    Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.
                b.    Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
                c.    PHS Industries, Inc.
                d.    Pipe Shields, Inc.
                e.    Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
                f.    Value Engineered Products, Inc.

           4.   Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

                a.    Gunnebo Fastening Corp.
                b.    Hilti, Inc.
                c.    ITW Ramset/Red Head.
                d.    Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.


2.2        MANUFACTURED UNITS

      A.   Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components.
           Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific
           hanger and support types.

           1.   Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
                applied finish.
           2.   Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
                are in direct contact with copper tubing.

      B.   Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

           1.   Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
           2.   Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
                are in direct contact with copper tubing.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                     15060 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


      C.   Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:      100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation,
           encased in sheet metal shield.

           1.   Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-
                treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
           2.   Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier.
           3.   Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
                silicate with vapor barrier.
           4.   Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,
                ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
           5.   Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass.
           6.   Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
           7.   For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
                pipe.
           8.   For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
           9.   Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
                ambient air temperature.


2.3        MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.   Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with
           pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
           used.

      B.   Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
           appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

      C.   Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

      D.   Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic,
           dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

           1.   Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting;        recommended for both
                interior and exterior applications.
           2.   Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
           3.   Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

      A.   Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

      B.   Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
           in piping system Specification Sections.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                        15060 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
         specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

         1.    Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
               insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
         2.    Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
               pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 1 ½..

   D.    Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
         system Specification Sections, install the following types:

         1.    Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
               NPS 20.
         2.    Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
               NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

   E.    Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
         system Specification Sections, install the following types:

         1.    Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
         2.    Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
         3.    Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
         4.    Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
               building attachments.
         5.    Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

   F.    Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
         Specification Sections, install the following types:

         1.    Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
               suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
         2.    Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
               construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
         3.    Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
               beams, channels, or angles.
         4.    Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
               beams.
         5.    Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
               loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
         6.    C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
         7.    Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
               tangent to flange edge.
         8.    Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
         9.    Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
               beams for heavy loads.
         10.   Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
               I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
         11.   Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
               structural steel.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                    15060 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


           12.   Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
                 above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

                 a.    Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
                 b.    Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
                 c.    Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

           13.   Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
           14.   Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
                 required.
           15.   Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
                 horizontal movement where head room is limited.

      G.   Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
           Specification Sections, install the following types:

           1.    Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
                 insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
           2.    Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to
                 prevent crushing insulation.
           3.    Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of
                 high-density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium
                 silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with
                 vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.


3.2        HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

      A.   Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
           hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
           building structure.

      B.   Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
           support together on field-assembled channel systems.

           1.    Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

      C.   Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
           piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

           1.    Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
                 or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
                 individual pipe hangers.
           2.    Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
                 supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

      D.   Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
           attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
           attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and
           expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                             15060 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at
         top of inserts.

   E.    Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and
         completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
         Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

   F.    Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
         cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

   G.    Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
         and other accessories.

   H.    Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
         systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
         expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

   I.    Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
         stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

   J.    Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
         maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not
         exceeded.

   K.    Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

         1.    Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

               a.    Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
                     insulation.
               b.    Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
                     insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
               c.    Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

         2.    Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
               indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

               a.    Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
                     distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

         3.    Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
               Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

               a.    Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-
                     distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

         4.    Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

               a.    NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
               b.    NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                       15060 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


                c.    NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
                d.    NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
                e.    NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch mm) thick.

           5.   Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
           6.   Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
           7.   Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


3.3        EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

      A.   Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support
           equipment above floor.

      B.   Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.


3.4        METAL FABRICATION

      A.   Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and
           equipment supports.

      B.   Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
           be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

      C.   Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
           appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
           the following:

           1.   Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
                corrosion resistance of base metals.
           2.   Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
           3.   Remove welding flux immediately.
           4.   Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
                contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.


3.5        ADJUSTING

      A.   Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
           achieve indicated slope of pipe.


3.6        PAINTING

      A.   Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
           immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
           painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

           1.   Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                         15060 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                          AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
         abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
         "Painting."

   C.    Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
         galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                                                                  15060 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15060




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS                   15060 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes the following:

       1.    Elastomeric isolation pads.
       2.    Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
       3.    Housed spring mounts.
       4.    Elastomeric hangers.
       5.    Spring hangers.
       6.    Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails.
       7.    Steel, vibration isolation equipment bases.


1.3    DEFINITIONS

  A.   Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient.

  B.   OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California.
       OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage preapproval "R" number to each seismic restraint it
       tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested.


1.4    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.

  B.   Shop Drawings:     Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.          Include the
       following:

       1.    Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
             seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
       2.    Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
             attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
             and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component
             misalignment, and cantilever loads.

  C.   Welding certificates.


MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                                15071 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


  D.   Air-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and
       damping tests performed by an independent laboratory or acoustician.


1.5    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
       Code--Steel."


1.6    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
       Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

  B.   Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
       items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."


1.7    EXTRA MATERIALS

  A.   Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
       packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

       1.    Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for all snubbers.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
       requirements apply for product selection:

       1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
             manufacturers specified.


2.2    VIBRATION ISOLATORS

  A.   Manufacturers:

       1.    Ace Mounting Co., Inc.
       2.    Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
       3.    B-Line Systems, Inc.
       4.    California Dynamics Corp.
       5.    Isolation Technology, Inc.
       6.    Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
       7.    Mason Industries, Inc.
       8.    Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                             15071 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


       9.    Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
       10.   Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.

  B.   Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
       single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of
       sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
       requirements of supported equipment.

       1.    Material: Standard neoprene - comply with AASHTO M 251.

  C.   Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

       1.    Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
             spring at rated load.
       2.    Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
       3.    Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
       4.    Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
             deformation or failure.
       5.    Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,
             rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load
             to 100 psig.
       6.    Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
             screw to fasten and level equipment.

  D.   Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

       1.    Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
       2.    Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
       3.    Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before
             contacting a resilient collar.

  E.   Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene
       isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods.
       Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

  F.   Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and
       insert in compression.

       1.    Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
             maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
             reducing isolation efficiency.
       2.    Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
             spring at rated load.
       3.    Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
       4.    Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
       5.    Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
             deformation or failure.
       6.    Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-
             reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.


MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                              15071 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


2.3    RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS

  A.   Available Manufacturers:

  B.   Manufacturers:

       1.    Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
       2.    California Dynamics Corp.
       3.    Isolation Technology, Inc.
       4.    Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
       5.    Mason Industries, Inc.
       6.    Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
       7.    Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
       8.    Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.

  C.   Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail
       designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand 125-mph wind impinging laterally
       against side of equipment.

  D.   Lower Support Assembly: Sheet-metal "Z" section containing adjustable and removable
       steel springs that support upper floating frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous
       support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces.
       Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood
       nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of
       rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.

  E.   Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch- thick,
       elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with
       removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are
       accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering
       with the integrity of the roof.

       1.    Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic
             restraint.

             a.    Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
                   mounting and leveling bolt.
             b.    Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
                   the spring at rated load.
             c.    Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
             d.    Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
             e.    Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
                   without deformation or failure.

  F.   Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.

  G.   Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper
       support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and
       counterflashed over roof materials.


MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                              15071 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


2.4    VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

  A.   Available Manufacturers:

  B.   Manufacturers:

       1.    Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
       2.    California Dynamics Corp.
       3.    Isolation Technology, Inc.
       4.    Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
       5.    Mason Industries, Inc.
       6.    Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
       7.    Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
       8.    Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.

  C.   Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

       1.    Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
             clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
             bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
       2.    Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
             Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
       3.    Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
             mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.


2.5    FACTORY FINISHES

  A.   Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

  B.   Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment
       before shipping.

       1.    Powder coating on springs and housings.
       2.    All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
             exterior use.
       3.    Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
       4.    Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
             indicate capacity range.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    EXAMINATION

  A.   Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
       compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
       performance.



MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                           15071 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


  B.   Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
       before installation.

  C.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2    INSTALLATION

  A.   Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7
       Section "Roof Accessories."

  B.   Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.

  C.   Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to
       vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

  D.   Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
       locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges
       of adjacent equipment or building structure.

  E.   Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps
       to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations,
       shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld
       angles to rods.

  F.   Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.


3.3    EQUIPMENT BASES

  A.   Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment
       manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site.

       1.    Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
             indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
       2.    Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
             concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
       3.    Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
             instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
       4.    Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
             equipment.
       5.    Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
       6.    Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in
             Division 3.


3.4    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-
       control testing:

MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                                 15071 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


  B.   Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
       testing:

  C.   Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

       1.    Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.
       2.    Isolator deflection.
       3.    Snubber minimum clearances.
       4.    Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks.
             Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
       5.    Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system.
             Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
       6.    Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
             malfunctioning controls and equipment.

  D.   Air-Mounting System Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
       representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
       piping connections. Report results in writing.

       1.    Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.
       2.    Isolator deflection.
       3.    Snubber minimum clearances.
       4.    Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
             retest until no leaks exist.
       5.    Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system. Remove malfunctioning
             units, replace with new units, and retest.
       6.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
             and equipment.


3.5    ADJUSTING

  A.   Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.

  B.   Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
       height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
       during normal operation.

  C.   Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement
       during start and stop.

  D.   Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.

  E.   Adjust active height of spring isolators.

  F.   Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

  G.   Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
       operation.


MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                               15071 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                        BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                           AUGUST 9, 2010


  H.   Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to
       resist seismic forces.


3.6    CLEANING

  A.   After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control
       devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.


3.7    DEMONSTRATION

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
       to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 1 Section
       "Closeout Procedures."


3.8    VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT SCHEDULE

  A.   See Mechanical Drawings.


END OF SECTION 15071




MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS                                                         15071 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

       1.    Equipment nameplates.
       2.    Equipment markers.
       3.    Access panel and door markers.
       4.    Pipe markers.
       5.    Duct markers.
       6.    Valve tags.
       7.    Valve schedules.
       8.    Warning tags.


1.3    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

  B.   Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
       material and device.

  C.   Valve numbering scheme.

  D.   Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted
       copies) to include in maintenance manuals.


1.4    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
       Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
       devices for piping.


1.5    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
       surfaces where devices are to be applied.

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                   15075 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


  B.   Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

  C.   Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

  A.   Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment
       on equipment.

       1.    Data:

             a.      Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
             b.      Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
             c.      Labels of tested compliances.

       2.    Location: Accessible and visible.
       3.    Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

  B.   Equipment Markers:        Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic.       Include contact-type,
       permanent adhesive.

       1.    Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
       2.    Data:

             a.      Name and plan number.
             b.      Equipment service.
             c.      Design capacity.
             d.      Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving
                     conditions, and speed.

       3.    Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches
             for equipment.

  C.   Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with
       abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center
       hole for attachment.

       1.    Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.


2.2    PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

  A.   Manufactured Pipe Markers, General:         Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
       service, and showing direction of flow.

       1.    Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                    15075 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


       2.   Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for
            each application length.
       3.   Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
            extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
       4.   Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-
            type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
       5.   Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions;
            or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

  B.   Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
       back.

  C.   Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
       permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

       1.   Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4
            inch minimum.
       2.   Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
            inches minimum.


2.3    DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

  A.   Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of
       airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
       permanent adhesive.


2.4    VALVE TAGS

  A.   Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and
       1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole
       for fastener.

       1.   Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.
       2.   Material: 0.0375-inch- thick stainless steel.
       3.   Material: 3/32-inch- thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner
            layer.
       4.   Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.


2.5    VALVE SCHEDULES

  A.   Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
       number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
       (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
       identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

       1.    Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry
             walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
       2.    Frame: Extruded aluminum.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                 15075 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


       3.    Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness
             glass.


2.6    WARNING TAGS

  A.   Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized
       card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

       1.    Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum <Insert other>.
       2.    Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
       3.    Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
             OPERATE.
       4.    Color: Yellow background with black lettering.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

  A.   Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more
       than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
       Installer's option.


3.2    EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

  A.   Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
       equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located
       where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include
       nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:

       1.    Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
       2.    Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
       3.    Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
             equipment.
       4.    Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
       5.    Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.

  B.   Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
       mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers
       may be omitted if both are indicated.

       1.    Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
             inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
             lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-
             fourths the size of principal lettering.
       2.    Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
             safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and
             identify units.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                   15075 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


       3.   Locate markers where accessible and visible.        Include markers for the following
            general categories of equipment:

            a.    Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
                  units such as gas outlets.
            b.    Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
            c.    Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
            d.    Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption
                  units.
            e.    Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
            f.    Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
                  similar equipment.
            g.    Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
            h.    Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
            i.    Tanks and pressure vessels.
            j.    Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

  C.   Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
       mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.

       1.   Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:

            a.    Green: For cooling equipment and components.
            b.    Yellow: For heating equipment and components.
            c.    Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
            d.    Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components.

       2.   Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
            inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
            lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-
            fourths the size of principal lettering.
       3.   Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
            safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and
            identify units.
       4.   Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:

            a.    Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
                  units such as gas outlets.
            b.    Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption
                  units.
            c.    Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
            d.    Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
                  similar equipment.
            e.    Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
            f.    Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
            g.    Tanks and pressure vessels.
            h.    Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

  D.   Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                  15075 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


3.3    PIPING IDENTIFICATION

  A.   Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
       flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

       1.   Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers.
            Use size to ensure a tight fit.
       2.   Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe
            markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at
            least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of
            pipe.
       3.   Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use
            size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
       4.   Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe
            markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide,
            lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference
            of pipe.

  B.   Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
       rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
       nonconcealed locations as follows:

       1.   Near each valve and control device.
       2.   Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
            Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
       3.   Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
       4.   At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
            piping.
       5.   Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
       6.   Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet
            in areas of congested piping and equipment.
       7.   On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.


3.4    DUCT IDENTIFICATION

  A.   Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

       1.   Green: For cold-air supply ducts.
       2.   Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
       3.   Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
       4.   ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
       5.   Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
            inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
            lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-
            fourths the size of principal lettering.

  B.   Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
       intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable
       ceiling system.

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                  15075 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


3.5    VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

  A.   Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
       within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves;
       faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and
       similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve
       schedule.

  B.   Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme
       and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

       1.   Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

            a.    Cold Water: 2 inches, round.
            b.    Hot Water: 2 inches, round.
            c.    Fire Protection: 2 inches, round.
            d.    Gas: [1-1/2 inches] [2 inches], [round] [square].

       2.   Valve-Tag Color:

            a.    Cold Water: Natural.
            b.    Hot Water: Natural.
            c.    Fire Protection: Natural.
            d.    Gas: Natural.

       3.   Letter Color:

            a.    Cold Water: Black.
            b.    Hot Water: Black.
            c.    Fire Protection: Black.
            d.    Gas: Black.


3.6    VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

  A.   Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.


3.7    WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

  A.   Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
       required.


3.8    ADJUSTING

  A.   Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
       by other work.


3.9    CLEANING
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                                15075 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                            AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.


END OF SECTION 15075




MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION                                                               15075 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation;
         insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
         compounds.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
               penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
         2.    Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
               pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
         3.    Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
         4.    Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
         applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

         1.    Removable insulation sections at access panels.
         2.    Application of field-applied jackets.
         3.    Applications at linkages for control devices.

   C.    Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
         jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
         materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
         dates of tests.

   D.    Installer Certificates:   Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
         requirements.


1.4      QUALITY ASSURANCE


DUCT INSULATION                                                                               15081 - 1
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Installer Qualifications:  Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
         apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department
         of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

   B.    Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
         specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
         acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
         and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing
         and inspecting agency.

         1.    Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
               rating of 50 or less.
         2.    Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
               developed rating of 150 or less.

   C.    Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
         listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
         according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

         1.    Include the following mockups:

               a.    One 10-foot section of rectangular straight duct.
               b.    One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
               c.    One branch takeoff.
               d.    One transition fitting.
               e.    Four support hangers.

         2.    Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
               insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
         3.    Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
         4.    Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
               constructed.
         5.    Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
         6.    Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
               judging the completed Work.
         7.    Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
         8.    Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
               Substantial Completion.


1.5      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

   A.    Packaging:   Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with
         appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
         temperature.


1.6      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

DUCT INSULATION                                                                               15081 - 2
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


1.7      SCHEDULING

   A.    Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
         on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
         products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
         following:

   B.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

               a.    CertainTeed Manson.
               b.    Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
               c.    Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
               d.    Schuller International, Inc.


2.2      INSULATION MATERIALS

   A.    Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
         Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
         from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

   B.A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
        Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
        from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.


2.3      FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

   A.    General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

   B.    Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
         aluminum foil.

   C.    Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
         with ASTM B 209, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in
         contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the
         end of this Section.

         1.    Finish: Smooth finish.
         2.    Finish: Cross-crimp corrugated finish.
DUCT INSULATION                                                                            15081 - 3
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


         3.    Finish: Stucco-embossed finish.
         4.    Finish: Factory-painted finish.
         5.    Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.


2.4      ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

   A.    Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
         Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

         1.    Tape Width: 4 inches.

   B.    Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

         1.    Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
         2.    Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
         3.    Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
         4.    Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
         5.    Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

   C.    Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-
         inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

   D.    Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
         welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness
         indicated.

         1.    Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached
               surface.

   E.    Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
         washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
         sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

         1.    Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
               temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
               100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

   F.    Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
         manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
         insulation thickness indicated.

   G.    IMPORTANT: Adhesives / sealants shall comply with South Coast Air Quality Management
         District Rule #1168 VOC limits.


2.5      VAPOR RETARDERS

   A.    Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible
         with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

DUCT INSULATION                                                                             15081 - 4
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                       Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
         other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

   B.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      PREPARATION

   A.    Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
         will adversely affect insulation application.


3.3      GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
         instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
         length of ducts and fittings.

   B.    Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
         required for each duct system.

   C.    Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
         accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
         or dry state.

   D.    Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

   E.    Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
         retarder.

   F.    Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

   G.    Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
         adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

   H.    Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

   I.    Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
         integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

   J.    Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
         hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
         insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.




DUCT INSULATION                                                                               15081 - 5
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


   K.    Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
         seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to
         maintain vapor retarder.

   L.    Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

         1.    Pull jacket tight and smooth.
         2.    Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
               insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
         3.    Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
               seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

   M.    Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
         insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

   N.    Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

         1.    Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
               retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
               punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder
               seal.
         2.    Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
               outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
               insulation.

   O.    Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
         flashing.

         1.    Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
         2.    Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
         3.    Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

   P.    Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
         partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

   Q.    Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper
         sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

   R.    Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support
         at top of floor.

         1.    For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
               ends with vapor-retarder mastic.


3.4      MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

   A.    Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
         anchor pins and speed washers.


DUCT INSULATION                                                                                  15081 - 6
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
               square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
         2.    Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
               transitions.
         3.    Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and
               sides of vertical ducts as follows:

               a.    On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal
                     centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
                     inches o.c.
               b.    On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c.
                     each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins
                     and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
               c.    Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
                     and plenums.
               d.    Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

         4.    Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
         5.    Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
               insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
               facing.
         6.    Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
               2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
               insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-
               sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
         7.    Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end
               joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
         8.    Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
               segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
               individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
         9.    Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
               surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
               alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches
               o.c.
         10.   Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
               indicated to receive vapor retarder.

   B.    Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and
         anchor pins and speed washers.

         1.    Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
               square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
         2.    Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
               transitions.
         3.    Space anchor pins as follows:

               a.    On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal
                     centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
                     inches o.c.


DUCT INSULATION                                                                            15081 - 7
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


               b.    On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c.
                     each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins
                     and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
               c.    Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
                     and plenums.
               d.    Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

         4.    Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
               insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
               facing.
         5.    Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
               2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
               insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-
               sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
         6.    Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
               segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to
               outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct
               elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
         7.    Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
               surface with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
               alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches
               o.c.
         8.    Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
               indicated to receive vapor retarder.


3.5      FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

   A.    Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
         factory-applied jackets.

         1.    Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
         2.    Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
               recommended adhesive.
         3.    Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.


3.6      FINISHES

   A.    Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as
         specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

   B.    Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
         insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

   C.B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
        inspection of the completed Work.


3.7      DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

DUCT INSULATION                                                                            15081 - 8
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

   B.    Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
         this Section.

   C.    Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

         1.    Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
         2.    Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

   D.    Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
         systems, materials, and equipment:

         1.    Metal ducts with duct liner.
         2.    Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
         3.    Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
         4.    Flexible connectors.
         5.    Vibration-control devices.
         6.    Testing agency labels and stamps.
         7.    Nameplates and data plates.
         8.    Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.


3.8      INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

   A.    Service: Round, supply- and return-air ducts, concealed.

         1.    Material: Mineral-fiber board OR Mineral-fiber blanket:
         2.    Thickness: 2 inches, R-value = 6.0 or higher.
         3.    Number of Layers: One.
         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.

   B.    Service: Rectangular, supply- and return-air ducts, concealed:

         1.    Material: Mineral-fiber board OR Mineral-fiber blanket.
         2.    Thickness: 2 inches, R-value = 6.0 or higher.
         3.    Number of Layers: One.
         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.

   C.    Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, concealed / exposed:

         1.    Material: Mineral-fiber boardblanket.
         2.    Thickness: 2 inches, R-value = 8.0 or higher.
         3.    Number of Layers: One.
         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.

   D.    Service: Round, supply-air and return ducts, exposed:

DUCT INSULATION                                                                              15081 - 9
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                        Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                          AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Material: Mineral-fiber board (internal).
         2.    Thickness: 2 inches.
         3.    Number of Layers: One.
         4.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.


END OF SECTION 15081




DUCT INSULATION                                                    15081 - 10
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15082 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
         jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and application for ducts
               and plenums.
         2.    Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
         applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

         1.    Field application for each equipment type.
         2.    Removable insulation sections at access panels.
         3.    Application of field-applied jackets.
         4.    Special shapes for cellular-glass insulation.

   C.    Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
         describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- square sections of each sample
         material.

         1.    Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
               field-applied finish material indicated.

   D.    Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
         jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
         materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
         dates of tests.

   E.    Installer Certificates:   Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
         requirements.

EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                          15082 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


1.4      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Installer Qualifications:  Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
         apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department
         of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

   B.    Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
         specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
         acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
         and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing
         and inspecting agency.

         1.    Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
               rating of 50 or less.
         2.    Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
               developed rating of 150 or less.

   C.    Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
         listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
         according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

         1.    Include the following mockups:

               a.    One chilled-water centrifugal pump.
               b.    One small tank or vessel.

         2.    Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
               insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
         3.    Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
         4.    Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
               constructed.
         5.    Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
         6.    Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
               judging the completed Work.
         7.    Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
         8.    Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
               Substantial Completion.


1.5      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

   A.    Packaging:   Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with
         appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
         temperature.


1.6      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.


EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                        15082 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

               a.    CertainTeed Manson.
               b.    Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
               c.    Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
               d.    Schuller International, Inc.


2.2      INSULATION MATERIALS

   A.    Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
         Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
         from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

   B.    Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
         Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
         from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.


2.3      FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

   A.    General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

   B.    Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
         aluminum foil.

   C.    PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop
         or field cutting and forming.

         1.    Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
         2.    PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
         3.    PVC Jacket Color: Color-code to match connected piping jackets based on materials
               contained within the piping system.

   D.    Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
         with ASTM B 209, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in
         contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the
         end of this Section.

         1.    Finish:   Smooth finish.
         2.    Finish:   Cross-crimp corrugated finish.
         3.    Finish:   Stucco-embossed finish.
         4.    Finish:   Factory-painted finish.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                       15082 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


         5.    Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.


2.4      ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

   A.    Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
         Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

         1.    Tape Width: 4 inches.

   B.    Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

         1.    Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
         2.    Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
         3.    Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
         4.    Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
         5.    Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

   C.    Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-
         inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

   D.    Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
         welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness
         indicated.

         1.    Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached
               surface.

   E.    Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
         washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
         sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

         1.    Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
               temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
               100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

   F.    Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
         manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
         insulation thickness indicated.


2.5      VAPOR RETARDERS

   A.    Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible
         with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION
EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                        15082 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
         other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

   B.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      PREPARATION

   A.    Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
         will adversely affect insulation application.


3.3      GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
         instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
         length of equipment.

   B.    Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
         required for each equipment system.

   C.    Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
         accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the
         wet or dry state.

   D.    Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

   E.    Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
         retarder.

   F.    Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

   G.    Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
         adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

   H.    Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

   I.    Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
         integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

   J.    Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
         hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
         insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

   K.    Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
         seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to
         maintain vapor retarder.

   L.    Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

         1.    Pull jacket tight and smooth.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                          15082 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


         2.    Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
               insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
         3.    Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
               seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.

   M.    Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
         insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

   N.    Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap
         insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape
         having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or
         mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.

   O.    Insulate the following indoor equipment:

         1.    Chilled-water air separators (small tanks).
         2.    Chilled-water centrifugal pump housings.
         3.    Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
         4.    Heating hot-water air separators (small tanks).

   P.    Omit insulation from the following:

         1.    Vibration-control devices.
         2.    Testing agency labels and stamps.
         3.    Nameplates and data plates.
         4.    Manholes.
         5.    Handholes.
         6.    Cleanouts.


3.4      INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION

   A.    Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with
         adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

         1.    Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
               square foot, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
         2.    Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment,
               including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint.
               Stagger end joints.
         3.    Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
         4.    Install adhesive-attached or self-adhesive anchor pins and speed washers on sides of
               tanks and vessels as follows:

               a.    Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
               b.    On tank and vessel, 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
                     inches o.c. in both directions.
               c.    Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
               d.    Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of tanks
                     and vessels.

EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                      15082 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


         5.    Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
         6.    Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
               insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
               facing
         7.    Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
         8.    Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
         9.    Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other
               elements that require frequent removal for service.
         10.   Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
               nameplates.
         11.   Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
               indicated to receive vapor retarder.

   B.    Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply
         insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written
         instructions.

         1.    Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's
               recommended adhesive.
         2.    Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.


3.5      FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

   A.    Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
         factory-applied jackets.

         1.    Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
         2.    Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
               recommended adhesive.
         3.    Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

   B.    Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.

         1.    Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
         2.    Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
         3.    Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
         4.    Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at
               end joints.
         5.    Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
               insulation with vapor-retarder mastic.

   C.    PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and
         vessels for horizontal applications.  Secure and seal seams and end joints with
         manufacturer's welding adhesive.

         1.    Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and
               the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.

   D.    Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instructions.

EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                          15082 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   E.    Stainless-Steel Jackets:     Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written
         instructions.


3.6      FINISHES

   A.    Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as
         specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

   B.    Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
         insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

   C.    Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
         inspection of the completed Work.


3.7      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field
         quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to
         determine compliance with requirements:

   B.    Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality-
         control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine
         compliance with requirements:

   C.    Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
         materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

         1.    Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Architect.
         2.    Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent of chilled-
               water pumps, whichever is greater.
         3.    Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small tanks,
               whichever is greater.

   D.    Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals
         noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
         according to these Specifications.

   E.    Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according to
         these Specifications.


3.8      EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

   A.    Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

   B.    Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
         this Section.



EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                           15082 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


3.9      INTERIOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

   A.    Equipment: Chilled-water air separators, buffer tanks and expansion tanks.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket or Flexible elastomeric.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: as specified or 2”, whichever is thicker..
         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Glass cloth.
         5.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         6.    Field-Applied Jacket: PVC.

   B.    Equipment: Heating hot-water air separators and expansion tanks.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: 1-1/2-inch
         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Glass cloth.
         5.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         6.    Field-Applied Jacket: PVC.

         7.    Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
         8.    Finish: None.




EQUIPMENT INSULATION                                                                        15082 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15082




EQUIPMENT INSULATION                   15082 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
         Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
         field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in
               underground piping outside the building.
         2.    Division 2 Section "Steam Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in
               underground piping outside the building.
         3.    Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
               penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
         4.    Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
         5.    Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and
               application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
         6.    Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and
               protection saddles.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and
         field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

         1.    Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each
               type of insulation and hanger.
         2.    Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
         3.    Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
         4.    Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
               type of insulation.
         5.    Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
         6.    Application of field-applied jackets.

   C.    Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing
         product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
PIPING INSULATION                                                                             15083 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010

         1.    Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
         2.    Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.
         3.    Jacket Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
         4.    Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each
               type of field-applied finish material indicated.

   D.    Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
         having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of
         insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements
         indicated. Include dates of tests.

   E.    Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
         requirements.


1.4      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
         apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S.
         Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

   B.    Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to
         those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting
         agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket
         materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of
         applicable testing and inspecting agency.

         1.    Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-
               developed rating of 50 or less.
         2.    Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
               developed rating of 150 or less.

   C.    Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and
         finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build
         mockups according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
         completed Work:

         1.    Include the following mockups:

               a.    One 10-foot section of NPS 2 straight pipe.
               b.    One 90-degree elbow.
               c.    One tee fitting.
               d.    One NPS 2 valve.
               e.    Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
               f.    One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
               g.    One reducer.

         2.    Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details
               for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.


PIPING INSULATION                                                                             15083 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010

         3.    Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
               Architect.
         4.    Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
               constructed.
         5.    Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
         6.    Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
               for judging the completed Work.
         7.    Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
         8.    Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
               time of Substantial Completion.


1.5      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

   A.    Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with
         appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
         temperature.


1.6      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
         Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

   B.    Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

   C.    Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.


1.7      SCHEDULING

   A.    Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
         installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of
         piping that have satisfactory test results.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
         the following:

         1.    Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

               a.    CertainTeed Manson.
               b.    Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
               c.    Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

         1.    Cellular-Glass Insulation:
PIPING INSULATION                                                                               15083 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      AUGUST 9, 2010

               a.    Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.


2.2      INSULATION MATERIALS

   A.    Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid,
         hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.

         1.    Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
               Class 1.
         2.    Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
               Class 2.

   A.    Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
         following:

         1.    Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-
               purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
         2.    Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
               grades:

               a.    Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation,
                     for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
                     glass-fiber insulation.
               b.    Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

         3.    Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor
               applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
         4.    Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
         5.    Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
         6.    Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
               ASTM C 449/C 449M.

   B.    Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for
         dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.


2.3      FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

   A.    General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

   B.    Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper
         and aluminum foil.

   C.    PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for
         shop or field cutting and forming.

         1.    Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
         2.    PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
         3.    PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained
               within the piping system.
PIPING INSULATION                                                                                   15083 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                       Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010

   D.    Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-
         mil- thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.

         1.    Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
               flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap
               and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.
         2.    Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

   E.    Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209,
         3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

   F.    Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
         indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

         1.    Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.010 inch thick.
         2.    Finish and Thickness: Corrugated finish, 0.010 inch thick.
         3.    Finish and Thickness: Stucco-embossed finish, 0.016 inch thick.
         4.    Finish and Thickness: Painted finish, 0.016 inch thick.
         5.    Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
         6.    Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same
               material, finish, and thickness as jacket.


2.4      ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

   A.    Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for
         tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..

         1.    Tape Width: 4 inches.

   B.    Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

         1.    Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
         2.    Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
         3.    Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
         4.    Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
         5.    Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

   C.    Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or
         0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.


2.5      VAPOR RETARDERS

   A.    Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are
         compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


PIPING INSULATION                                                                           15083 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010

3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
         and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

   B.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      PREPARATION

   A.    Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that
         will adversely affect insulation application.


3.3      GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's
         written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout
         the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

   B.    Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and
         thicknesses required for each piping system.

   C.    Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
         accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either
         wet or dry state.

   D.    Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

   E.    Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

   F.    Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
         specialties.

   G.    Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a
         vapor retarder.

   H.    Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

   I.    Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
         with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

   J.    Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

   K.    Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and
         vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for
         applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

   L.    Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in
         insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder
         mastic.
PIPING INSULATION                                                                             15083 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010

         1.    Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
         2.    For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation
               on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper
               insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the
               insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
         3.    Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
               insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
               by the insulation material manufacturer.
         4.    Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
               shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the
               hanger, support, and shield.

   M.    Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
         taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the
         insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

   N.    Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

   O.    Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

         1.    Pull jacket tight and smooth.
         2.    Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
               insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
               along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
         3.    Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply
               insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to
               receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at
               4 inches o.c.

               a.    Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor
                     retarder.

         4.    Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
               seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
         5.    At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal
               voids with vapor-retarder mastic.

   P.    Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of
         roof flashing.

         1.    Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
         2.    Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
         3.    Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
               below top of roof flashing.
         4.    Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

   Q.    Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
         insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder
         mastic.


PIPING INSULATION                                                                              15083 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010

   R.    Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls
         and floors.

   S.    Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations:        Apply insulation continuously through
         penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

         1.    Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
               "Firestopping."

   T.    Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

         1.    For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic
               where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

   U.    IMPORTANT: Adhesives / sealants shall comply with ?South Coast Air Quality
         Management District Rule #1168 VOC limits.


3.4      CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION

   A.    Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

         1.    Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
               deforming insulation materials.
         2.    Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
               vapor-retarder mastic.
         3.    For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
               staples at 6 inches o.c.
         4.    For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
               longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
               the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

   B.    Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

         1.    Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
         2.    Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
               bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
         3.    Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
               circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-
               glass block insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
         4.    Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
               overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

   C.    Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

         1.    Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
               pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
               instructions.
         2.    When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections
               of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

PIPING INSULATION                                                                            15083 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                      BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                         AUGUST 9, 2010

           3.    Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
           4.    Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe
                 insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with
                 manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
                 retarder mastic.

      D.   Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

           1.    Apply premolded segments of cellular-glass insulation or glass-fiber blanket
                 insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to
                 allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange
                 insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
           2.    Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
           3.    Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
                 Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal
                 seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
           4.    Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure
                 fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with
                 tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
           5.    For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with
                 canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
                 manufacturer.


3.4        MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

      A.   Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

           1.    Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
                 deforming insulation materials.
           2.    Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
                 retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to
                 form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
           3.    For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
                 inches o.c.
           4.    For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
                 tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
                 manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

      B.   Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

           1.    Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
           2.    Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
                 twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
           3.    Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
                 adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
           4.    Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
                 seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

      C.   Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
PIPING INSULATION                                                                                      15083 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                     BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        AUGUST 9, 2010

         1.    Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
               insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
         2.    When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections
               of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
               insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
         3.    Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
         4.    Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation
               jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments
               and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

   D.    Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

         1.    Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
               insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
         2.    When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
               insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
               valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for
               access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
         3.    Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
         4.    Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure
               fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
               vapor-retarder mastic.
         5.    Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
               covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
               retarder mastic.
         6.    For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
               jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.


3.5      FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

   A.    Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
         factory-applied jackets.

         1.    Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch(50-mm) overlap at seams
               and joints.
         2.    Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
               recommended adhesive.
         3.    Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

   B.    Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.

         1.    Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
         2.    Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
         3.    Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
         4.    Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint
               strips at end joints.
         5.    Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
               insulation with vapor-retarder mastic.

PIPING INSULATION                                                                                    15083 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010

   C.    Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
         joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

   D.    Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
         joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
         weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
         stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.


3.6      FINISHES

   A.    Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as
         specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

   B.    Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two
         coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

   C.    Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
         inspection of the completed Work.


3.7      PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

   A.    Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this
         Section.

   B.    Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
         following systems, materials, and equipment:

         1.    Flexible connectors.
         2.    Vibration-control devices.
         3.    Fire-suppression piping.
         4.    Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
         5.    Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
         6.    Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
         7.    Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


3.8      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following
         field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and
         finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

   B.    Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality-
         control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to
         determine compliance with requirements:

   C.    Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing
         insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

PIPING INSULATION                                                                          15083 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010

         1.    Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect.
         2.    Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less,
               for various pipe sizes.
         3.    Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less,
               for various pipe sizes.

   D.    Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals
         noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new
         materials according to these Specifications.

   E.    Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection
         according to these Specifications.


3.9      INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

   A.    Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor
         retarders, and field-applied jackets.

   B.    Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and
         material, thickness, and jacket requirements.


3.10     INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

   A.    Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacketMineral-fiber.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

               a.    Copper Pipe, ½-inch to 1-inch: 1-inch
               b.    Copper Pipe, 1-1/2-in and larger: 1-1/2-inch

         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.
         6.    Finish: None.

   B.    Service: Domestic chilled water.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Mineral-fiberCellular glass, with jacket.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

               a.    Copper Pipe, All: ½-inch

         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
         6.    Finish: None.


PIPING INSULATION                                                                          15083 - 12
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010

   C.    Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures
         for the disabled.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: ½”
         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: PVC P-trap and supply covers.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.
         6.    Finish: Painted.

   D.    Service: Chilled-water supply and returnRefrigerant suction, liquid and hot gas.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Mineral-fiberCellular glass, with jacket.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

               a.    Copper Pipe, ½-inch to 1-inch: 1-inch
               b.    Copper and/or steel Pipe, 1-1/2-in and larger: 1-1/2-inch

         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.
         6.    Finish: None.

   E.    Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Mineral-fiberCellular glass, with jacket.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

               a.    Copper Pipe, ½-inch to 1-inch: 1-inch
               b.    Copper and/or steel Pipe, 1-1/2-in and larger: 1-1/2-inch

         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: No.
         6.    Finish: None.


3.11     EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

   A.    This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
         insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.

   B.    Service: Refrigerant suction, liquid and hot gasChilled-water supply and return.

         1.    Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
         2.    Insulation Material: Mineral-fiberCellular glass, with jacket.
         3.    Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

               a.    Copper Pipe, ½-inch to 1-inch: 1-inch
               b.    Copper and/or steel Pipe, 1-1/2-in and larger: 1-1/2-inch

PIPING INSULATION                                                                             15083 - 13
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                AUGUST 9, 2010

         4.    Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
         5.    Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
         6.    Finish: None.


END OF SECTION 15083




PIPING INSULATION                                        15083 - 14
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15110 - VALVES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
         1.    Copper-alloy ball valves.
         2.    Ferrous-alloy ball valves.
         3.    Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.
         4.    High-pressure butterfly valves.
         5.    Bronze check valves.
         6.    Gray-iron swing check valves.
         7.    Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
         8.    Bronze globe valves.
         9.    Cast-iron globe valves.
         10. Cast-iron plug valves.
         11. Resilient-seated, cast-iron, eccentric plug valves.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction
               piping.
         2.    Division 13 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
         3.    Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
         4.    Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and
               actuators.
         5.    Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.


1.3      DEFINITIONS

   A.    The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

         1.    CWP: Cold working pressure.
         2.    EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
         3.    NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
         4.    PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
         5.    SWP: Steam working pressure.
         6.    TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.



VALVES                                                                                     15110 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


1.4      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
         valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
         dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application.
         Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
         and accessories.


1.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

         1.    Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping
               valves unless referenced.

   B.    ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension
         and design criteria.

   C.    NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


1.6      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

   A.    Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

         1.    Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
         2.    Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
         3.    Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
         4.    Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
         5.    Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
         6.    Block check valves in either closed or open position.

   B.    Use the following precautions during storage:

         1.    Maintain valve end protection.
         2.    Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
               outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

   C.    Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
         handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
         requirements apply for product selection:


VALVES                                                                                       15110 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
               offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
               to, the manufacturers specified.
         2.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
               manufacturers specified.


2.2      VALVES, GENERAL

   A.    Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

   B.    Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

   C.    Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

   D.    Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
         system pressures and temperatures.

   E.    Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

   F.    Valve Actuators:

         1.    Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in
               the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
         2.    Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
         3.    Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
         4.    Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
         5.    Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every
               10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.

   G.    Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

   H.    Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
         ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

   I.    Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

         1.    Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

               a.    Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate,
                     and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

         2.    Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

   J.    Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.


2.3      COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:


VALVES                                                                                       15110 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                          AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

               a.    American Valve, Inc.
               b.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
               c.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
               d.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
               e.    DynaQuip Controls.
               f.    Grinnell Corporation.
               g.    Jamesbury, Inc.
               h.    Kitz Corporation of America.
               i.    Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
               j.    NIBCO INC.
               k.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

         2.    Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

               a.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
               b.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
               c.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
               d.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
               e.    DynaQuip Controls.
               f.    Flow-Tek, Inc.
               g.    Grinnell Corporation.
               h.    Hammond Valve.
               i.    Honeywell Braukmann.
               j.    Jamesbury, Inc.
               k.    Jomar International, LTD.
               l.    Kitz Corporation of America.
               m.    Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
               n.    Milwaukee Valve Company.
               o.    Nexus Valve Specialties.
               p.    NIBCO INC.
               q.    R & M Energy Systems (Borger, TX).
               r.    Red-White Valve Corp.
               s.    Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves.
               t.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

   B.    Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

   C.    One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze
         ball, PTFE or TFE seats, and 400-psig minimum CWP rating.

   D.    Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze
         ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.


2.4      HIGH-PRESSURE BUTTERFLY VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Bray International, Inc.
VALVES                                                                               15110 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                        Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         2.    Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div.
         3.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal.
         4.    General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
         5.    Grinnell Corporation.
         6.    Jamesbury, Inc.
         7.    Pratt, Henry Company.
         8.    Process Development & Control.
         9.    Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls.
         10.   Xomox Corporation.

   B.    High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-68.

   C.    Flangeless, Class 150, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer type.

   D.    Single-Flange, Class 150, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer type.

   E.    Flangeless, Class 300, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type.

   F.    Single-Flange, Class 300, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type.


2.5      BRONZE CHECK VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

               a.    Grinnell Corporation.
               b.    Kitz Corporation of America.
               c.    Milwaukee Valve Company.

         2.    Type 3, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc:

               a.    American Valve, Inc.
               b.    Cincinnati Valve Co.
               c.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
               d.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
               e.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
               f.    Grinnell Corporation.
               g.    Hammond Valve.
               h.    Kitz Corporation of America.
               i.    Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
               j.    Milwaukee Valve Company.
               k.    NIBCO INC.
               l.    Powell, Wm. Co.
               m.    Red-White Valve Corp.
               n.    Walworth Co.
               o.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

   B.    Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.

VALVES                                                                                      15110 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc
         and bronze seat.

   D.    Type 3, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.


2.6      GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Type II, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Composition to Metal Seats:

               a.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
               b.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
               c.    Mueller Co.
               d.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

   B.    Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.

   C.    Type I, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats.

   D.    Type I, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats.

   E.    Type II, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.

   F.    Type II, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.

   G.    175-psig CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved
         or shouldered ends.

   H.    300-psig CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved
         or shouldered ends.


2.7      SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Type III, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves:

               a.    Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
               b.    Flomatic Valves.
               c.    GA Industries, Inc.
               d.    Grinnell Corporation.
               e.    Hammond Valve.
               f.    Metraflex Co.
               g.    Milwaukee Valve Company.
               h.    Multiplex Manufacturing Co.
               i.    NIBCO INC.
               j.    SSI Equipment, Inc.
               k.    Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.
VALVES                                                                                     15110 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                        BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                           AUGUST 9, 2010


               l.    Valve and Primer Corp.

   B.    Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and
         bronze or alloy seat.

   C.    Type III, Class 250, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and
         flanged ends.


2.8      BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Type 3, Bronze Globe Valves with Renewable Seat and Metal Disc:

               a.    Cincinnati Valve Co.
               b.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
               c.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
               d.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
               e.    Grinnell Corporation.
               f.    Hammond Valve.
               g.    Milwaukee Valve Company.
               h.    NIBCO INC.
               i.    Walworth Co.

   B.    Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

   C.    Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable
         seat. Include union-ring bonnet.


2.9      CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Lubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:

               a.    Milliken Valve Co., Inc.
               b.    Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
               c.    Olson Technologies; Homestead Div.
               d.    R & M Energy Systems (Tomball, TX).
               e.    Walworth Co.

   B.    Cast-Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78.

   C.    Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.


2.10     RESILIENT-SEATED, CAST-IRON, ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:
VALVES                                                                                 15110 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
         2.    Milliken Valve Company.
         3.    Olson Technologies; Homestead Div.
         4.    Pratt, Henry Company.
         5.    Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.

   B.    Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Design similar
         to MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig minimum CWP.

         1.    Resilient Seating Material:     Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise
               indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
         other conditions affecting performance.

         1.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

   B.    Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
         Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
         shipping and handling.

   C.    Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
         accessible by such operations.

   D.    Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

   E.    Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
         proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
         composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

   F.    Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


3.2      VALVE APPLICATIONS

   A.    Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications.        If valve applications are not
         indicated, use the following:

         1.    Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.
         2.    Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
         3.    Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

   B.    If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
         valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.


VALVES                                                                                       15110 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Chilled-Water and Heating-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
         1.    Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
         2.    High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: Single-flange, Class 150.
         3.    Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
         4.    Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron.
         5.    Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
         6.    Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 150, lubricated-type, cast iron.
         7.    Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating,
               cast iron.

   D.    Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
         1.  Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One or Two-piece, 400-psig CWP rating, copper
             alloy.
         2.  Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
             with EPDM liner.
         3.  Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze.
         4.  Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron.
         5.  Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
         6.  Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 150, lubricated-type with FDA-approved-
             material sealant, cast iron.
         7.  Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating,
             cast iron.


3.3      VALVE INSTALLATION

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.         Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
         maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

   C.    Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

   D.    Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

   E.    Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

   F.    Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

         1.    Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
         2.    Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
         3.    Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.


3.4      JOINT CONSTRUCTION

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
         joint construction.


VALVES                                                                                        15110 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
         according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

   C.    Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
         alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


3.5      ADJUSTING

   A.    Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
         but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


END OF SECTION 15110




VALVES                                                                                  15110 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems, and
         the following:

         1.    Flexible-hose expansion joints.
         2.    Pipe bends and loops.
         3.    Guides and anchors.


1.3      PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
         temperatures.

   B.    Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.


1.4      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

         1.    Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and
               design of expansion fittings and loops.
         2.    Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods
               of assembly.
         3.    Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.

   C.    Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

   D.    Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
         fitting and loop.


1.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE


PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS                                                                      15121 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
         expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.

         1.    Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified
               to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
               engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
               performed for installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
               indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

   B.    Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
         Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints:

               a.   Flexicraft Industries.
               b.   Metraflex Co.
         2.    Guides:

               a.    Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
               b.    Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
               c.    B-Line Systems, Inc.
               d.    Flex-Weld, Inc.
               e.    Grinnell Corp.
               f.    Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
               g.    Metraflex Co.


2.2      PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

   A.    Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs
         joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-
         metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.

         1.    Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.

               a.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450
                     psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F minimum pressure ratings.
               b.    NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel
                     sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F minimum
                     pressure ratings.
         2.    Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.

PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS                                                                          15121 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


               a.    End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
               b.    End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.
               c.    Joints for NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-
                     steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F minimum
                     pressure ratings.
               d.    Joints for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid,
                     stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F
                     minimum pressure ratings.


2.3      GUIDES

   A.    Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
         piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.


2.4      MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

   A.    Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

   B.    Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

   C.    Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

   D.    Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
         hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
         application.
         1.    Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
         2.    Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
         3.    Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

   E.    Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened
         portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
         1.    Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin
               suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be
               installed.
         2.    Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
               otherwise indicated.
         3.    Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

   F.    Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
         Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

   G.    Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
         grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
         1.    Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
         2.    Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
         3.    Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.


PART 3 - EXECUTION
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS                                                                      15121 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


3.1      EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

   A.    Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

   B.    Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

   C.    Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.


3.2      PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

   A.    Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
         absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

   B.    Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
         1.    Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and
               Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
         2.    Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
               instructions.


3.3      SWING CONNECTIONS

   A.    Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee
         in main.

   B.    Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
         including tee in riser.

   C.    Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
         including tee in main.


3.4      GUIDE INSTALLATION

   A.    Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

   B.    Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.


3.5      ANCHOR INSTALLATION

   A.    Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
         ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

   B.    Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and
         to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

   C.    Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and
         include embedded fasteners.


PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS                                                                           15121 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   D.    Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if
         expansion fittings are indicated.

   E.    Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
         on or in concrete.


3.6      PAINTING

   A.    Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
         immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
         painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

         1.    Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

   B.    Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
         abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
         "Painting."

   C.    Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
         galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS                                                                       15121 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15121




PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS                   15121 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters installed
         outside the building.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters outside the building.
         2.    Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for gas meters outside the building.
         3.    Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping" for gas meters.
         4.    Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of factory-
               fabricated equipment.

   C.    Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
         meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
         and location for each meter and gage.

   C.    Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies
         under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

   D.    Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.

   E.    Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in
         Division 1. Include data for the following:

         1.    Flow-measuring systems.
         2.    Flowmeters.
         3.    Thermal-energy flowmeters.
         4.    Water meters.



METERS AND GAGES                                                                               15122 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

               a.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
               b.    Ernst Gage Co.
               c.    Marsh Bellofram.
               d.    Palmer Instruments, Inc.
               e.    Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
               f.    Weiss Instruments, Inc.
               g.    Winter's Thermogauges, Inc.

         2.    Direct-Mounting, Filled-System Dial Thermometers:

               a.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation.
               b.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
               c.    Marsh Bellofram.
               d.    Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
               e.    Weiss Instruments, Inc.

         3.    Insertion Dial Thermometers:

               a.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation.
               b.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
               c.    Reotemp Instrument Corp.
               d.    Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
               e.    Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
               f.    Weiss Instruments, Inc.

         4.    Pressure Gages:

               a.    AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
               b.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation.
               c.    Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
               d.    Ernst Gage Co.
               e.    Marsh Bellofram.
               f.    Noshok, Inc.
               g.    Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
               h.    Weiss Instruments, Inc.
               i.    WIKA Instruments Corp.
               j.    Winter's Thermogauges, Inc.

         5.    Test Plugs:

               a.    Flow Design, Inc.
METERS AND GAGES                                                                            15122 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


               b.    MG Piping Products Co.
               c.    National Meter.
               d.    Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
               e.    Sisco Manufacturing Co.
               f.    Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
               g.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

         6.    Wafer-Orifice-Type Flow Elements:

               a.    ABB, Inc.; ABB Instrumentation.
               b.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               c.    Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
               d.    ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
               e.    Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.

         7.    Venturi-Type Flow Elements:

               a.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               b.    Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
               c.    Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
               d.    Flow Design, Inc.
               e.    Gerand Engineering Co.
               f.    Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
               g.    Leeds & Northrup.
               h.    McCrometer, Inc.
               i.    Preso Meters Corp.
               j.    Victaulic Co. of America.


2.2      THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

   A.    Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

         1.    Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
         2.    Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
         3.    Hot Water: 30 to 300 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
         4.    Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

   B.    Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
         maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.


2.3      LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

   A.    Description: ASTM E 1.

   B.    Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
         9 inches long.

   C.    Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-
         degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
METERS AND GAGES                                                                        15122 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   D.    Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.

   E.    Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled with magnifying lens.

   F.    Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

   G.    Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
         installation.


2.4      DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

   A.    Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.

   B.    Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4-1/2-inch- diameter, glass lens.

   C.    Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-
         degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

   D.    Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.

   E.    Movement: Brass, precision geared.

   F.    Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

   G.    Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
         installation.


2.5      INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS

   A.    Description: ASME B40.3, bimetal type.

   B.    Dial: 1-inch diameter.

   C.    Case: Stainless steel.

   D.    Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 1/8-inch- diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal length of
         5 inches.


2.6      SEPARABLE SOCKETS

   A.    Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
         fixed thermometer stem.

         1.    Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
         2.    Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
         3.    Material: Steel, for use in steel piping.
         4.    Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of
               insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.

METERS AND GAGES                                                                            15122 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         5.    Insertion Length: To extend 2 inches into pipe.
         6.    Insertion Length: To extend to one-third of diameter of pipe.
         7.    Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
         8.    Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
         9.    Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.


2.7      THERMOMETER WELLS

   A.    Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
         thermometer.

         1.    Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
         2.    Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
         3.    Material: Steel, for use in steel piping.
         4.    Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of
               insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
         5.    Insertion Length: To extend 2 inches into pipe.
         6.    Insertion Length: To extend to one-third of diameter of pipe.
         7.    Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
         8.    Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
         9.    Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.


2.8      PRESSURE GAGES

   A.    Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection; dry
         type, unless liquid-filled-case type is indicated.

   B.    Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch- diameter, glass lens.

   C.    Connector: Brass, NPS 1/4.

   D.    Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

   E.    Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

   F.    Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

   G.    Accuracy: Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

   H.    Accuracy: Grade D, plus or minus 5 percent of whole scale.

   I.    Range: Comply with the following:

         1.    Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressureressure).
         2.    Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.


2.9      PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS


METERS AND GAGES                                                                               15122 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

   B.    Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

   C.    Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc
         of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.


2.10     TEST PLUGS

   A.    Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in NPS 1/2 fitting.

   B.    Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

   C.    Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum.

   D.    Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD probe from
         dial-type thermometer or pressure gage.

   E.    Core Inserts: Two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD probe from dial-
         type thermometer or pressure gage.

   F.    Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD probe from dial-type
         thermometer or pressure gage.

   G.    Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: 20 to 200 deg F, chlorosulfonated polyethylene
         synthetic rubber.

   H.    Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F6 deg C), ethylene-propylene-
         dieneterpolymer rubber.

   I.    Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

   J.    Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and
         carrying case.

         1.    Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
               operating conditions.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

   A.    Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
         applications where used.


3.2      THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

   A.    Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
METERS AND GAGES                                                                          15122 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Install in the following locations:

         1.    Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
         2.    Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.
         3.    Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems.
         4.    Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
         5.    Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
         6.    Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
         7.    Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
         8.    Each duct thermometer support flange.

   C.    Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
         thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

   D.    Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are
         indicated.

         1.    Install with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches) into fluid.
         2.    Install with socket extending to one-third of diameter of pipe.
         3.    Install with socket extending to center of pipe.
         4.    Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.

   E.    Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
         indicated.

         1.    Install with stem extending a minimum of 2 inches(50 mm) into fluid.
         2.    Install with stem extending to one-third of diameter of pipe.
         3.    Install with stem extending to center of pipe.
         4.    Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

   F.    Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
         indicated. Attach to duct with screws.


3.3      PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION

   A.    Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most
         readable position.

   B.    Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:

         1.    Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
         2.    Building water-service entrance.
         3.    Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.

   C.    Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.

   D.    Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.

         1.    Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure gages.

METERS AND GAGES                                                                               15122 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


3.4      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
         connection requirements:

         1.    Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
               maintenance.
         2.    Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
         3.    Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
         4.    Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.

   B.    Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.

   C.    Ground electrically operated meters.

         1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
               torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
               specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

   D.    Install electrical connections for power and devices.

   E.    Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.


3.5      ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

   A.    Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

   B.    Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

   C.    Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
         and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's
         touchup paint.


END OF SECTION 15122




METERS AND GAGES                                                                               15122 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and
           equipment inside the building.

      B.   Related Sections include the following:

           1.    Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and
                 fittings.
           2.    Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

      B.   PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.

      C.   PE: Polyethylene plastic.

      D.   PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic.

      E.   PP: Polypropylene plastic.

      F.   PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


1.4        PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems
           with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
           1.    Domestic Water Service Piping: 160 psig.
           2.    Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.


1.5        SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                       15140 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      AUGUST 9, 2010


      B.   Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.

      C.   Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
           requirements.


1.6        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

      B.   Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
           Appurtenances," and NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects;
           Sections 1 through 9," for combined fire-protection and domestic water service piping to
           building.

      C.   Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1
           through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        PIPING MATERIALS

      A.   Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
           materials.

      B.   Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured
           fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with,
           piping to be joined.

      C.   Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type
           coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal
           to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.


2.2        COPPER TUBING

      A.   Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.

           1.    Copper Pressure Fittings:         ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
                 wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
           2.    Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300
                 flanges if required to match piping.
           3.    Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-
                 and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

      B.   Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.

           1.    Copper Pressure Fittings:         ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
                 wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                             15140 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


           2.    Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300
                 flanges if required to match piping.
           3.    Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-
                 and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
           4.    Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
                 castings.

                 a.    Copper-Tubing, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar
                       to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot
                       water, and bolts and nuts.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXCAVATION

      A.   Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


3.2        PIPING APPLICATIONS

      A.   Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
           used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

      B.   Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.   Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.

      D.   Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on
           aboveground copper tubing.

      E.   Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
           size range:

           1.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
                 joints.
           2.    NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and
                 soldered joints.

      F.   Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size
           range:

           1.    NPS 2 and Smaller:       Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
                 soldered joints.


3.3        VALVE APPLICATIONS

      A.   Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
           following requirements apply:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                             15140 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


           1.    Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
                 butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
           2.    Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
                 cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
           3.    Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
           4.    Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.


3.4        PIPING INSTALLATION

      A.   Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for site water distribution and service piping.

      B.   Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
           installation.

      C.   Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and
           locations indicated.

      D.   Install underground ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41, and
           NFPA 24. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and
           connection to water service piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to
           wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

           1.    Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

      E.   Install underground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

      F.   Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
           penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
           make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
           Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

      G.   Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
           Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
           Methods" for wall penetration systems.

      H.   Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
           inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
           Gages" for pressure gages, and to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain
           valves and strainers.

      I.   Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves.         Refer to Division 15
           Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water-pressure regulators.

      J.   Install aboveground domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

      K.   Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that
           piping is full of water.

      L.   Perform the following steps before operation:

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                            15140 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


           1.    Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
           2.    Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
           3.    Open throttling valves to proper setting.
           4.    Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
                 piping during installation.
           5.    Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
           6.    Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified for
                 application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.

      M.   Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not
           operate water heaters before filling with water.

      N.   Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

           1.    Water-Pressure Regulators:      Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless
                 otherwise indicated.

      O.   Energize pumps and verify proper operation.


3.5        JOINT CONSTRUCTION

      A.   Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
           joint construction.

      B.   Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
           alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

      C.   Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed-coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
           according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

      D.   Mechanically Formed Outlets:          Form tee in copper tube according to equipment
           manufacturer's written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form
           collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.


3.6        ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

      A.   Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's
           requirements. Water meters will be furnished by utility.

      B.   Rough-in domestic water piping and install water meters according to utility company's
           requirements. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters.


3.7        VALVE INSTALLATION

      A.   Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
           fixtures or equipment. Use ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate
           valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                          15140 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


      B.   Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to
           plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
           butterfly or valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

      C.   Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
           piping, and where required to drain water piping.

           1.    Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
           2.    Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

      D.   Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of
           each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.
           Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and
           larger. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing valves.

      E.   Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge
           side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but
           not stop flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for calibrated balancing
           valves.


3.8        HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

      A.   Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
           seismic-restraint devices.

      B.   Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
           Install the following:

           1.    Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
           2.    Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

                 a.    100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
                 b.    Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
                 c.    Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

           3.    Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe
                 rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
           4.    Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

      C.   Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

      D.   Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

      E.   Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

      F.   Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
           minimum rod diameters:

           1.    NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
           2.    NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                         15140 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


           3.    NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2N 50): 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
           4.    NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
           5.    NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
           6.    NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
           7.    NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

      G.   Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

      H.   Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
           written instructions.


3.9        CONNECTIONS

      A.   Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

      B.   Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

      C.   Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
           dissimilar piping materials.

      D.   Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect
           to the following:

           1.    Edit or delete four subparagraphs below to suit Project.
           2.    Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but
                 not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
           3.    Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
                 smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
                 Fixtures."
           4.    Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
                 equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
                 flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


3.10       FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

           1.    Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved
                 by authorities having jurisdiction.
           2.    During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
                 inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
                 having jurisdiction:

                 a.    Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
                       closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
                 b.    Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
                       observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                            15140 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


         3.    Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
               inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
         4.    Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
               jurisdiction.

   B.    Test domestic water piping as follows:

         1.    Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
               altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
               report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
         2.    Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic
               water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
               concealed before it was tested.
         3.    Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
               without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
               allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that
               must be repaired.
         4.    Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
               satisfactory results are obtained.
         5.    Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


3.11     ADJUSTING

   A.    Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

         1.    Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to
               provide flow of hot water in each branch.
         2.    Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.


3.12     CLEANING

   A.    Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

         1.    Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
               extended, or repaired before using.
         2.    Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction
               or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
               AWWA C652 or as described below:

               a.    Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear
                     at outlets.
               b.    Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

                     1)    Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50
                           ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
                     2)    Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
                           ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                        15140 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


               c.    Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
                     system after the standing time.
               d.    Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
                     Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

   B.    Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

   C.    Clean interior of domestic water piping system.         Remove dirt and debris as work
         progresses.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                                                                      15140 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              AUGUST 9, 2010


END OF SECTION 15140




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING                  15140 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1     RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
        Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2     SUMMARY

  A.    This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building
        and to locations indicated.

  B.    Related Sections include the following:

        1.
        1.    Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems
              specialties.
        2.    Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps" for drainage connections for effluent pumps.


1.3     DEFINITIONS

  A.    The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and rubber piping materials:

        1.    ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
        2.    EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer.
        3.    NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
        4.    PE: Polyethylene plastic.
        5.    PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


1.4     PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

  A.    Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
        minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

        1.    Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water for 15-minutes minimum.


1.5     SUBMITTALS

  A.    Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

  B.    Shop Drawings:     For sovent drainage system, include plans, elevations, sections, and
        details.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                               15150 - 1
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                        Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      AUGUST 9, 2010


      C.   Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
           requirements.


1.6        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

      B.   Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
           plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and
           vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste
           piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        PIPING MATERIALS

      A.   Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
           materials.

      B.   Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
           elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include
           corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

      C.   Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type
           coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to
           and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.


2.2        CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

      A.   Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

           1.    Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

      B.   Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

           1.    Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners,
                 and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

                 a.    Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
                       stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

                       1)    NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
                       2)    NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.


2.3        PVC PIPING


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                                    15150 - 2
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.    Cellular-Core, Schedule 40, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

        1.    PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
              and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

  B.    PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F 409, drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as required
        for application.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1     EXCAVATION

  A.    Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


3.2     PIPING APPLICATIONS

  A.    Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings
        may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

  B.    Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

  C.    Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
        size range:

        1.    NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

              a.    Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

  D.    Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each
        size range:

        1.    NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
        2.    NPS 2 to NPS 4: Cellular-core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-
              cemented joints.


3.3     PIPING INSTALLATION

  A.    Refer to Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.

  B.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
        installation.

  C.    Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
        sanitary sewers.

  D.    Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                                  15150 - 3
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


  E.     Underground, Ductile-Iron, Force-Main Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried
         piping inside the building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary
         sewer piping outside the building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install
         thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

         1.    Encase piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

  F.E.   Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
         penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
         make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
         Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

  G.F. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
         Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
         Methods" for wall penetration systems.

  H.G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
         Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

         1.    Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

  I.H.   Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
         branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
         used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-
         turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by
         side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent
         lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
         increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of
         drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

  J.I.   Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
         grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
         piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions
         for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping
         and pull past each joint as completed.

  K.J.   Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
         otherwise indicated:

         1.    Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
               smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
         2.    Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
         3.    Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

  L.K.   Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
         slab is without membrane waterproofing.

  L.     Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
         authorities having jurisdiction.

  M.     Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                                 15150 - 4
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


  M.N.


3.4      JOINT CONSTRUCTION

  A.     Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
         joint construction.

  B.     Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
         Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

         1.    Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
         2.    Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

  C.     Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
         alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

  D.     Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according
         to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

  E.     PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


3.5      HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

  A.     Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
         seismic-restraint devices.

  B.     Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
         Install the following:

         1.    Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
         2.    Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

               a.    100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
               b.    Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
               c.    Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

         3.    Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe
               rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
         4.    Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

  C.     Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

  D.     Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

  E.     Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

  F.     Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
         minimum rod diameters:


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                              15150 - 5
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                       Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


        1.    NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
        2.    NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
        3.    NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
        4.    NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
        5.    Spacing for smaller lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited
              to 60 inches.

  G.    Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

  H.    Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
        written instructions.


3.6     CONNECTIONS

  A.    Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

  B.    Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to
        join dissimilar piping materials.

  C.    Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

        1.    Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
              required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
        2.    Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes
              indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
        3.    Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
              smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
              Specialties."
        4.    Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
              and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-
              1/2 and larger.

  D.    Connect force-main piping to the following:

        1.    Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main or sanitary manhole.
        2.    Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge.


3.7     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.    During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
        must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

        1.    Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
              closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
        2.    Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
              observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

  B.    Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
        inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                               15150 - 6
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                        Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


  C.    Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
        jurisdiction.

  D.    Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
        jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

        1.    Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
              altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
              report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
        2.    Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
              vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
              concealed before it was tested.
        3.    Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except
              outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and
              fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15
              minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not
              drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
        4.    Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
              filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug
              vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce
              air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer
              inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain
              constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
              plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
        5.    Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
              satisfactory results are obtained.
        6.    Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


3.8     CLEANING

  A.    Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

  B.    Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
        and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

  C.    Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.




SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                                                              15150 - 7
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                       Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                      AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15150




SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING                  15150 - 8
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water
         heating, chilled-water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these
         systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods
               for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
         2.    Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
               penetrations through exterior walls.
         3.    Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
               materials and installation requirements.
         4.    Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descriptions,
               and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this
               Section.
         5.    Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check
               valves.
         6.    Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pressure
               gages.
         7.    Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hydronic
               piping.
         8.    Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for
               hydronic piping.
         9.    Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature-control
               valves and sensors.


1.3      DEFINITIONS

   A.    CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.

   B.    PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.


1.4      SUBMITTALS


HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                           15181 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure
         drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing
         valves, and automatic flow-control valves.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support
         assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the
         building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and
         loops.

   C.    Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

   D.    Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
         following:

         1.    Test procedures used.
         2.    Test results that comply with requirements.
         3.    Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

   E.    Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in
         maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

   F.    Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at
         Project site.


1.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
         Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

   B.    ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
         products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate
         ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the
         ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.


1.6      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components
         with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
         components, and partition assemblies.

   B.    Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.

   C.    Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
         Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

   D.    Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

   E.    Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
         Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                              15181 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


   F.    Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
         assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
         "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.


1.7      EXTRA MATERIALS

   A.    Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup and for
         preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Calibrated Balancing Valves:

               a.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               b.    Flow Design, Inc.
               c.    Gerand Engineering Company.
               d.    Griswold Controls.
               e.    ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
               f.    Taco, Inc.

         2.    Pressure-Reducing Valves:

               a.    Amtrol, Inc.
               b.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               c.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.
               d.    ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
               e.    Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
               f.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.

         3.    Safety Valves:

               a.    Amtrol, Inc.
               b.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               c.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.
               d.    ITT McDonnell & Miller Div.; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
               e.    Kunkle Valve Division.
               f.    Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

         4.    Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

               a.    Flow Design, Inc.
               b.    Griswold Controls.

HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                          15181 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         5.    Expansion Tanks:

               a.    Amtrol, Inc.
               b.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               c.    ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
               d.    Taco, Inc.

         6.    Air Separators and Air Purgers:

               a.    Amtrol, Inc.
               b.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               c.    ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
               d.    Taco, Inc.


2.2      PIPING MATERIALS

   A.    General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
         materials.


2.3      COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

   A.    Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

   B.    Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

   C.    Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

   D.    Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.


2.4      VALVES

   A.    Globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

   B.    Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.

   C.    Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig working
         pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves
         shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter
         with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.

   D.    Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet
         pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive
         valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system.
         Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.

   E.    Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted,
         internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with
         the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.
HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                               15181 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   F.    Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to maintain constant flow with
         plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with a readout kit
         including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall have
         an identification tag attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification,
         valve number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs:

         1.    Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 175 psig at 200 deg F with stainless-steel
               piston and spring.
         2.    Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 300 psig at 250 deg F with corrosion-
               resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly easily removable for
               inspection or replacement.
         3.    Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control valve,
               with stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and temperature test
               valves, and designed for 300 psig at 250 deg F.


2.5      HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

   A.    Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure;
         225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with
         NPS 1/8 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.

   B.    Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
         nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature;
         with NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.

   C.    Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375
         deg F maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain
         design expansion capacity by a flexible bladder securely sealed into tank. Include drain
         fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel
         legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricated and test tank
         with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
         Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

   D.    In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate
         system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 175 psig and liquid
         temperature up to 300 deg F.

   E.    Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal.
         Capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

         1.    Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent
               accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

   F.    Diverting Fittings: 125-psig working pressure; 250 deg F maximum operating temperature;
         cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow
         direction on fitting.

   G.    Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B),
         flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted
         cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                              15181 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


   H.    Basket Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,
         Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and
         bottom drain connection.

   I.    Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
         protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
         temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to match
         equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

   J.    Glycol Feeder:


         1.    Unit shall be a prefabricated, automatic and autonomous make-up package for the
               glycol system.
         2.    Axiom Model SF100 floor mounted glycol feed system. The Glycol Feeder storage
               drum shall be a 55 gallon capacity, pressure steel tank with hinged cover.
         3.    The tank shall have a 3/4" hose bibb for draining of the tank and a ½" suction with
               shut-off valve.
         4.    The control cabinet shall be a NEMA I enclosure with a large LEXAN viewing window
               mounted in the cabinet door. The following components shall be mounted on the
               inside panel: Low level liquid alarm light, low level alarm silencer switch, pump test
               switch and indicating light, and a 0-60 psi system pressure gauge. The low level
               switch shall be mounted 3" above the bottom of the tank. A low level audible alarm
               shall be mounted 3" above the bottom of the tank. A low level audible alarm shall be
               mounted in the side of the panel. In addition, 2 extra, normally open, contacts shall
               be provided for remote level warning lights or alarm. A 3-35 psi adjustable pressure
               switch shall control the system pressure.
         5.    The pump shall be comparable to an Oberdorfer, all bronze, rotary gear pump with a
               1/3 HP 1725 rpm motor mounted integrally with the pump. The pump shall be
               designed to produce 1.8 gpm at 50 psi. Electrical characteristics: 120V/60 Hz/1
               Phase/1/3 HP.
         6.    Provide a WETCORP Model WC-551301 Hand-Operated Rotary Transfer Pump with
               8'of 1" hose and a non-sparking 3/4" nozzle for the transferring of glycol from the
               glycol container to the glycol feed tank. The pump shall have a 1" telescoping suction
               pipe and Bung adapted with 2" thread.
         7.    Propylene Glycol: Comparable to Dow Chemical Co, Dowfrost, an industrially
               inhibited propylene glycol which must be easily analyzed and reinhibited.
               a.     Glycol analysis shall be provided free of charge by the manufacturer on an
                      annual basis.
               b.     The fluid must pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all
                      metals).


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      PIPING APPLICATIONS

   A.    Hot Water, NPS 2” and smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing
         with soldered joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed-temper copper
         tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within slabs.
HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                            15181 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or
         Schedule 40, PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.


3.2      VALVE APPLICATIONS

   A.    General-Duty Valve Applications:      Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve
         types:

         1.    Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.
         2.    Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves.

   B.    Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection
         to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch
         line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return
         connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

   C.    Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling
         element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.

   D.    Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow
         direction.

   E.    Install safety valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME Boiler
         and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor.
         Comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for
         installation requirements.

   F.    Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to
         regulate system pressure.


3.3      PIPING INSTALLATIONS

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
         installation requirements.

   B.    Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
         servicing of valves.

   C.    Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded
         nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system
         drainage.

   D.    Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

   E.    Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

   F.    Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main
         pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the
         takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                              15181 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


   G.    Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
         valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in
         blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff
         connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

   H.    Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.


3.4      HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

   A.    Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
         Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.

   B.    Install the following pipe attachments:

         1.    Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
         2.    Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
               longer.
         3.    Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
               supported on a trapeze.
         4.    Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
         5.    On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
               scratching pipe.

   C.    Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

         1.    NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
         2.    NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
         3.    NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
         4.    NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

   D.    Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
         minimum rod sizes:

         1.    NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
         2.    NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
         3.    NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
         4.    NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

   E.    Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.


3.5      PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint
         construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded,
         welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC
         piping.


3.6      HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                                15181 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as
         required for system air venting.

   B.    Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system
         piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

   C.    Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent
         upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.

   D.    Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a
         2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 and larger.

   E.    Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to
         expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with
         gate valve; extend to nearest drain.

   F.    Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position
         with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off
         main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass
         connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.

   G.    Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank
         is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.


3.7      TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

   A.    Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.

   B.    Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

   C.    Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
         valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

   D.    Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.


3.8      CHEMICAL TREATMENT

   A.    Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical
         treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the
         following water characteristics:

        1.     Nitrite level: 700 PPM

   B.    Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.


3.9      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                               15181 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
         2.    Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to
               test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from
               testing.
         3.    Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
         4.    Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
               shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
               blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
         5.    Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
               pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
               overpressure during test.

   B.    Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

         1.    Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
               due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
               may be used.
         2.    While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
               air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
         3.    Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is
               full of water.
         4.    Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
               design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
               pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
               pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
               minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,
               "Building Services Piping."
         5.    After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
               piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
               or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
         6.    Prepare written report of testing.


3.10     ADJUSTING

   A.    Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
         been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

   B.    Perform these adjustments before operating the system:

         1.    Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
         2.    Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
         3.    Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
         4.    Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and
               operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
         5.    Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
         6.    Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
         7.    Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to
               design requirements.
         8.    Lubricate motors and bearings.

HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                           15181 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


3.11     CLEANING

   A.    Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
         screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove
         disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.




END OF SECTION 15181




HYDRONIC PIPING                                                                         15181 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic systems:

         1.    In-line circulators.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements.
         2.    Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for inertia
               pads, isolation pads, spring supports, and spring hangers.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities; shipping,
         installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; final impeller dimensions; and
         accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include Setting Drawings with
         templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

         1.    Wiring Diagrams:      Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
               differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

   C.    Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


1.4      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    UL Compliance: Fabricate and label pumps to comply with UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water
         Pumps," for construction requirements.

   B.    Product Options:      Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional
         requirements of pumps and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other
         manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
         Division 1 Section "Substitutions."


HYDRONIC PUMPS                                                                             15185 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with
         HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation,"
         and HI 1.6, "Centrifugal Pump Tests."

   D.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
         NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


1.5      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

   A.    Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
         surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect
         flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

   B.    Store pumps in dry location.

   C.    Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

   D.    Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

   E.    Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


1.6      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
         Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
         "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


1.7      EXTRA MATERIALS

   A.    Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
         packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

         1.    Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Compact In-Line Circulators:

               a.    Amtrol, Inc.
               b.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               c.    Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.

HYDRONIC PUMPS                                                                              15185 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


               d.    Grundfos Pumps Corp.
               e.    Hartell Div.; Milton Roy Co.
               f.    PACO Pumps.
               g.    Taco; Fabricated Products Div.


2.2      GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.

   B.    Motors: Include built-in, thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings.
         Select each motor to be nonoverloading over full range of pump performance curve.

   C.    Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to
         IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard
         industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.


2.3      COMPACT IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

   A.    Description: Water cooled, horizontal, in-line, compact design, seal-less, centrifugal, and
         single stage. Include pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in hermetically
         sealed unit, without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Include lubrication of sleeve
         bearing and cooling of motor by circulating pumped liquid through motor section, and
         isolation of motor section from motor-stator windings by corrosion-resistant, nonmagnetic,
         alloy liner. Include design rated for 125-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous
         water temperature of 225 deg F.

         1.    Casing: Cast bronze or cast iron, with stainless-steel liner, static O-ring seal to
               separate motor section from motor stator, and flanged piping connections.
         2.    Impeller: Overhung, single suction, closed or open, nonmetallic.
         3.    Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with carbon-steel sleeve.
         4.    Motor: Multispeed.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine equipment foundations         and    anchor-bolt   locations   for   compliance   with
         requirements for installation.

         1.    Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
               connections before pump installation.
         2.    Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
               installed.

   B.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



HYDRONIC PUMPS                                                                               15185 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


3.2      PUMP INSTALLATION

   A.    Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

         1.    Install pumps according to HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature,
               Definitions, Application and Operation."

   B.    Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
         impellers, couplings, and accessories.

   C.    Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.

   D.    Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers.
         Install seismic bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.


3.3      ALIGNMENT

   A.    Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations,
         after grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping
         connections have been made.

   B.    Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

   C.    Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in
         HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."

   D.    After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
         baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
         place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.


3.4      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.        Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

   C.    Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to
         pumps.

   D.    Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

   E.    Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators.

   F.    Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
         pump casing and valves.

   G.    Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure-gage
         tappings where provided.

HYDRONIC PUMPS                                                                                 15185 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   H.    Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping
         around each pump.

   I.    Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

   J.    Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

   K.    Ground equipment.

         1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
               torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
               specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.5      COMMISSIONING

   A.    Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

   B.    Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions and
         the Contract Documents.

   C.    Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:

         1.    Lubricate bearings.
         2.    Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
               thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
         3.    Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction
               marked on pump casing.
         4.    Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liquids
               are free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound
               or drag, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
         5.    Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
         6.    Clean strainers.
         7.    Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

   D.    Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
         follows:

         1.    Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
               operation.
         2.    Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where
               applicable.
         3.    Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
         4.    Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
         5.    Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at
               operating temperature.
         6.    Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
         7.    Start motors.
         8.    Open discharge valves slowly.


HYDRONIC PUMPS                                                                                 15185 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         9.    Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to
               ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through
               stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
         10.   Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
         11.   Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
               overheating.

   E.    When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves
         open, steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors.

   F.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements
         for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.


3.6      DEMONSTRATION

   A.    Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
         to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps as specified below:

         1.    Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
               stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
         2.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
               Closeout."
         3.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
               Maintenance Data."
         4.    Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
               notice.



END OF SECTION 15185




HYDRONIC PUMPS                                                                             15185 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15194 - FUEL GAS PIPING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for natural gas service piping,
               specialties, and accessories outside the building.
         2.    Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.


1.3      PROJECT CONDITIONS

   A.    Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less.

   B.    Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:

         1.    Nominal Heating Value: 830 Btu/cu. ft..
         2.    Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.


1.4      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: For the following:

         1.    Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing systems. Include associated components.
         2.    Specialty valves.     Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
               connection data of selected models.
         3.    Service-meter bars. Include service-meter size of selected models.
         4.    Service meters. Include pressure rating and capacity of selected models.
         5.    Service-meter bypass fittings.
         6.    Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected
               models.

   B.    Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work.

         1.    Wiring Diagrams:      Power, signal, and control wiring.         Differentiate between
               manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                               15194 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
         requirements.

   D.    Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in maintenance
         manuals specified in Division 1.


1.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
         by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
         use.

   B.    ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."

   C.    FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if
         specified to be FM approved.

   D.    IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A
         Certified Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.

   E.    UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if
         specified to be UL listed.


1.6      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

   A.    Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing
         gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier.
         Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on
         premises from end of one day to beginning of next day.


1.7      COORDINATION

   A.    Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
         unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
         temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

         1.    Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
         2.    Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
         products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
         following:

FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                               15194 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Appliance Connector Valves:

               a.    Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.
               b.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
               c.    Jomar International, Ltd.
               d.    McDonald: A. Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
               e.    Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
               f.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

         2.    Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:

               a.    Crane Valves.
               b.    Flow Control Equipment, Inc.
               c.    Grinnell Corp.
               d.    Honeywell, Inc.
               e.    Jomar International, Ltd.
               f.    Kitz Corp. of America.
               g.    McDonald: A. Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
               h.    Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
               i.    Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
               j.    Nibco, Inc.
               k.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

         3.    Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

               a.    Flow Control Equipment, Inc.
               b.    Milliken Valve Co., Inc.
               c.    Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
               d.    Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div.
               e.    Walworth Co.

         4.    Automatic Gas Valves:

               a.    ASCO General Controls.
               b.    GPS Gas Protection Systems, Inc.
               c.    Honeywell, Inc.
               d.    Johnson Controls, Inc.

         5.    Electrically Operated Gas Valves:

               a.    ASCO General Controls.
               b.    Automatic Switch Co.
               c.    Magnatrol Valve Corp.
               d.    Parker Hannifin Corp.; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div.

         6.    Line Pressure Regulators:

               a.    American Meter Co.
FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                            15194 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


               b.    Fisher Controls International, Inc.
               c.    Maxitrol Co.
               d.    Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div.

         7.    Appliance Pressure Regulators:

               a.    Eaton Corp.; Controls Div.
               b.    Harper Wyman Co.
               c.    Maxitrol Co.
               d.    SCP, Inc.


2.2      PIPING MATERIALS

   A.    Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
         materials.


2.3      PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS

   A.    Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.

         1.    Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
               threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
         2.    Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground
               joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
         3.    Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
         4.    Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.
         5.    Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
               ASME B1.20.1.
         6.    Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
         7.    Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
         8.    Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

   B.    Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
         Methods" for joining materials not in this Section.


2.4      PROTECTIVE COATING

   A.    Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for
         use in corrosive atmosphere.


2.5      PIPING SPECIALTIES

   A.    Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

   B.    Quick-Disconnect Devices:         ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug
         connector.

FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                                 15194 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


2.6      SPECIALTY VALVES

   A.    Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

   B.    Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges
         and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

   C.    Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed.

   D.    Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square
         head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with
         stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum
         pressure rating.

   E.    Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig
         pressure rating.

         1.    Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

   F.    Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated
         plug valves, with 125-psig pressure rating.

         1.    Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

   G.    General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for
         fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125-psig pressure rating.

         1.    Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge.
         2.    Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, lug type with lever handle.

   H.    Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical operator for actuation by appliance
         automatic shutoff device.

   I.    Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body solenoid
         valve; 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6,
         Type 4, coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall
         normally be closed.


2.7      PRESSURE REGULATORS

   A.    Description: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and
         corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.

         1.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
         2.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and
               according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
         3.    Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2-psig- minimum inlet pressure rating.
         4.    Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting
               device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                          15194 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening
         if not connected to vent piping.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      PREPARATION

   A.    Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.
         Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all
         equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

   B.    Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph.


3.2      SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING

   A.    Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building.

         1.    Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service
               meter will be provided by gas utility.
         2.    Natural gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter
               are specified in Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution."

   B.    Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is
         supported from service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve
         downstream from and adjacent to dielectric fitting. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic
         Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.

   C.    Install strainer upstream from each earthquake valve.          Refer to Division 15 Section
         "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.


3.3      PIPING APPLICATIONS

   A.    Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than
         system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

   B.    Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig or Less: Use the following:
         1.    NPS 3/4 and NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
         2.    NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.
         3.    Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

   C.    Underground Fuel Gas Piping: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. Encase
         in containment conduit.

   D.    Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.


3.4      VALVE APPLICATIONS

FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                               15194 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas
         stop.

   B.    Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.

   C.    Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 2 to 5 psig: Gas valve.

   D.    Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.

   E.    Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.

   F.    Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.

   G.    Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve.


3.5      PIPING INSTALLATION

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
         installation requirements.

   B.    Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight
         conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent
         conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.

         1.    Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject
               to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as
               plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.
         2.    In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
               physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.

               a.    Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.

         3.    In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in
               "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to
               approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
         4.    Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,
               clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or
               dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

               a.    Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

   C.    Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include
         outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do
         not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

         1.    Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or
               capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches
               long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip
               and floor for removal of plug or cap.

FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                             15194 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


   D.    Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
         or floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

   E.    Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

   F.    Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
         down.

   G.    Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

   H.    Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
         each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged
         devices.

   I.    Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written
         instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is
         restrained and cannot move.

   J.    Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically
         operated valve.

   K.    Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line pressure regulator.

   L.    Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger
         connections.

   M.    Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and
         vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with
         corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.

   N.    Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits
         extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate
         vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in
         large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint
         according to SSPC-Paint 16.


3.6      JOINT CONSTRUCTION

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
         joint construction.

   B.    Use materials suitable for fuel gas.

         1.    Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F.
               Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.


3.7      HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                                 15194 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
         rod sizes:

         1.    NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
         2.    NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
         3.    NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
         4.    NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
         5.    NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.


3.8      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.

   C.    Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve
         upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from
         valve.

   D.    Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
         practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.

   E.    Ground equipment.

         1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
               torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
               specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
         2.    Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode.


3.9      LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

   A.    Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate
         or sign on or near each service meter, pressure regulator, and specialty valve.

         1.    Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform
               operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,
               and warn of hazards and improper operations.
         2.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for nameplates and signs.


3.10     PAINTING

   A.    Use materials and procedures in Division 9 Section "Painting," "Exterior Paint Schedule"
         Article, "Ferrous Metal" Paragraph, "Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish" Subparagraph.

   B.    Paint exterior service meters, pressure regulators, pipe and specialty valves.

         1.    Color: Gray.


FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                              15194 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


3.11     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and
         Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

   B.    Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
         obtained.

   C.    Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

   D.    Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and
         specialties.

   E.    Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.

   F.    Verify that specified piping tests are complete.


3.12     ADJUSTING

   A.    Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
         safety devices.


END OF SECTION 15194




FUEL GAS PIPING                                                                               15194 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
 BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
 BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     AUGUST 9, 2010


 SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM


 PART 1 - GENERAL


 1.1         RELATED

       A.    "General Requirements", Division 1 and Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods Spec
             Section 15050 of the Project Manual pertain to and are hereby made part of the work of the
             Spec Section.


 1.2         DESCRIPTION OF WORK

       A.    The work under this Section includes furnishing all fire protection equipment, piping and
             specialties, and all labor necessary to make the installation of the Fire Protection System
             complying with all applicable NFPA and UL regulations. The Fire Protection Sprinkler
             System shall be designed and built by the “Contractor”. The system shall comply with all
             requirements of applicable codes and governing authorities. Specifications herein are
             limited to minimum standards of quality for systems components and general performance
             requirements which are subject to approval by the governing authority. The design and
             engineering required for the complete performance and installation of the sprinkler system
             shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.


 1.3         SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

       A.    Water Service: Underground connections to a reliable water works system, including all
             piping, valves, thrust blocks and related items.

       B.    Automatic Sprinkler System: A sprinkler system, for fire protection purposes, is an
             integrated system of underground and overhead piping.

       C.    The portion of the sprinkler system above ground is to be a network of specially sized or
             hydraulically designed piping installed in the building, structure or area generally overhead,
             and to which sprinklers are connected in a systematic pattern. The system includes a
             controlling valve and a device for actuating an alarm when the system is in operation. The
             system is activated by heat from a fire and discharges water over the fire area.

       D.    The following areas are to be provided with an automatic fire sprinkler system: Entire
             Building shall be reconstructed and/or modified as required to meet current code
             requirements. The Contractor shall perform a thorough site observation prior to submitting
             a bid and include all costs necessary to provide a code compliant system in the bid.

       E.    Fire Department Connections: A connection through which a Fire Department can pump
             water into a standpipe system or a sprinkler system.


1.4         QUALITY ASSURANCE

 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                             15300 - 1
 Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      AUGUST 9, 2010

      A.   Code Compliance Products, General: Comply with local and state governing
           regulations which require the products used for fire protection work to be selected from
           lists in certain published latest editions of standards or codes as indicated therein.

      B.   Manufacturer: Except for products required to comply with recognized product listings,
           provide fire protection system products and accessories produced by a fire protection
           manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience in manufacturing similar products.

      C.   Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on project with
           fire protection piping work similar to that required for the project.

      D.   NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA No. 13, entitled "Standard for the Installation of
           Sprinkler Systems".

      E.   NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA No. 14 entitled, "Standard for the Installation of
           Standpipe and Hose Systems."

      F.   NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA No. 24, entitled "Standard for Outside Protection",
           pertaining to hydrants.

      G.   Screw Thread Connections: Comply with NFPA 194, entitled, "Standard for Screw
           Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections", pertaining to standpipe threaded
           connections. Comply with local fire department marshall regulations for sizes, threading
           and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to standpipe systems.

      H.   FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide."

      I.   FM Approval Marks: Provide units bearing FM approval marks.

      J.   UL Labels: Provide units which have been approved and listed by Underwriters
           Laboratories.

      K.   Requirements: Entire fire protection system shall be designed, furnished, and installed
           in strict conformance to NFPA Chapter 13 and all related regulations and requirements.


1.5        SUBMITTALS

      A.   Prior to submitting shop drawings to the Engineer for approval, shop drawings shall be
           submitted to the local building department and the local fire prevention bureau
           authorities for their review and approval. Only approved drawings shall be reviewed by
           the Engineer.

      B.   Product Data: Submit manufacturers data on all fire protection system piping material,
           accessories and products. Include all data on fire protection pumps including but not
           limited to pump characteristics, performance curves certified where indicated.
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                            15300 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      AUGUST 9, 2010


      C.   Shop Drawings:

           1.    Submit shop drawings for the fire protection systems showing the pipe sizes,
                 location, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, fittings, accessories, valves,
                 gauges, hose connections, equipment connections, wiring diagrams and typical
                 details for hangers and anchorages.

           2.    Submit shop drawings showing complete layout of Fire Protection System.
                 Drawings shall show actual equipment to be used complete with such dimensions
                 as are required to accurately install the system. Drawings shall include floor
                 layouts and sections drawn to a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0". Submit
                 dimensioned drawings of fire protection pump installation relations to associated
                 equipment and piping connections.

           3.    Route system to clear all other items of mechanical and electrical equipment,
                 architectural and structural components within the building. Shop drawings shall
                 show all such items and the proposed routing on piping to clear same. Show all
                 details required to make a complete installation from the shop drawings.

      D.   Certification of Installation; Fire Sprinkler Piping: Submit certificate upon completion of
           fire sprinkler piping work which indicates that the work has been tested in accordance
           with NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.

      E.   Sprinkler test and procedures and certificate format are contained in NFPA No. 13.

      F.   Maintenance Stock, Fire Sprinklers: For each style and temperature range required,
           furnish additional fire sprinklers, amounting to one unit for every 100 installed units, but
           not less than 5 units of each.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

      A.   Provide products produced by one of the following (for each type of accessories or
           system).

           1.    Sprinklers and Standpipe Equipment

                 a.    Automatic
                 b.    Central Sprinkler Corporation
                 c.    Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Co.
                 d.    Grinnel Fire Protection Co.
                 e.    Potter-Roemer, Inc.
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                            15300 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     AUGUST 9, 2010

                 f.    Reliable
                 g.    Viking
                 h.    Croker-Standard


2.2        MATERIALS

      A.   Water Service:

           1.    Pipe and Fittings: Exterior service or yard service pipe and fittings shall consist of
                 18/40 cast iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joints conforming to ASA A21.6
                 150 lb. class, 52 ductile iron.

      B.   Valve Boxes:

           1.    Approved Manufacturers: Mueller, Clay & Bailey, Kennedy, M&H or Fairbanks.

                 a.    Three piece, 5-1/4" shaft, screw type, Traverse City #A-295 with #A-295 lid
                       indexed "FIRE".

      C.   Service Valves (Exterior):

           1.    Approved Manufacturers: Kennedy, Mueller, Clay and Bailey, M&H, Stockham or
                 Fairbanks.
           2.    Inside screw, non-rising stem, indicator post type 175 lb. WP 350 lb. test, UL and
                 FM approved, Traverse City A-261, MJ-MJ-400 with 2" operating nut.

      D.   Fire Sprinkler Piping

           1.    Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Black steel pipe of the size indicated.

                 a.    Pipe Weight: Schedule 40
                 b.    Fittings: Class 250 cast-iron screwed or forged-steel screwed

           2.    Pipe Size 2-1/2" and Larger: Black steel pipe of the size indicated.

                 a.    Pipe Weight: Schedule 40
                 b.    Fittings: Forged-steel socket welding or wrought-steel buttwelding type.

Note: When approved by local Fire Department Authorities, Schedule 10 (ASTM A-135) pipe
can be used in sizes up to and including 5". For greater than 5", modify schedule 10 wall
thickness above by using 0.134" (3.40mm) for 6" and 0.188 (4.75mm) for 8" and 10" light-wall
pipe. Joining sch. 10 pipe with standard threaded fittings is not permitted. Groove type joining
methods are permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. Verify in writing.

      E.   Fire Sprinkler Drain Piping
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                            15300 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Black steel pipe of sizes indicated.

               a.    Pipe Weight: Schedule 40
               b.    Fittings: Class 125 cast-iron threaded

         2.    Pipe Size 2-1/2" and Larger: Black steel pipe of the size indicated.

               a.    Pipe Weight: Schedule 40
               b.    Fittings: Wrought-iron buttwelding

Note: When approved by local Fire Department Authorities, Schedule 10 is permissible for 5"
diameter pipe and smaller. Modify Sch 10 above accordingly for larger diameter pipe.

   F.    Hose Outlet Valves: Provide angle hose valves and cap, 2-1/2" size where not
         otherwise indicated. Provide 2 ½” to 1 ½” reducer with cap.

   G.    Swing Check Valve: Provide iron swing check valves, 175 lb. rated working pressure, of
         size and end type indicated.

   H.    Alarm Check Valve: Provide gray cast iron water flow alarm check valve, 175 lb. rated
         working pressure, of size and end type indicated (not used in dry-pipe systems).

   I.    Fire Department Connection Valve: Provide fire department connection iron swing
         check valve, 175 lb. rated working pressure of size and end type indicated.

   J.    Water Flow Indicators: Provide vane type water flow detectors of size indicated.

   K.    Automatic Drain Device: Cast brass angle or straight connection, male connection both
         ends. Seals automatically under pressure.

   L.    Double Check, Detector Assembly Backflow Preventer:

         1.    Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
               products by one of the following - Febco, Hersey, Cla-Val, Watts.
         2.    Double check detector assembly shall consist of two independent "Y"
               configurated mainline double check assemblies in parallel with a by-pass meter
               assembly. Mainline check assemblies shall be of the spring loaded, center stem
               guided type. All internal metal parts included in the mainline check assemblies
               shall be of Series 300 stainless steel, and shall not contain any dissimilar metals.
               Elastomeric seat discs must be reversible, seat rings shall be B-61 bronze, or
               Series 300 stainless steel, bolted to the valve bodies with an "O" ring seal.
         3.    Mainline valve bodies and covers shall be manufactured of ductile iron ASTM
               A536, Grade 65-45-12 and shall be designed to withstand a 10-1 safety factor
               over rated MWWP.
         4.    Ductile iron bodies shall be flanged ANSI B16.1, Class 125, epoxy coated
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                        15300 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     AUGUST 9, 2010

                 internally 10-20 mils and prime coated externally.
           5.    QWE 456M Head losses through the assembly shall not exceed 8 PSI (4"
                 through 8") and 10 PSI (10") at velocities from zero to and including 7.5 FPS.
                 Flow curves shall be documented by independent laboratory testing.
           6.    The by-pass meter assembly shall consist primarily of a bronze water meter in
                 series with a bronze double check valve. The meter shall be the total registration
                 type with accurate registration between 1 and 20 GPM flow rates. The by-pass
                 double check assembly shall consist of independent modular center stem guided
                 check assemblies with guiding surfaces located in the threaded-on-body bronze
                 caps. The by-pass double check shut-off valves and testcocks shall be resilient
                 seated ball valves with full flow characteristics. The static pressure drop across
                 the by-pass double check assembly shall be approximately 2 PSI less than the
                 mainline check valves to assure proper operation.
           7.    Mainline shut-off valves shall be resilient wedge, OS&Y, UL/FM for fireline service
                 and are considered integral to the assembly along with full port ball valve
                 testcocks. Assemblies must be factory assembled and backflow tested. Double
                 check detector assemblies shall be rated 175 PSI MWWP (32oF - 140oF), factory
                 assembled and tested to assure proper mainline/by-pass balance and cross-over
                 performance.

      M.   Fire Horn and Light: Horn shall be electric vibrating polarized type, operating on 24-V
           d.c., with provisions for housing the operating mechanism behind a surface-mounted
           grille. Provide horns with a sound pressure level of 90 dB. measured 10 ft. from the
           source. Light shall be dual-voltage (120-V a.c. or 24-V d.c.) strobe lights utilizing high-
           intensity, clear, optic lens and xenon flash tube. Provide luminaires having their lenses
           mounted on an aluminum face plate. Provide the word "FIRE" engraved in minimum 1-
           inch-high letters displayed on the unit. Provide with lamps having a minimum peak
           intensity of 8,000 candlepower. Strobe leads shall be factory-connected to screw
           terminals.

           1.    Pressure Gauges: Provide 3-1/2" diameter, Bourdon type with brass case and
                 ring, pressure gauges as recommended by the manufacturer for use in service
                 indicated. For normal installation a range of 0-300 PSI.

           2.    Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for
                 use in the service indicated. Switches shall have single pole double throw dry
                 type switching.

2.3        FIRE SPRINKLERS

      A.   Provide standard soldered-link automatic fire sprinklers with operating temperature as
           required by N.F.P.A. of the following style and finish:

      B.   Finished Ceiling Areas: Fully concealed pendant mounted sprinkler head with chrome
           plated finish or white and escutcheon.

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                            15300 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010

      C.   Unfinished and Exposed Structure Areas: Upright or sidewall sprinkler head as
           required, chrome finish.

      D.   Finish Assembly, Fabrication, etc., with Ceilings: Pendant mounted sprinkler head with
           chrome plated finish and escutcheon

      E.   Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with
           capacity to store 5 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers.


2.4        FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

      A.   Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide wall type cast brass siamese connections
           and escutcheon plate assembly with 2, 2-1/2" fire department inlets with female snoots
           with rigid end NPTX pin lug hose thread swivels equipped with individual drop clapper
           valves, equipped with plugs and chains, construction features as indicated, and
           constructed with the following additional construction features.

           1.    Finish: Chrome plate
           2.    Inlet Pipe: 4" pipe (pipe size)
           3.    Cast Lettering: "Auto Spkr"
           4.    Escutcheon: 7" X 14" Rectangular
           5.    Siamese Connection: Flush, adjacent inlets


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1        INSPECTION

      A.   Installer must examine the substrades and conditions under which the fire protection
           systems and accessories are to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of
           conditions, detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
           work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
           Installer.

3.2        PREPARATION

      A.   The Contractor shall verify dimensions and conditions governing his work at the
           building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed, due to failure to report
           unfavorable conditions or fabrication of prefabricated materials affecting his work.

3.3        INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION

      A.   Provide main tap and water service from the main in street tap to fire protection
           systems including all required valves, domestic water service tee, service boxes, tie
           rods, thrust blocks, valve pits, etc.
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                         15300 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                     BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        AUGUST 9, 2010


      B.   Installation of Fire Sprinkler Piping:

           1.    General: Comply with requirements of related sections and NFPA No. 13 for
                 installation of fire sprinkler piping materials. Install fire sprinkler piping products
                 where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and
                 in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire sprinkler
                 piping complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

           2.    Coordinate with other work, including plumbing piping, as necessary to interface
                 components of fire sprinkler piping properly with other work.

           3.    Install sectional valve in inlet piping at bottom of each riser and in loops as
                 indicated.

           4.    Mount supervisory switches on each sectional valve.

           5.    Install valved hose connections of the sizes indicated, or 3/4" size if not otherwise
                 indicated, on sprinklers at ends of branch lines and cross mains at locations
                 where indicated.

           6.    Install air vents at the high points of the sprinkler piping.

           7.    Install drain piping at low points of fire sprinkler piping.

           8.    Install manual shutoff at each audible alarm station.

           9.    Installation of Siamese Connections and Hydrants:

           10.   General: Comply with the requirements of the related sections and NFPA No's
                 13, 14, and 24 as applicable to the installation of units. Install units where shown,
                 in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with
                 recognized industry practices to ensure that units comply with the requirements
                 and serve the intended purpose.

           11.   Coordinate with other work, including plumbing, standpipe and sprinkler piping,
                 as necessary to interface installation of siamese connections and fire hydrants
                 properly with other work.


3.4        FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for a
           period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static
           pressure when the maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for
           leakage at joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                               15300 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                        Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010

           being tested.

      B.   Little or no leakage at pipe joints is defined in NFPA No. 13 as "No visible leakage"
           when system is subjected to hydrostatic pressure test.

      C.   Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with
           NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate
           compliance.

3.5        ADJUST AND CLEAN

      A.   Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water
           feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire
           sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service,
           flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure
           as specified by NFPA No. 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to
           ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.




END OF SECTION 15300




FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS                                                                          15300 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."
         2.    Division 15 Section "Security Plumbing Fixtures."
         3.    Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
         4.    Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty
               fixtures not in this Section.


1.3      DEFINITIONS

   A.    Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people
         with disabilities.

   B.    Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified
         in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub
         spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves
         are included where indicated.


1.4      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data:      Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances,
         appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions,
         construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
         manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

   C.    Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in
         Division 1.


1.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE

PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                             15410 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
         category through one source from a single manufacturer.

         1.    Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
               manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
               category.

   B.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
         NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
         marked for intended use.

   C.    Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and
         Usable Buildings and Facilities" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

   D.    Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation
         Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-
         187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

   E.    Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy
         Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

   F.    NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health
         Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

   G.    Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
         compatible.

   H.    Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
         plumbing fixtures:

         1.    Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
         2.    Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.
         3.    Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.
         4.    Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6.
         5.    Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
         6.    Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.
         7.    Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
         8.    Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

   I.    Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
         lavatory and sink faucets:

         1.    Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
         2.    Backflow Protection       Devices    for   Faucets    with Hose-Thread    Outlet:
               ASME A112.18.3M.
         3.    Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
         4.    Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
         5.    Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
         6.    Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
         7.    Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
         8.    NSF Materials: NSF 61.
PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                          15410 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         9.    Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
         10.   Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
         11.   Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.

   J.    Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower
         faucets:

         1.    Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
         2.    Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
               ASSE 1016.
         3.    Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
         4.    Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
         5.    High-Temperature-Limit     Controls    for   Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
               ASTM F 445.
         6.    Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
         7.    Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
         8.    Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
         9.    Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
         10.   Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
         11.   Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

   K.    Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
         miscellaneous fittings:

         1.    Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
         2.    Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.
         3.    Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
         4.    Plastic Tubular Fittings and Piping: ASTM F 409.
         5.    Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
         6.    Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.

   L.    Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
         miscellaneous components:

         1.    Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
         2.    Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
         3.    Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
         4.    Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
         5.    Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
         6.    Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
         7.    Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
         8.    Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
         9.    Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
         10.   Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


1.6      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
         installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                          15410 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


1.7      EXTRA MATERIALS

   A.    Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
         packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

         1.    Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
               installed.
         2.    Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
               installed.
         3.    Faucet, Laminar-Flow Fittings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
               installed, but not less than 2 of each type and size.
         4.    Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
               installed.
         5.    Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
               installed.
         6.    Shower, Flow-Control Fittings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
               installed.
         7.    Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
               installed, but not less than 12 of each type.
         8.    Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
               compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
         9.    Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed,
               but not less than 2 of each type.
         10.   Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
         11.   Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Products,"
         and "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers
         only, the following requirements apply for product selection:

         1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
               specified in other Part 2 articles.
         2.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
               manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.

   B.    Manufacturers:    All fixtures and trim shall be of the same manufacturer, as close as
         possible.

         1.    Plumbing Fixtures

               a.    Kohler
               b.    American Standard
               c.    Crane
               d.    Eljer
               e.    Fiat
PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                           15410 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


               f.    Sterns-Williams
               g.    Zurn

         2.    Trim Manufacturers (as specified for fixtures):

               a.    Speakman
               b.    Delta
               c.    Chicago Faucet
               d.    Kohler
               e.    Crane
               f.    Zurn

         3.    Flush Valve (as specified for fixtures):

               a.    Sloan
               b.    Zurn
               c.    American Standard
               d.    Toto

         4.    Seats: (Seats shall be solid plastic type, color to match fixture).

               a.    Church
               b.    Olsonite
               c.    Beneke
               d.    Bemis
               e.    Kohler

         5.    Stainless Steel Sinks

               a.    Just
               b.    Bradley
               c.    Elkay
               d.    Kohler
               e.    Dayton


2.2      LAVATORY FAUCETS

   A.    Lavatory Faucet,: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
         supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

         1.    Products:

               a.    Refer to schedule.


2.3      SHOWER FAUCETS

   A.    Shower Faucet,: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; tub spout; and shower head, arm,
         and flange. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and outlet with diverter valve.

PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                             15410 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Maximum Flow Rate: 2.0 gpm, unless otherwise indicated.
         2.    Body Material: Cast brass.
         3.    Finish: Polished chrome plate.
         4.    Type: As specified with integral or field-installed check stops on hot- and cold-water
               supplies.
         5.    Mounting: Exposed.
         6.    Backflow Protection Device for Hand-Held Shower: Required.
         7.    Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.
         8.    Supply Connections: NPS 1/2.
         9.    Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.
         10.   Spray Pattern: Fixed.


2.4      SINK FAUCETS

   A.    Sink Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
         and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

         1.    Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated.
         2.    Body Material: Cast brass.
         3.    Finish: Polished chrome plate.
         4.    Type: Kitchen faucet as specified .
         5.    Backflow Protection Device for Side Spray: Required.
         6.    Centers: As specified.
         7.    Mounting: As specified.
         8.    Inlet: NPS 3/8 plain-end tubing NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 male adapter.
         9.    Drain: As specified.


2.5      TOILET SEATS

   A.    Toilet Seat,: Solid plastic.

         1.    Configuration: Open front without cover.
         2.    Size: Elongated.
         3.    Class: Heavy-duty commercial.
         4.    Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check.
         5.    Color: White or to match fixture.


2.6      PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

   A.    Protective Shielding Guard,: Manufactured, plastic covering for hot- and cold-water
         supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements.

         1.    Available Manufacturers: Base of Design Truebro


2.7      FIXTURE SUPPORTS


PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                           15410 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Water-Closet Support: Water-closet combination carrier designed for accessible or
         standard mounting height, floor mounted fixture carrier. Include single or double, vertical or
         horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement;
         faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture.
         Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Base of design Zurn

   B.    Urinal Support,: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
         fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Base of design Zurn

         2.    Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

   C.    Lavatory Support,: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod. Include steel
         uprights with feet.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Base of design Zurn

         2.    Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.


2.8      DISPOSERS

   A.    Disposer,: Batch-feed, household, food-waste disposer. Include 115-V ac, 1725-rpm, 1/2-
         hp motor with overload protection and reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber
         with jam-resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 outlet; quick-
         mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    In-Sink-Erator base of design.
               b.    Model: Sound-insulated chamber and stainless-steel outer shell.


2.9      WATER CLOSETS

   A.    Water Closets: Low water use Standard or ADA floor-mount, vitreous-china fixture designed
         for flush tank operation.

         1.    Style: One piece.

               a.    Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.
               b.    Color: White or as scheduled on drawings.

PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                             15410 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


         2.    Style: Flush tank.

               a.    Bowl Type: Elongated with blowout design.

               b.    Color: White or as specified on drawings.


2.10     URINALS

   A.    Urinals,:  Accessible and/or standard, Wall-hung, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture
         designed for flushometer valve operation.

         1.    Type: Washout with extended shields.
         2.    Strainer or Trapway: Open trapway with integral trap.
         3.    Color: White or as specified on drawings.
         4.    Supply Spud Size: NPS 3/4.
         5.    Outlet Size: NPS 2.
         6.    Fixture Support: Urinal chair carrier.


2.11     LAVATORIES

   A.    Lavatories: Accessible or standard, Counter-mount or Wall-hung, vitreous-china fixture.

         1.    Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for type, size and trim


2.12     SINKS

   A.    Sinks: Commercial, counter-mounting, stainless-steel fixture.

         1.    Supplies: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated copper with stops.
         2.    Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap, 0.045-inch- thick tubular
               brass waste to wall, continuous waste, and wall escutcheons.
         3.    Disposer: Where shown


2.13     SERVICE BASINS

   A.    Service Basins: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting precast terrazzo basin with rim guard.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Acorn Engineering Co.
               b.    Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products
               c.    Florestone Products Co.
               d.    Stern-Williams Co., Inc.;.
               e.    Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products;.
               f.    Mustee, E. L. & Sons, Inc.;.

         2.    Shape: Square.

PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                         15410 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


         3.    Height: 12 inches.
         4.    Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.
         5.    Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify
         actual locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports
         match those indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in
         data if roughing-in data are not indicated.

   B.    Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

   C.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      FIXTURE INSTALLATION

   A.    Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
         instructions.

   B.    For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

         1.    Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
         2.    Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
         3.    Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

   C.    Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

   D.    Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
         substrate.

   E.    Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

   F.    Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

   G.    Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and
         roughing-in drawings.

   H.    Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
         distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind
         fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

         1.    Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer
               to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.



PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                                15410 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


   I.    Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected
         to sanitary drainage system.

   J.    Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
         wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
         disabilities to reach.

   K.    Install toilet seats on water closets.

   L.    Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
         are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

   M.    Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
         valves.

   N.    Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
         faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

   O.    Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

   P.    Install traps on fixture outlets.

         1.    Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

   Q.    Install disposer in outlet of sinks indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated
         or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.

   R.    Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
         within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
         protruding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
         for escutcheons.

   S.    Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic
         Mechanical Materials and Methods" for grout.

   T.    Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
         mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7
         Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.


3.3      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.          Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

   C.    Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.




PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                              15410 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


   D.    Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
         stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect
         to plumbing piping.

   E.    Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
         Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
         specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing
         piping.

   F.    Ground equipment.

         1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
               torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
               specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.4      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

   B.    Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

   C.    Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

   D.    Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
         malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
         properly.

   E.    Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.


3.5      ADJUSTING

   A.    Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
         fittings, and controls.

   B.    Operate and adjust disposers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units
         and controls.

   C.    Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce proper
         flow and stream.

   D.    Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.


3.6      CLEANING

   A.    Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
         methods and materials. Do the following:



PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                             15410 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
               strainers and spouts.
         2.    Remove sediment and debris from drains.


3.7      PROTECTION

   A.    Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

   B.    Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


END OF SECTION 15410




PLUMBING FIXTURES                                                                           15410 - 12
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15415 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes the following:

       1.    Pressure water coolers.
       2.    Fixture supports.


1.3    DEFINITIONS

  A.   Accessible Water Cooler:       Fixture that can be approached and used by people with
       disabilities.

  B.   Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

  C.   Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler, unless one is specifically indicated.

  D.   Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking
       water.


1.4    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
       furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of fixture indicated.

  B.   Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
       manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

  C.   Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
       requirements.

  D.   Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


1.5    QUALITY ASSURANCE



DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS                                                        15415 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
       NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
       marked for intended use.

  B.   Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and
       Usable Buildings and Facilities" about fixtures for people with disabilities.

  C.   Regulatory Requirements:     Comply with requirements in the U.S. Architectural &
       Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
       (UFAS), 1985-494-187" about fixtures for people with disabilities.

  D.   NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health
       Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

  E.   ARI Standard:      Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated
       Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking
       Water Coolers" for type and style classifications.


1.6    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to
       comply with original design and referenced standards.


1.7    EXTRA MATERIALS

  A.   Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
       packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

       1.    Filter Cartridges: Equal to 25 percent of amount installed for each type and size
             indicated, but not less than 2 of each.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles
       "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers and their products or manufacturers only,
       the following requirements apply for product selection:

       1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
             manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.


2.2    WATER-STATION WATER COOLERS

  A.   Water Coolers: Water-station configuration, freestanding, cabinet fixture for top-mounting
       glass fillers.

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS                                                         15415 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


       1.   Manufacturers:

            a.    Filtrine Manufacturing Co.
            b.    Elkay
            c.    Haws
            d.    Sunroc

       2.   Cabinet: All stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick reference Fixture Schedule on Drawings.
       3.   Receptors: Two stainless-steel bowls, with grid drain and bottom outlet, in top with
            two facing front.
       4.   Supply: NPS 1/2 with ball, gate, or globe valve and filter sized for maximum flow
            connected to chiller and each glass filler.
       5.   Drain: Waste piping from each receptor connected to NPS 1-1/2, trap and waste to
            wall complying with ASME A112.18.1M.
       6.   Cooling System: Electric, complying with ARI 1010, for Type R remote water coolers.

            a.    Chassis: Galvanized or corrosion-resistant-coated steel.
            b.    Chiller: Hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled condensing
                  unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, and refrigerant.
            c.    Storage Tank: 2 gal., stainless steel.
            d.    Controls: Adjustable thermostat.
            e.    One-Hour Peak Capacity Rate: 8 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F
                  inlet water and 90 deg F ambient air temperature.
            f.    Electrical Characteristics: 1/2 hp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.
            g.    Refrigerant: HFC – 134a


2.3    FIXTURE SUPPORTS

  A.   Off-Floor, Plumbing Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, water-cooler carriers. Include
       vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs
       matching fixture to be supported.

       1.   Manufacturers:

            a.    Josam Co.
            b.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
            c.    Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
            d.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div.
            e.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Drainage Products Div.
            f.    Zurn Specifications Drainage Operation.

       2.   Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.
       3.   Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead
            of steel pipe uprights.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    EXAMINATION
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS                                                     15415 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
       connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of
       supports match those indicated.

  B.   Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

  C.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2    APPLICATIONS

  A.   Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

  B.   Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.

  C.   Set freestanding and pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

  D.   Set remote water coolers on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

  E.   Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view.
       Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.


3.3    INSTALLATION

  A.   Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures,
       unless otherwise indicated.

  B.   Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers
       to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.

  C.   Install fixtures level and plumb.

  D.   Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to
       water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where
       they can be easily reached for operation. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-
       duty valves.

  E.   Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary
       drainage system.

  F.   Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-
       pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Division 15
       Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.

  G.   Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
       resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section
       "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.


3.4    CONNECTIONS

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS                                                           15415 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.      Drawings
       indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

  B.   Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

  C.   Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

  D.   Ground equipment.

       1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
             torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
             specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.5    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Water-Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
       requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

  B.   Repair or replace malfunctioning units.       Retest as specified above after repairs or
       replacements are made.

  C.   Report test results in writing.


3.6    ADJUSTING

  A.   Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

  B.   Adjust water-cooler temperature settings.


3.7    CLEANING

  A.   After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
       dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

  B.   Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written
       instructions.




DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS                                                      15415 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                      AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15415




DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS            15415 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:

         1.    Backflow preventers.
         2.    Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
         3.    Water regulators.
         4.    Balancing valves.
         5.    Water filters.
         6.    Thermostatic water mixing valves.
         7.    Water tempering valves.
         8.    Strainers.
         9.    Outlet boxes.
         10.   Washer-supply outlets.
         11.   Key-operation hydrants.
         12.   Trap seal primer valves.
         13.   Drain valves.
         14.   Miscellaneous piping specialties.
         15.   Sleeve penetration systems.
         16.   Flashing materials.
         17.   Cleanouts.
         18.   Floor drains.
         19.   Trench drains.
         20.   Oil interceptors.

   B.    Related Sections include the following:

         1.    Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and
               pressure gages.


1.3      DEFINITIONS

   A.    The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

         1.    ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
         2.    PE: Polyethylene plastic.
         3.    PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                       15430 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


         4.    PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


1.4      PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

   A.    Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
         minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

         1.    Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.
         2.    Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.


1.5      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.
         Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
         components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:

         1.    Backflow preventers and water regulators.
         2.    Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers.
         3.    Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
         4.    Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
         5.    Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations.
         6.    Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
         7.    Oil interceptors.
         8.    Sleeve penetration systems.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

   C.    Field test reports.

   D.    Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include
         the following:

         1.    Backflow preventers and water regulators.
         2.    Water filters.
         3.    Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
         4.    Trap seal primer valves and systems.
         5.    Hose stations and hydrants.
         6.    Grease interceptors, grease recovery units, oil interceptors, and solids interceptors.


1.6      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
         plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
         Section "Product Requirements."

   B.    Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.



PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                         15430 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
         NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
         marked for intended use.

   D.    ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping
         materials and installation.

   E.    NSF Compliance:

         1.    Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
               domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-
               water piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
         2.    Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,
               Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.


1.7      EXTRA MATERIALS

   A.    Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
         packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

         1.    Water Filter Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount installed for each type and
               size indicated.
         2.    Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each key-
               operated hose bibb and hydrant installed.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
         requirements apply for product selection:

         1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
               manufacturers specified.


2.2      BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

   A.    Available Manufacturers:

   B.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Febco Backflow Preventers.
         2.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
         3.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

   C.    General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.


PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                        15430 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
         2.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged
               ends.

               a.    Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow
                     preventers having cast-iron or steel body.

         3.    Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
         4.    Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
         5.    Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.

   D.    Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:         ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
         atmospheric vent.

   E.    Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and
         manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached
         to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

   F.    Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous
         pressure application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves with
         intermediate atmospheric vent.

   G.    Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous
         pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and
         strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-
         gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves.

         1.    Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

   H.    Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous
         pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test
         cocks; and two positive-seating check valves.

         1.    Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

   I.    Antisiphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure
         application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc,
         test cocks, and atmospheric vent.

         1.    Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

   J.    Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers:           ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous
         pressure application. Include union inlet and two independent check valves.

   K.    Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers:        ASSE 1032, suitable for continuous
         pressure application for carbonated beverage dispensers. Include stainless-steel body;
         primary and secondary checks; ball check; intermediate atmospheric-vent port for relieving
         carbon dioxide; and threaded ends, NPS 3/8.

   L.    Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved or
         UL listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                        15430 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


         gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-
         differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between two positive-
         seating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and
         reduced-pressure backflow preventer.

         1.    Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

   M.    Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3-gpm flow and
         applications with up to 10-foot head of water back pressure. Include two check valves;
         intermediate atmospheric vent; and nonremovable, ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on
         outlet.

   N.    Back-Siphonage Backflow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for continuous pressure
         and backflow applications. Include shutoff valves, check valve, test cocks, and vacuum
         vent.


2.3      DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS

   A.    Description: ASSE 1021, fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck
         mounting; with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 5 gpm; and
         inlet pressure of at least 5 psig at temperature of at least 140 deg F. Include 5/8-inch- ID
         inlet and 7/8-inch- ID outlet hose connections.

   B.    Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F.

         1.    Inlet Hose: 5/8-inch- ID and 48 inches long.
         2.    Outlet Hose: 7/8-inch- ID and 48 inches long.


2.4      WATER REGULATORS

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Cla-Val Co.
         2.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.
         3.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
         4.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

   B.    General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig
         minimum. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed, Y-pattern strainer.

         1.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

               a.    General-Duty Service:  Single-seated, direct operated, unless otherwise
                     indicated.
               b.    Booster Heater Water Supply: Single-seated, direct operated with integral
                     bypass.




PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                       15430 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


         2.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
               AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron
               body.

               a.    Type: Single-seated, direct operated.
               b.    Type: Pilot-operated, single- or double-seated, cast-iron-body main valve, with
                     bronze-body pilot valve.

         3.    Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
         4.    Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.


2.5      BALANCING VALVES

   A.    Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting
         indicator. Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure
         meter, and carrying case.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
               b.    Flow Design, Inc.
               c.    ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.
               d.    ROMAC Industries, Inc.; Hays Fluid Control Div.
               e.    Taco, Inc.
               f.    Tour & Andersson, Inc.
               g.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

         2.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated
               nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
         3.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and threaded
               ends.
         4.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and flanged or
               grooved ends.

   B.    Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for
         400-psig minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard or full-port,
         chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded or solder-joint ends, and
         vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Conbraco Industries, Inc.
               b.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
               c.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
               d.    Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
               e.    Grinnell Corporation.
               f.    Hammond Valve.
               g.    Milwaukee Valve Company.
               h.    NIBCO INC.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                      15430 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


2.6      WATER FILTERS

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Campbell Manufacturing, Inc.
         2.    Consler Corporation.
         3.    CUNO, Incorporated.
         4.    Eagle Spring Filtration, Inc.
         5.    Eden Equipment Company.
         6.    Filpro Corporation.
         7.    Filterspun.
         8.    Filtrine Manufacturing Company; Drinking Water Division.
         9.    Harmsco Industrial Filters.
         10.   Manitowoc Ice, Inc.
         11.   Met-Pro Corporation; Keystone Filter Division.
         12.   Osmonics.
         13.   Pall Corporation.
         14.   Plymouth Products, Inc.
         15.   PURA, Inc.
         16.   U.S. Filter; Filterite Div.
         17.   Waterlink, Inc.
         18.   Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
         19.   Whatman, Inc.; Balston Div.

   B.    General: Cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable water. Include housing, fittings,
         filter cartridges, and cartridge end caps.

   C.    Wall-Mounting Type: Housing head section with threaded inlet and outlet, mounting
         bracket, and removable lower section for 10-inch- long filter cartridge.

         1.    Housing Material: Plastic, 125-psig minimum operating pressure.
         2.    Cartridge:    Activated-charcoal filter media, 10 inches, 10-micron-particulate
               removable rating.


2.7      THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
         2.    Leonard Valve Company.
         3.    Mark Controls Corp.; Powers Process Controls.
         4.    Symmons Industries, Inc.
         5.    T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

   B.    General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze
         body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable
         temperature setting, and thermometer.

         1.    Type: Bimetal thermostat, operation and pressure rating 125 psig minimum.
         2.    Type: Liquid-filled motor, operation and pressure rating 100 psig minimum.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                     15430 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:

         1.    Piping, valves, and unions. Include thermometer if not in cabinet.
         2.    Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome plate.
         3.    Cabinet: Recessed-mounting stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door and
               thermometer in front.

   D.    Manifolded, Thermostatic Water Mixing-Valve Assemblies:             Factory-fabricated unit
         consisting of parallel arrangement of thermostatic water mixing valves.

         1.    Arrangement: One large-flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow-control valve,
               pressure regulator, inlet and outlet pressure gages, and one small-flow, thermostatic
               water mixing valve with flow-control valve. Include outlet thermometer, factory- or
               field-installed inlet and outlet valves, and other indicated options.
         2.    Include piping, valves, and unions.
         3.    Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome plate.
         4.    Cabinet: Surface-mounting stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door and
               thermometer in front.


2.8      STRAINERS

   A.    Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include
         ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round perforations, unless
         otherwise indicated.

         1.    Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise
               indicated.
         2.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
         3.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-approved,
               epoxy coating and flanged ends.
         4.    Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.

               a.    Drain: Pipe plug.

         5.    Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle.

               a.    Type: Simplex with one basket.
               b.    Drain: Pipe plug.

   B.    Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted
         flange or clamp cover and drain with plug.

         1.    Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8-inch diameter holes and lift-out handle.
         2.    Female threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller, and flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
               larger.


2.9      OUTLET BOXES

   A.    Manufacturers:
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                        15430 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Acorn Engineering Company.
         2.    Gray, Guy Manufacturing Co., Inc.
         3.    IPS Corporation.
         4.    LSP Products Group.
         5.    Oatey.
         6.    Plastic Oddities, Inc.
         7.    Symmons Industries, Inc.
         8.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.

   B.    General:     Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying with
         ASME A112.18.1M.      Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment
         connections, and wood-blocking reinforcement.

   C.    Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hot- and cold-water hose connections, drain, and the
         following:

         1.    Box and Faceplate: Stainless steel.
         2.    Shutoff Fittings: Two hose bibbs.
         3.    Supply Fittings: Two NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water
               tubing.
         4.    Drain: NPS 2 standpipe, P-trap, and direct waste connection to drainage piping.
         5.    Inlet Hoses: Two ASTM D 3571, 60-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer
               inlet hoses with female hose-thread couplings.
         6.    Drain Hose: One 48-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with
               hooked end.

   D.    Icemaker Outlet Boxes: With hose connection and the following:

         1.    Box and Faceplate: Stainless steel.
         2.    Shutoff Fitting: Hose bibb.
         3.    Supply Fitting: NPS 1/2 ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing.

   E.    Reinforcement: 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking between studs. Fire-
         retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."


2.10     KEY-OPERATION HYDRANTS

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    Josam Co.
         2.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
         3.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.
         4.    Woodford Manufacturing Co.
         5.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.

   B.    General: ASME A112.21.3M, key-operation hydrant with pressure rating of 125 psig.

         1.    Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 threaded or solder joint.
         2.    Outlet: ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads.
         3.    Operating Keys: Two with each key-operation hydrant.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                    15430 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


   C.    Nonfreeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants:          ASSE 1019, self-drainable with flush-
         mounting box with cover, integral nonremovable hose-connection backflow preventer,
         casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, concealed outlet, and wall clamp.

         1.    Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
               automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
         2.    Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.


2.11     TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES

   A.    Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves:         ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the
         following characteristics:

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    E & S Valves.
               b.    Josam Co.
               c.    MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
               d.    Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
               e.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
               f.    Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
               g.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.
               h.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.

         2.    125-psig minimum working pressure.
         3.    Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
         4.    Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
         5.    Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
         6.    Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
               chrome finished.


2.12     DRAIN VALVES

   A.    Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum
         CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball,
         replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

         1.    Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
         2.    Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.


2.13     MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

   A.    Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, piston type with pressurized metal-
         tube cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A
         through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

         1.    Manufacturers:

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                    15430 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


               a.    Amtrol, Inc.
               b.    Josam Co.
               c.    Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
               d.    Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
               e.    Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.
               f.    Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

   B.    Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for
         compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of
         design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral nonremovable, drainable hose-
         connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on
         outlet.

         1.    Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
         2.    Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
         3.    Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
         4.    Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
         5.    Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
         6.    Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
         7.    Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
         8.    Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

   C.    Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.

         1.    Bolted Construction: Bronze body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal float
               and stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded NPS 1/2 minimum inlet; 125-
               psig(860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F; and threaded vent outlet.
         2.    Welded Construction: Stainless-steel body with corrosion-resistant metal float,
               stainless-steel mechanism and seat, threaded NPS 3/8 minimum inlet, 150-psig-kPa)
               minimum pressure rating, and threaded vent outlet.

   D.    Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch- thick,
         lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe with galvanized steel
         boot reinforcement, and counterflashing fitting.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

         2.    Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

   E.    Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
         piping and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.

         1.    NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.
         2.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

   F.    Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and
         trap seal primer valve connection.


PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                       15430 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


   G.    Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semiopen top
         with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or threaded
         outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that will provide
         fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

   H.    Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
         terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

   I.    Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
         vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.

   J.    Vent Terminals:       Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof
         assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide
         1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension,
         with counterflashing.

   K.    Downspout Boots:      ASTM A 48, gray-iron casting, with NPS 4 outlet; shop-applied
         bituminous coating; and inlet size to match downspout.

   L.    Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.

   M.    Conductor Nozzles: Bronze body with threaded inlet for connected conductor size, and
         bronze wall flange with mounting holes.

         1.    Finish: Polished bronze.


2.14     SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS

   A.    Manufacturers:

         1.    ProSet Systems, Inc.

   B.    Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack
         fitting with firestopping plug.

         1.    Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
               nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
         2.    Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with
               neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch.
               Include PVC protective cap for plug.

               a.    Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for
                     plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.


2.15     FLASHING MATERIALS

   A.    Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
         weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:


PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                     15430 - 12
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
         2.    Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
         3.    Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

   B.    Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless
         otherwise indicated:

         1.    General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft..
         2.    Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft..

   C.    Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and
         0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized,
         mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

   D.    Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

   E.    Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
         units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

   F.    Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

   G.    Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.


2.16     CLEANOUTS

   A.    Cleanouts, : Comply with ASME A112.36.2M OR ASME A112.3.1

         1.    Application: Floor cleanout OR Wall cleanout for installation in exposed piping.
         2.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Josam Co.
               b.    LSP Products Group.
               c.    Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
               d.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
               e.    Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
               f.    Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.

         3.    Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
         4.    Outlet Connection: Threaded.
         5.    Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
         6.    Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
         7.    Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
         8.    Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
         9.    Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty and Extra Heavy-Duty in bay areas.


2.17     FLOOR DRAINS

   A.    Floor Drains,: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M or ASME A112.3.1.


PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                       15430 - 13
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Application: Floor drain.
         2.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Josam Co.
               b.    Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
               c.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
               d.    Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
               e.    Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.
               f.    Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation

         3.    Body Material: Gray iron.
         4.    Seepage Flange: Required.
         5.    Clamping Device: Required.
         6.    Outlet: Bottom.
         7.    Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Acid-resistant enamel.
         8.    Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
         9.    Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
         10.   Top Shape: Round or Square, see plans.
         11.   Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy-Duty unless otherwise specified.
         12.   Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal
               primer valve connection.
         13.   Trap Material: Cast iron.
         14.   Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
         15.   Trap Features: Cleanout and trap seal primer valve drain connection.


2.18     TRENCH DRAINS

   A.    Trench Drains: Comply with ASME A112.3.1.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Josam Co.
               b.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
               c.    Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
               d.    Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.
               e.    Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation

         2.    Body Material: High-density polyethylene.
         3.    Seepage Flange: Required.
         4.    Clamping Device: Required.
         5.    Outlet: End.
         6.    Grate Material: Ductile iron.
         7.    Grate Finish: Not required.
         8.    Dimensions of Frame and Grate: See schedule on Drawings.
         9.    Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy-Duty.


2.19     ROOF DRAINS

   A.    Roof Drains: Comply with ASME A112.3.1.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                          15430 - 14
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Application: Roof drain.
         2.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Josam Co.
               b.    Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
               c.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
               d.    Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
               e.    Watts Industries, Inc., Drainage Products Div.;
               f.    Zurn Industries, Inc., Specification Drainage Operation;.

         3.    Body Material: Cast iron.
         4.    Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
         5.    Outlet: Bottom.
         6.    Dome Material: Cast iron.
         7.    Extension Collars: Required.
         8.    Underdeck Clamp: Required.
         9.    Sump Receiver: Required.


2.20     OIL INTERCEPTORS

   A.    Oil Interceptors: As per JHA.

         1.    Manufacturers:

               a.    Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc.
               b.    Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
               c.    Copeland Industries.
               d.    AMCOR

         2.    Body Material: Concrete.
         3.    Interior Lining: Not required.
         4.    Exterior Coating: Not required.
         5.    Mounting: Below grade, direct buried as per AHJ requirements.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      INSTALLATION

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
         materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

   B.    Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and
         to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
         authorities having jurisdiction.

         1.    Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
         2.    Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-
               gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                          15430 - 15
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


               pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached
               to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this
               application.
         3.    Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

   C.    Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
         Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

   D.    Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid
         valve.

         1.    Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade.

   E.    Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum
         of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper
         flow.

   F.    Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
         unless otherwise indicated:

   G.    Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping
         below floors.

   H.    Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
         finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

   I.    Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through
         floors with waterproof membrane.

   J.    Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
         according to manufacturer's written instructions.

   K.    Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.         Maintain 1-inch
         clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

   L.    Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
         with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

         1.    Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
         2.    Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
               Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

               a.    Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-
                     inch total depression.
               b.    Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
               c.    Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater
                     than 1-inch total depression.

         3.    Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
               adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                         15430 - 16
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


         4.    Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
               otherwise indicated.

   M.    Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
         written installation instructions.

         1.    Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
               adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
         2.    Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

   N.    Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
         authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

         1.    Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral
               cleanout on outlet.

   O.    Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building
         substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is
         indicated.

   P.    Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

   Q.    Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing
         specialties.

   R.    Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate,
         or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.
         Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe
         valves.

   S.    Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet and drain
         piping from outlet to floor drain.

   T.    Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap
         is indicated.

   U.    Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
         within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
         protruding pipe fittings.


3.2      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.          Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

   C.    Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.

   D.    Ground equipment.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                           15430 - 17
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010


   E.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
         tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
         UL 486A and UL 486B.

   F.    Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16
         Sections.

   G.    Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories.

         1.    Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-
               control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil
               storage tank.


3.3      FLASHING INSTALLATION

   A.    Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
         are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

         1.    Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
               Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

   B.    Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
         floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

         1.    Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches,
               and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
         2.    Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
               sleeve.
         3.    Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
               inches around specialty.

   C.    Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

   D.    Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

   E.    Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
         flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

   F.    Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
         flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

   G.    Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.


3.4      LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

   A.    Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate
         or sign on or near each backflow preventer thermostatic water mixing valve.



PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                           15430 - 18
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,
               indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
               operations, in addition to identifying unit.
         2.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
               nameplates and signs.


3.5      PROTECTION

   A.    Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
         and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

   B.    Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.




PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                                                                       15430 - 19
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15430




PLUMBING SPECIALTIES                   15430 - 20
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                        BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                           AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15486 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:

       1.    Commercial, gas water heaters.
       2.    Accessories.


1.3    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping,
       installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

  B.   Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
       required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
       field connection.

       1.    Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control systems.         Differentiate between
             manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

  C.   Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products
       furnished comply with requirements.

  D.   Maintenance Data:     For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in
       Division 1.

  E.   Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.4    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
       manufacturer.

  B.   Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
       heaters and are based on specific units indicated. Other manufacturers' products
       complying with requirements may be considered.            Refer to Division 1 Section
       "Substitutions."

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS                                                    15486 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                        BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                           AUGUST 9, 2010


  C.   Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
       NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
       marked for intended use.

  D.   ANSI Compliance: Provide gas water heaters that comply with ANSI standards for gas
       water heaters and related products and that bear AGA certification label.

  E.   ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply
       with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

  F.   ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:

       1.   ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise
            Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.


1.5    WARRANTY

  A.   General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
       other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
       be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
       requirements of the Contract Documents.

  B.   Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or
       replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
       warranty period.

       1.   Failures include storage tanks and burner assemblies.
       2.   Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion:

            a.    Storage Tanks: 10 years.
            b.    Burner Assemblies: Five years.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
       following:

       1.   Commercial, High-Efficiency, Sealed-Combustion-Chamber, Gas Water Heaters:

            a.    Lochinvar Corp.
            b.    Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
            c.    State Industries

       2.   Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units:

            a.    Safety: W. H. Safety Products, Inc.

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS                                                     15486 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


2.2    COMMERCIAL, HIGH-EFFICIENCY, CONDENSING, GAS WATER HEATERS

  A.   Description: Condensing configuration and components complying with appropriate
       requirements of ANSI Z21.10.3 and UL 795, with nominal efficiency rating not less than 93
       percent.

  B.   Shell Construction: ASME code with 150-psig working-pressure rating.

       1.    Tappings:     Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping
             connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rods, and
             controls as required. Attach tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling.

             a.    NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1, pipe threads.
             b.    NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and
                   stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-
                   alloy flanges.

       2.    Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials
             for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
       3.    Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except
             connections and controls.
       4.    Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.

  C.   Burner: Condensing type for natural-gas fuel, complying with appropriate requirements of
       UL 795.

       1.    Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
       2.    Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, automatic gas-ignition system and components.
       3.    Automatic Damper:       ANSI Z21.66, gas-fired-appliance, automatic-vent-damper
             device.

  D.   Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.

  E.   Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank.

  F.   Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.


2.3    WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

  A.   Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following:

       1.    Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22, combination temperature and pressure relief
             valve.
       2.    Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless water
             heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.

  B.   Vacuum Relief Valves: According to the following:

       1.    Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22.
       2.    Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS                                                          15486 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


  C.   Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

  D.   Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type, factory or field installed. Include
       pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and gas
       supply.

  E.   Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

  F.   Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than
       base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

  G.   Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
       arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that
       is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
       heater.

  H.   Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1
       or ASHRAE 90.2.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    CONCRETE BASES

  A.   Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
       Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."


3.2    WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

  A.   Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

       1.    Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
             bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

  B.   Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
       referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units
       so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

  C.   Anchor water heaters to substrate.

  D.   Install and connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.

       1.    Install appliance, gas pressure regulators on gas-burner inlets of water heaters
             without pressure regulators.
       2.    Install vent piping from gas-train pressure regulators and valves to outside of building
             where required. Terminate vent piping with brass-screened vent cap fitting. Do not
             combine vents except with approval of authorities having jurisdiction.



FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS                                                         15486 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


  E.   Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief
       valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water
       piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.

  F.   Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping for bottom inlet connectionequipment.

  G.   Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor
       drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do
       not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.

  H.   Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Section
       "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

  I.   Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
       Gages" for pressure gages.

  J.   Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
       Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater.
       Include shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling
       valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty
       valves and Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

  K.   Arrange for insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory-applied insulation.

  L.   Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
       integral or fitting-type heat traps.

  M.   Fill water heaters with water.

  N.   Charge expansion tanks with air.


3.3    CONNECTIONS

  A.   Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.         Drawings
       indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

  B.   Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

  C.   Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
       circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.

  D.   Connect gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoff valve, and union; minimum size
       same as inlet connection.

  E.   Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.

  F.   Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect to vent system. Use vents same size as or
       larger than water heater outlets, but not smaller than indicated unless smaller vent size has
       been calculated according to NFPA 54. Comply with gas utility requirements for sizing.


FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS                                                            15486 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


       Gas vents and combustion air intake materials and installation shall be in accordance with
       the equipment manufacturers UL Listing and installation instructions.

  G.   Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
       Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.

  H.   Ground equipment.

       1.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
             torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
             specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.4    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

  B.   In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:

       1.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
             and equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
       2.    Verify that piping system tests are complete.
       3.    Check for piping connection leaks.
       4.    Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
       5.    Check operation of circulators.
       6.    Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
       7.    Energize electric circuits.
       8.    Adjust operating controls.
       9.    Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless
             piping system application requires higher temperature.
       10.   Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.


3.5    DEMONSTRATION

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
       to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters.

       1.    Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping
             troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
       2.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
             Closeout."
       3.    Review date in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
             Maintenance Data."
       4.    Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
             notice.


END OF SECTION 15486



FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS                                                          15486 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15513 - CONDENSING BOILERS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, water-tube
         condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
         and accessories.

   B.    Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories.        Include plans, elevations,
         sections, details, and attachments to other Work.

         1.    For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
               analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
               their preparation.
         2.    Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control wiring.

   C.    Source quality-control test reports.

   D.    ASME "A" Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A" stamp certificate of authorization,
         and document hydrostatic testing of piping external to boiler.

   E.    Startup service reports.

   F.    Operation and Maintenance Data: For condensing boilers to include in emergency,
         operation, and maintenance manuals.

   G.    Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.4      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
         condensing boilers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
         Section "Product Requirements."


CONDENSING BOILERS                                                                         15513 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
         NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
         marked for intended use.

   C.    ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label condensing boilers to comply with ASME Boiler
         and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

   D.    ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance:         Condensing boilers shall have minimum efficiency
         according to Table 10-8.

   E.    DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Appendix N,
         "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."

   F.    UL Compliance:        Test condensing boilers to comply with UL 726, "Oil-Fired Boiler
         Assemblies."

   G.    UL Compliance: Test condensing boilers to comply with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial
         Gas Heating Equipment."


1.5      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
         Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.


1.6      WARRANTY

   A.    Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
         replace components of condensing boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within
         specified warranty period.

   B.    Warranty Period for Water-Tube Condensing Boilers: 20 years from date of Substantial
         Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
         for product selection:
         1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
               manufacturers specified.


2.2      WATER-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS

   A.    Manufacturers:


CONDENSING BOILERS                                                                          15513 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


         1.    Lochinvar Corp.
         2.    Teledyne Laars; Trianco-Heatmaker, Inc.
         3.    Triangle Tube

   B.    Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested water-tube condensing boiler with
         heat exchanger sealed pressure-tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-
         gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain
         connections; and controls. Water heating service only.

   C.    Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to
         resist boiler movement during a seismic event when boiler base is anchored to building
         structure.

   D.    Boiler Characteristics and Capacities: Refer to schedule.

   E.    Water-Tube Boiler Components:

         1.    Heat Exchanger: Stainless Steel primary and stainless-steel secondary heat
               exchangers.
         2.    Combustion Chamber: Stainless steel, sealed.
         3.    Burner: Natural gas, forced draft drawing from gas premixing valve.

         4.    Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to
               prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber.

               a.    Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements.
               b.    RPM: 3450.
               c.    Electrical Characteristics: 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

         5.    Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.
               Include 100 percent safety shutoff with electronic flame supervision.
         6.    Ignition: Silicone carbide hot-surface ignition that includes flame safety supervision
               and 100 percent main-valve shutoff.
         7.    Integral Circulator: Cast-iron body and stainless-steel impeller sized for minimum
               flow required in heat exchanger.
         8.    Casing:

               a.    Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.
               b.    Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.
               c.    Finish: Textured epoxy.
               d.    Insulation: Minimum 1-inch- thick fiberglass insulation surrounding the heat
                     exchanger.
               e.    Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.

         9.    Mounting base to secure boiler to wall.


2.3      HOT-WATER BOILER TRIM

   A.    Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

CONDENSING BOILERS                                                                           15513 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


   B.    Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.

   C.    Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. 30 psig.

   D.    Altitude and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water-
         pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature
         ranges so normal operating range is at approximately 50 percent of full range.

   E.    Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.

   F.    Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.


2.4      BURNER OPERATING CONTROLS

   A.    Description: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit the
         operation of burner.

         1.    High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above
               maximum boiler design temperature.
         2.    Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low
               water. Cutoff switch shall be manual-reset type.
         3.    Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler
               combustion-air inlet.
         4.    Alarm Bell: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm
               for above conditions.


2.5      BOILER OPERATING CONTROLS

   A.    Refer to Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

   B.    Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

         1.    Control Transformer: 115 V.
         2.    Operating Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle burner.
         3.    Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated, and field-installed panel to
               control burner firing rate to reset supply-water temperature inversely with outside-air
               temperature. At 0 deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at
               160°F; at 60 deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 140
               deg F.

               a.    Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers.

   C.    Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable
         building management system to monitor and control hot-water set point and display boiler
         status and alarms.


2.6      VENTING KITS


CONDENSING BOILERS                                                                           15513 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   A.    Kit: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C, stainless-steel, vertical vent terminal, roof passage thimble,
         indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap, and sealant.


2.7      SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and
         Pressure Vessel Code: Section I, for high-pressure boilers and Section IV, for low-pressure
         boilers.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt
         sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes,
         and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.

         1.    Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate.           Determine exact
               locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

   B.    Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed. Proceed
         with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      BOILER INSTALLATION

   A.    Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

   B.    Assemble and install boiler trim.

   C.    Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.


3.3      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.         Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of
         materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in
         Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

   C.    Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.

   D.    Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union
         or flange at each connection.

   E.    Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

CONDENSING BOILERS                                                                             15513 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


   F.    Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.

   G.    Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

   H.    Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

   I.    Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

   J.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
         tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
         UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.4      STARTUP SERVICE

   A.    Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test, inspect, and adjust boiler
         components and equipment installation and to perform startup service.

   B.    Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

   C.    Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

   D.    Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust
         air-fuel ratio and combustion.

   E.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
         equipment.

   F.    Adjust initial temperature set points.

   G.    Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

   H.    Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
         Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
         conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this
         purpose, without additional cost.

   I.    Prepare written report that documents testing procedures and results.


3.5      DEMONSTRATION

   A.    Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
         to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing boilers. Refer to Division 1 Section "
         Demonstration and Training."


END OF SECTION 15513




CONDENSING BOILERS                                                                          15513 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15542 - FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes gas-fired infrared and high-intensity radiant heaters.


1.3    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
       furnished specialties; and accessories.

  B.   Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

       1.    Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
             seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
       2.    Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
             attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
             and rails, and base weights.
       3.    Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

  C.   Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.

  D.   Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired radiant heaters to include in emergency,
       operation, and maintenance manuals.

  E.   Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.4    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
       having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as
       documented according to ASTM E 548.

  B.   Source Limitations: Obtain fuel-fired radiant heaters through one source from a single
       manufacturer.

  C.   Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of fuel-
       fired radiant heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
       Section "Product Requirements."
FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS                                                               15542 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


  D.   Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
       NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
       marked for intended use.


1.5    WARRANTY

  A.   Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
       replace heat exchanger of fuel-fired radiant heater that fails in materials or workmanship
       within specified warranty period.

  B.   Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


1.6    EXTRA MATERIALS

  A.   Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
       packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

       1.    Burner Igniters: One hot-surface burner igniters for each style of gas-fired radiant
             heater furnished.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
       requirements apply for product selection:
       1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
             manufacturers specified.


2.2    TUBULAR INFRARED HEATERS, MODULATING OR 2-STAGE

  A.   Manufacturers:

       1.    Ambi-Rad Ltd.
       2.    Roberts-Gordon, Inc.
       3.    Solaronics, Inc.

  B.   Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.6, "Gas-
       Fired Infrared Heaters."

       1.    AGA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of American Gas
             Association.
       2.    Type of Gas: Designed and built to burn natural gas with characteristics same as
             those of gas available at Project site.
       3.    High-Altitude Kit: For Project elevation of 5,400 feet above sea level.


FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS                                                                15542 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


  C.   Combustion Tubing: Aluminized steel with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-
       resistant external finish.

  D.   Tubing Connections: Stainless-steel couplings or flared joints with stainless-steel draw
       bolts.

  E.   Reflector: Polished aluminum, 97 percent minimum reflectivity, with end caps. Shape to
       control radiation from tubing for uniform intensity at floor level with 100 percent cutoff above
       centerline of tubing. Provide for rotating reflector or heater around a horizontal axis for
       minimum 30-degree tilt from vertical.

       1.    Reflector Extension Shields: Same material as reflectors, arranged for fixed
             connection to lower reflector lip and rigid support to provide 100 percent cutoff of
             direct radiation from tubing at angles greater than 30 degrees from vertical.
       2.    Include hanger kit.

  F.   Burner Safety Controls:

       1.    Gas Control Valve: Two-stage or modulating, regulated redundant 24-V ac gas valve
             containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot
             shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.
       2.    Blocked Vent Safety: Differential pressure switch in burner safety circuit to stop
             burner operation with high discharge or suction pressure.
       3.    Control Panel Interlock: Stops burner if panel is open.
       4.    Indicator Lights: Burner-on indicator light.

  G.   Burner and Emitter Type: 2-stage or modulating, gravity-vented power burner, with the
       following features:

       1.    Emitter Tube: Aluminized-steel tubing with sight glass for burner and pilot flame
             observation.
       2.    Venting: Connector at exit end of emitter tubing for vent-pipe connection.

             a.    Vent Terminal: Vertical.


       3.    Burner/Ignition: Stainless-steel burner cup and head with balanced-rotor draft fan
             and direct-sensing, hot-surface ignition.
       4.    Combustion-Air Connection: Duct connection for combustion air to be drawn directly
             from space by burner fan.

  H.   Accessories:

       1.    Parabolic reflector.
       2.    Stainless-steel flexible connector with manual valve.
       3.    Hanger chain with "S" hooks.
       4.    Preassembled chain mounting kit.


2.3    TEMPERATURE CONTROL

FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS                                                                    15542 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   Wires and cables are specified in Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

  B.   Sensors, Components, and          Wiring:     Specified   in   Division 15   Section    "HVAC
       Instrumentation and Controls."

  C.   Thermostat: 2-stage and/or modulating, 24-V ac, wall-mounting type with 50 to 90 deg F
       operating range and fan on switch.

       1.    Control Transformer: Integrally mounted, 120 to 24 V ac.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    EXAMINATION

  A.   Examine roughing-in for radiant heater piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
       connections before equipment installation.

  B.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2    INSTALLATION

  A.   Install radiant heaters level and plumb.

  B.   Install and connect gas-fired radiant heaters and associated fuel and vent features and
       systems according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's
       written installation instructions.

  C.   Suspended Units:       Suspend from substrate using chain hanger kits and building
       attachments.

       1.    Restrain the unit to resist code-required horizontal acceleration. Seismic restraints
             are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."


3.3    CONNECTIONS

  A.   Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.          Drawings
       indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

  B.   Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

  C.   Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping."
       Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner
       removal and service. Provide AGA-approved flexible units.

  D.   Connect vents according to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."

  E.   Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS                                                                 15542 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


       1.    Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory
             mounted.

  F.   Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

  G.   Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
       tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
       UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.4    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
       inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
       electrical connections.

       1.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
             and equipment.
       2.    Verify bearing lubrication.
       3.    Verify proper motor rotation.
       4.    Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

             a.    Test procedures used.
             b.    Test results that comply with requirements.
             c.    Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
                   achieve compliance with requirements.


3.5    ADJUSTING

  A.   Adjust initial temperature set points.

  B.   Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.


3.6    DEMONSTRATION

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
       to adjust, operate, and maintain fuel-fired radiant heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section
       Demonstration and Training."




FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS                                                               15542 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              AUGUST 9, 2010




END OF SECTION 15542




FUEL-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS              15542 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 15550 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes the following:

       1.    Listed single- and double-wall vents.

       2.    Type B vents.

  B.   Related Sections include the following:

       1.    Division 15 Section "Draft Control Devices" for induced-draft and mechanical fans and
             motorized and barometric dampers.


1.3    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: For the following:

       1.    Type B vents.
       2.    Special gas vents.

  B.   Welding certificates.

  C.   Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1.4    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single
       manufacturer.

  B.   Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
       Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for
       shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks.

  C.   Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.


1.5    COORDINATION
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS                                                            15550 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   C
       oordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.         These
       items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."


1.6    WARRANTY

  A.   Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
       replace components of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
       warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures caused by
       expansion and contraction.

  B.   Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
       product selection:


       1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
             the manufacturers specified.


2.2    LISTED TYPE B VENTS

  A.   Manufacturers:

       1.    American Metal Products; MASCO Corporation.
       2.    Heat-Fab Inc.
       3.    Metal-Fab, Inc.
       4.    Schebler Co. (The).
       5.    Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.
       6.    Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co.
       7.    Van-Packer Co.

  B.   Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 441 and rated for 480 deg F
       continuously for Type B,; with neutral or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211
       and suitable for certified gas-fired appliances.

  C.   Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/4-inch airspace.

  D.   Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 430 stainless steel.

  E.   Outer Jacket: Galvanized steel.



BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS                                                              15550 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


  F.   Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable
       roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners;
       fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for
       same assembly.


       1.    Termination:   Round, high wind chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of
             rainfall.


2.3    LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENT

  A.   Manufacturers:

       1.    Heat-Fab Inc.
       2.    Metal-Fab, Inc.
       3.    ProTech Systems Inc.
       4.    Z-FLEX.
       5.

  B.   Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F
       continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211 and suitable
       for condensing-gas appliances.

  C.   Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/2-inch airspace.

  D.   Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel.

  E.   Outer Jacket: Stainless steel.

  F.   Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable
       roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners;
       fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for
       same assembly.

       1.    Termination:   Concentric Vent Kit, Stack cap designed to exclude 90 percent of
             rainfall.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    EXAMINATION

  A.   Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
       and other conditions affecting performance of work.

  B.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2    INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS                                                           15550 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


  A.   Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination
       heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

  B.   Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written
       installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.

  C.   Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all
       accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

  D.   Slope vents down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest
       point piped to nearest drain.

  E.   Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by
       manufacturer.

  F.   Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior
       finish.

  G.   Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch out of plumb from top to
       bottom.


3.3    CLEANING

  A.   After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
       finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

  B.   Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean
       external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply
       touchup finish to match factory or shop finish.

  C.   Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not
       completed or connected to equipment.


END OF SECTION 15550




BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS                                                            15550 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15650 - REFRIGERATION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    RELATED

       "General Requirements", Division 1 and Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods Spec Section
       15050 of the Project Manual pertain to and are hereby made part of the work of the Spec
       Section.

1.2    DESCRIPTION OF WORK

       Work of this Section generally includes provision of refrigeration equipment related to the
       refrigeration system.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

       A.      Refer to Section 15700.

2.2    REFRIGERATION PIPING

       A.      Refrigeration: Type ACR copper with hard soldered wrought copper fittings. Solder shall
               be 95/5 or silver. Insulate suction lines with 3/4" Armstrong Armaflex insulation.

       B.      Lines from coils to condensing units on 5 ton capacity units or smaller may be pre-
               charged tubing with adapters and connectors sized to the coil and condensing unit.
               Suction lines shall be insulated.

       C.      Specialties: Coil-condensing units shall be provided with proper sized expansion valves,
               liquid line dryers, sight glasses or moisture indicators and charging valves as required.

       D.      Drainage: Galvanized steel with galvanized malleable screwed fittings or Type M copper
               with wrought solder fittings. Provide "P" trap on outlet of units.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    EQUIPMENT

       A.      Install all equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendation, local
               codes and ordinances and installation standards.

       B.      Verify all equipment is installed with proper clearances around units to provide easy
               maintenance, service and repair.



REFRIGERATION                                                                                 15650 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       JUNE 2, 2010


       C.      Verify all electrical characteristics of equipment with manufacturer to make certain all
               wiring is in accordance with the National Electric Code and coordinate size of motor loads
               and power service requirements with Electrical Contractor.

       D.      Provide all required refrigeration equipment start-up and pressure test all equipment in
               accordance with manufacturer's requirements and perform all tests as described in this
               section.

3.2    PIPING INSTALLATIONS

       A.      General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15, “The Safety
               Code for Mechanical Refrigeration”.

       B.      Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop.

       C.      Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as
               possible.

       D.      Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other
               equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and
               inspection.

       E.      Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between
               pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to
               permit installation of full thickness insulation.

       F.      Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are
               installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall
               be insulated as a unit.

               1.      Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks
                       have been eliminated.

       G.      Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and
               symmetrically.

       H.      Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
               exposed to mechanical injury.

       I.      Slope Refrigerant piping as follows.

               1.      Install horizontal suction lines with ½ inch per 10 feet downward slope to the
                       compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate
                       from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs.
               2.      Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to entrain oil
                       in vertical runs.
               3.      Liquid lines may be installed level.




REFRIGERATION                                                                                   15650 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


       J.      Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

       K.      Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
               permitted, unless expressly indicated.

       L.      Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
               insulation applications.

       M.      Conceal all pipe installation in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below
               grade of floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

       N.      Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements
               of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance
               outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for
               panel removal.

       O.      Locate groups or piper parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
               services of valves.

       P.      Exterior Wall and Roof Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls and
               roofs using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller that 6 inches
               shall be steel. Refer to detail on drawings.

3.3    PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

       A.      Brazed joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Brazing Manual”.

       B.      Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen) to prevent
               formation of scale.

       C.      Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.

3.4    VALVE INSTALLATIONS

       A.      General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer’s
               instructions.

3.5    EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

       A.      The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

       B.      Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.

3.6    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

       A.      Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME
               Code B31.5, Chapter VI.

               1.      Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through
                       the tubing by means of a wire or an electrician’s tape.

REFRIGERATION                                                                                   15650 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


               2.      Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or
                       pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
               3.      Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or
                       pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
               4.      Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.

3.8    ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

       A.      Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic
               expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

       B.      Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with requirements of Division
               15 Basic Mechanical Materials and methods section “Pipes and Pipe Fittings”.

       C.      Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
               equipment with new materials and products.

3.9    COMMISSIONING

       A.      Charge system using the following procedure:

               1.      Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
               2.      Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg F
                       indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
               3.      During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
               4.      Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between
                       vacuum pump and system.
               5.      Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi.
               6.      Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide
                       full operating charge.

       B.      Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section “Project
               Closeout”.


END SECTION 15650




REFRIGERATION                                                                                  15650 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15700 – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate
       evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.


1.3    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
       characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in
       terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
       requirements, and electrical characteristics.

  B.   Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

       1.    Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
             clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
             field connection.
       2.    Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

  C.   Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

  D.   Field quality-control reports.

  E.   Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
       emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

  F.   Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


1.4    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
       NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

  B.   ASHRAE Compliance:



VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                       15700 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               JUNE 2, 2010


       1.   Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety
            Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
       2.   ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 4 -
            "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "
            Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

  C.   ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.


1.5    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast
       anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
       Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

  B.   Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations
       with actual equipment provided.


1.6    WARRANTY

  A.   Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
       replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or
       workmanship within specified warranty period.

       1.   Warranty Period:

            a.    For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
            b.    For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
            c.    For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.


1.7    EXTRA MATERIALS

  A.   Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
       covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

       1.   Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.
       2.   Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.
       3.   Fan Belts: One] set(s) for each air-handling unit fan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
       indicated on Drawings (Daikin VRV III) or a bid-alternate product by one of the following:



VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                 15700 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  JUNE 2, 2010


       1.    Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.; HVAC Advanced Products Division.


2.2    INDOOR UNITS 5 TONS OR LESS

  A.   Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:

       1.    Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
             insulation on back of panel.
       2.    Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
       3.    Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-
             expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
       4.    Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer
             than 0.1 inch; leak tested to 300 psig underwater; with a two-position control valve.
       5.    Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
             ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic
             contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in
             terminal box for overcurrent protection.
       6.    Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
             motor.
       7.    Fan Motors:

             a.    Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
                   type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Common
                   Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
             b.    Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
                   lubrication.
             c.    Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

       8.    Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
             requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
       9.    Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
       10.   Condensate Drain Pans:

             a.    Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate
                   from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return
                   bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

                   1)    Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
                         ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
                   2)    Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

             b.    Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet.
             c.    Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent
                   overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on [one end] [both ends] of pan.

                   1)    Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

             d.    Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
             e.    Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
                   condensate from top coil.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                    15700 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


  B.   Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:

       1.   Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected
            by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
       2.   Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-
            expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
       3.   Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
            ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic
            contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in
            terminal box for overcurrent protection.
       4.   Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
       5.   Fan Motors:

            a.    Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
                  type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Common
                  Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
            b.    Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
                  lubrication.
            c.    Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
            d.    NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
            e.    Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
                  electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
            f.    Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on [exterior] [interior] of unit.
            g.    <Insert unique motor characteristics>.

       6.   Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
            requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
       7.   Condensate Drain Pans:

            a.    Fabricated with [one] [two] percent slope in at least two planes to collect
                  condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers,
                  and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

                  1)     Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
                         ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
                  2)     Depth: A minimum of 1 inch deep.

            b.    Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet.
            c.    Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent
                  overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on [one end] [both ends] of pan.

                  1)     Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

            d.    Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

       8.   Air Filtration Section:

            a.    General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

                  1)     Comply with NFPA 90A.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                   15700 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              JUNE 2, 2010


                  2)   Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according
                       to ASHRAE 52.2.
                  3)   Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with
                       access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one
                       side or lifted out from access plenum.

            b.    Disposable Panel Filters:

                  1)   Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
                  2)   Thickness: 2 inches.
                  3)   Merv according to ASHRAE 52.2: 5.
                  4)   Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.
                  5)   Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on
                       inlet side, and hinged; with pull and retaining handles.


2.3    OUTDOOR UNITS (6 TONS OR MORE)

  A.   Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

       1.   Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with
            removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and
            mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on
            exterior of casing.
       2.   Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
            isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
            overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

            a.    Compressor Type: Scroll.
            b.    Variable-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
                  automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
            c.    Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
            d.    Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and
                  liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.

       3.   Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat.
       4.   Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
       5.   Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
       6.   Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.
       7.   Mounting Base: Polyethylene.


2.4    ACCESSORIES

  A.   Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Sections
       "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."

  B.   Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.

  C.   Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator
       fan, with the following features:
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                15700 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    JUNE 2, 2010


       1.    Compressor time delay.
       2.    24-hour time control of system stop and start.
       3.    Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
             operating mode, and fan speed.
       4.    Fan-speed selection including auto setting.

  D.   Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

  E.   Drain Hose: For condensate.

  F.   Additional Monitoring:

       1.    Monitor constant and variable motor loads.
       2.    Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation.
       3.    Monitor economizer cycle.
       4.    Monitor cooling load.
       5.    Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    INSTALLATION

  A.   Install units level and plumb.

  B.   Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices
       securely fastened to building structure.

  C.   Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified
       in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable,
       cadmium-plated fasteners.

  D.   Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum
       static deflection of 1 inch.

  E.   Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.
       Install tubing to allow access to unit.


3.2    CONNECTIONS

  A.   Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.        Drawings
       indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

  B.   Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.

  C.   Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section
       "Metal Ducts" Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and
       return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible
       duct connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                     15700 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


3.3    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
       inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
       connections.

  B.   Perform tests and inspections.

       1.   Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
            inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
            and to assist in testing.

  C.   Tests and Inspections:

       1.   Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
            retest until no leaks exist.
       2.   Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
            proper motor rotation and unit operation.
       3.   Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
            and equipment.

  D.   Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

  E.   Prepare test and inspection reports.


3.4    STARTUP SERVICE

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

       1.   Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
            instructions.


3.5    DEMONSTRATION

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
       personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.




VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM                                                  15700 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                         JUNE 2, 2010




END OF SECTION 15700




VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME HVAC SYSTEM          15700 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15720 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
       Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
       Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   Section Includes:

       1.    Heat wheels.
       2.    Packaged energy recovery units.


1.3    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
       characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

  B.   Field quality-control reports.

  C.   Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include
       in maintenance manuals.


1.4    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
       NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
       application.

  B.   ARI Compliance:

       1.    Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
             ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy
             Recovery Ventilation Equipment."
       2.    Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-
             Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."

  C.   ASHRAE Compliance:


AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                     15720 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


       1.   Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and
            Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
       2.   Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
            ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

  D.   NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed
       according to recommendations of NRCA.

  E.   UL Compliance:

       1.   Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812,
            "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery
            Ventilators."


1.5    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and
       suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
       them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition
       assemblies.

  B.   Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

  C.   Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
       penetrations with actual equipment provided.


1.6    WARRANTY

  A.   Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
       repair or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in
       materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

       1.   Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years.


1.7    EXTRA MATERIALS

  A.   Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
       protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

       1.   Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.
       2.   Fan Belts: One set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
       3.   Wheel Belts: One set(s) of belts for each heat wheel.




AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                      15720 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    HEAT WHEELS

  A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
       of the following:

       1.   Advanced Thermal Technologies.
       2.   Loren Cook Company.
       3.   SEMCO Incorporated.
       4.   Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc.

  B.   Casing:

       1.   Steel with standard factory-painted finish.
       2.   Integral purge section limiting carryover of exhaust air to between 0.05 percent
            at 1.6-inch wg and 0.20 percent at 4-inch wg differential pressure.
       3.   Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section.
       4.   Support vertical rotors on permanently lubricated bearings. Support horizontal
            rotors on tapered roller bearing.

  C.   Rotor: Polymer segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes impregnated with
       nonmigrating, water-selective, molecular-sieve desiccant coating.

       1.   Maximum Solid Size for Media to Pass: 800 micrometer.

  D.   Drive: Fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed by
       variable frequency controller and self-adjusting multilink belt around outside of rotor.

       1.   Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
            type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section
            "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
       2.   Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
            load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

  E.   Controls:
       1.   Variable frequency controller, factory or field mounted and wired, permitting input
            of field connected 4-20 mA or 1-10-V control signal.
       2.   Variable frequency controller, factory or field mounted and wired, with exhaust-air
            sensor to vary rotor speed and maintain exhaust temperature above freezing.
       3.   Pilot-Light Indicator: Display rotor rotation and speed.
       4.   Speed Settings: Adjustable settings for maximum and minimum rotor speed
            limits.

  F.   Disposable Panel Filters:

       1.   Comply with NFPA 90A.


AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                     15720 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


       2.   Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors
            on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from
            access plenum.
       3.   Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
       4.   Thickness: 2 inches.
       5.   Minimum Merv: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2.
       6.   Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive .
       7.   Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet
            side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.


2.2    PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

  A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
       of the following:

       1.   Advanced Thermal Technologies.
       2.   Greenheck Fan Corporation.
       3.   Loren Cook Company.
       4.   SEMCO Incorporated.
       5.   Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc.
       6.   Venmar CES Inc.

  B.   Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
       ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

  C.   Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and
       exterior finish, gasketed and calked weathertight, hinged access doors with
       neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1-inch-thick
       thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior drain
       connection, and lifting lugs.

       1.   Inlet: Weatherproof hood, with damper for exhaust and supply.

            a.    Exhaust: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.
            b.    Supply: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.

       2.   Roof Curb: Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and
            equipment supports.

  D.   Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.

  E.   Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with restrained, spring
       isolators and insulated flexible duct connections.

       1.   Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on
            adjustable base.
       2.   Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
            type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section
            "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                     15720 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


       3.   Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
            load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
       4.   Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
            electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
       5.   Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch static deflection.

  F.   Disposable Panel Filters:

       1.   Comply with NFPA 90A.
       2.   Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors
            on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from
            access plenum.
       3.   Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.
       4.   Thickness: 2 inches.
       5.   Minimum Merv: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2.
       6.   Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive .
       7.   Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet
            side, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

  G.   Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical
       conduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during
       installation.
       1.     Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters,
              and terminal strip.
       2.     Include fused disconnect switches.
       3.     Variable-speed controller to vary fan capacity from 100 to approximately 50
              percent.

  H.   Accessories:

       1.   Roof Curb: Galvanized steel with gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer;
            complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.
       2.   Intake weather hood with birdscreen.
       3.   Exhaust weather hood with birdscreen.
       4.   Low-Leakage, Isolation Dampers: Double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel
            dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, in
            parallel-blade arrangement with steel operating rods rotating in stainless-steel
            sleeve bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, with operating rods
            connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired.
            Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch
            wg.
       5.   Duct flanges.
       6.   Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.
       7.   Drain pans for condensate removal complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.




AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                      15720 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  JUNE 2, 2010


2.3    CONTROLS

  A.   Time Clock: Solid-state, programmable, microprocessor-based unit for mounting in
       outdoor NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with up to eight on/off cycles per day and
       battery backup protection of program settings against power failure to energize unit.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    EXAMINATION

  A.   Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
       for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

  B.   Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery
       equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet,
       moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

  C.   Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections
       before installation.

  D.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2    INSTALLATION

  A.   Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and
       rotation is away from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.

       1.    Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
             downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
       2.    Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on
             building side for bypass during startup.
       3.    Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Air Duct
             Accessories."

  B.   Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to
       The NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual - Volume 4: Construction Details
       - Low-Slope Roofing," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling
       Units and Ducts." Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on curbs and
       coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07
       Section "Roof Accessories." Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment to upper curb
       rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

  C.   Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

  D.   Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting,
       and balancing.

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                       15720 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


  E.   Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest roof drain; use ASTM D 1785,
       Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent-welded fittings, same size as condensate drain
       connection.


3.3    CONNECTIONS

  A.   Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping."
       Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

  B.   Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

  C.   Connect piping to units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

  D.   Connect cooling condensate drain pans with air seal trap at connection to drain pan
       and install cleanouts at changes in pipe direction.

  E.   Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."

  F.   Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

       1.    Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.


3.4    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
       inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
       including connections.

  B.   Perform tests and inspections.

       1.    Manufacturer's Field Service:           Engage a factory-authorized service
             representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
             including connections, and to assist in testing.

  C.   Tests and Inspections:

       1.    Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
             confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
       2.    Adjust seals and purge.
       3.    Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
             controls and equipment.
       4.    Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
       5.    Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

  D.   Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass
       tests and inspections.

  E.   Prepare test and inspection reports.
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                                       15720 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                         JUNE 2, 2010


3.5    DEMONSTRATION

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
       personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.


END OF SECTION 15720




AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT                                             15720 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15766 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1      RELATED DOCUMENTS

   A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
         Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2      SUMMARY

   A.    This Section includes cabinet unit heaters.


1.3      SUBMITTALS

   A.    Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.

   B.    Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:

         1.    Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
         2.    Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
         3.    Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
               installed and field-installed wiring.
         4.    Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
               weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

   C.    Coordination Drawings:     Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
         penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

         1.    Ceiling suspension assembly members.
         2.    Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
         3.    Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
               sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

   D.    Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
         available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

   E.    Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

   F.    Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in
         Division 1. Include the following:

         1.    Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
               filters.



CABINET UNIT HEATERS                                                                          15766 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       JUNE 2, 2010


1.4      QUALITY ASSURANCE

   A.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
         NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
         marked for intended use.


1.5      COORDINATION

   A.    Coordinate layout and installation of cabinet unit heaters and suspension system
         components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
         including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and
         partition assemblies.


1.6      EXTRA MATERIALS

   A.    Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
         packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

         1.    Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one set spare filters for each filter installed.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1      MANUFACTURERS

   A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
         following:

         1.    Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
         2.    Carrier Corp.
         3.    McQuay International.
         4.    Sterling
         5.    Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.


2.2      CABINET UNIT HEATERS

   A.    Description: An assembly including filter, chassis, coil, fan, and motor in blow-through
         configuration with heating coil.

   B.    Cabinet: For one or more of the following configurations:

         1.    Surface, ceiling mounting.

               a.    Air Inlet: Bottom grille.
               b.    Air Outlet: Front grille.

         2.    Recessed, ceiling-mounting front grilles for air inlet and outlet.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS                                                                             15766 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


   C.    Airflow: Up flow.


2.3      MATERIALS

   A.    Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges and unit-leveling bolts (where applicable).

   B.    Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with
         adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

         1.    Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum flame-
               spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50 when tested according to
               ASTM E 84.

   C.    Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels fastened with tamperproof fasteners and
         key-operated access door.

   D.    Cabinet Finish:    Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
         manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled
         and -tested cabinet unit heater before shipping.


2.4      COILS

   A.    Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer
         than 0.1 inch and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working
         pressure of 300 psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F, with manual
         air vent.


2.5      FAN

   A.    Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized
         steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to motor.


2.6      FAN MOTORS

   A.    Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral thermal-overload protection and
         resilient mounts. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.


2.7      ACCESSORIES

   A.    Plastic motor-oiler tubes extending to beneath top discharge grille.

   B.    Steel recessing flanges for recessing cabinet unit heaters into ceiling or wall.

   C.    Filters: 1-inch- thick, glass-fiber media in fiberboard frame.



CABINET UNIT HEATERS                                                                          15766 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    JUNE 2, 2010


2.8      CONTROLS

   A.    Control Devices: Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and wall-mounting thermostat.


2.9      SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Test cabinet unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

   A.    Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for
         installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

   B.    Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
         cabinet unit heater installation.

   C.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2      INSTALLATION

   A.    Install cabinet unit heaters level and plumb.

   B.    Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

   C.    Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
         hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
         Controls and Seismic Restraints."

   D.    Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
         match lighting controls.


3.3      CONNECTIONS

   A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.         Drawings
         indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

   B.    Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

   C.    Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

   D.    Ground equipment.




CABINET UNIT HEATERS                                                                            15766 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       JUNE 2, 2010


   E.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
         tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
         UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.4      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

   A.    Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:

         1.    After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
               rotation and unit operation.
         2.    Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
               electrical connections.
         3.    Test and adjust controls and safeties.

   B.    Repair or replace malfunctioning units.        Retest as specified above after repairs or
         replacements are made.


3.5      CLEANING

   A.    After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
         other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

   B.    After installing units, clean cabinet unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's
         written instructions.

   C.    Install new filters in each cabinet unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion.


3.6      DEMONSTRATION

   A.    Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
         to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters.

         1.    Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
               stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
         2.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
               Procedures."
         3.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
               Maintenance Data."
         4.    Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
               notice.




CABINET UNIT HEATERS                                                                            15766 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              JUNE 2, 2010




END OF SECTION 15766




CABINET UNIT HEATERS                  15766 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.         Aurora CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15767 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1     RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.    Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
        Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2     SUMMARY

  A.    This Section includes propeller unit heaters.


1.3     SUBMITTALS

  A.    Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.

  B.    Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:

        1.    Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
        2.    Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
        3.    Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
              installed and field-installed wiring.
        4.    Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
              weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

  C.    Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

  D.    Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified
        in Division 1. Include the following:

        1.    Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
              filters.


1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.    Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
        NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
        marked for intended use.


1.5     COORDINATION

  A.    Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system
        components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS                                                                       15767 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              JUNE 2, 2010


        including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and
        partition assemblies.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1     MANUFACTURERS

  A.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
        following:

        1.    Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
        2.    Carrier Corp.
        3.    McQuay International.
        4.    Sterling
        5.    Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.


2.2     UNIT HEATERS

  A.    Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge
        configuration with vertical, adjustable louvers in blow-through configuration.


2.3     MATERIALS

  A.    Casing: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.

  B.    Cabinet Finish:    Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and
        manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit
        heater before shipping.


2.4     COILS

  A.    Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch wall thickness, with mechanically bonded
        aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of
        200 psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 325 deg F, with manual air vent.
        Test for leaks to 375 psig underwater.


2.5     FAN

  A.    Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor.


2.6     FAN MOTORS

  A.    Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller:    Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
        thermal-overload protection.
PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS                                                                 15767 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


  B.    Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings.


2.7     ACCESSORIES

  A.    Vertical Configuration: Louver fin diffuser.


2.8     CONTROLS

  A.    Control Devices: Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and wall-mounting thermostat.


2.9     SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

  A.    Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1     EXAMINATION

  A.    Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for
        installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

  B.    Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
        propeller unit heater installation.

  C.    Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2     INSTALLATION

  A.    Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

  B.    Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

  C.    Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators
        (rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
        Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."

  D.    Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
        match lighting controls.


3.3     CONNECTIONS

  A.    Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.         Drawings
        indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS                                                                      15767 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


  B.    Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange on each connection.

  C.    Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

  D.    Ground equipment.

  E.    Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
        tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
        UL 486A and UL 486B.


3.4     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.    Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:

        1.    After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
              rotation and unit operation.
        2.    Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
              electrical connections.
        3.    Test and adjust controls and safeties.

  B.    Repair or replace malfunctioning units.        Retest as specified above after repairs or
        replacements are made.


3.5     CLEANING

  A.    After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
        other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

  B.    After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's
        written instructions.


3.6     DEMONSTRATION

  A.    Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
        to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters.

        1.    Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
              stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
        2.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
              Procedures."
        3.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
              Maintenance Data."
        4.    Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
              notice.


END OF SECTION 15767

PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS                                                                         15767 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       JUNE 2, 2010




SECTION 15860 – AIR TERMINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    RELATED

       "General Requirements", Division 1 and Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods Spec Section
       15050 of the Project Manual pertain to and are hereby made part of the work of the Spec
       Section.

1.2    DESCRIPTION OF WORK

       A.      Work of this section generally includes provisions of fans, ductwork, flues, air outlets and
               inlets, terminal boxes, equipment and accessories related to air distribution systems.

       B.      Types of Air Distribution Systems specified in this section include the following:

               1.     Ceiling and Inline Cabinet Exhaust Fans
               2.     Roof Exhaust Fans
               3.     Vehicle Fume Extraction SystemProvided by owner under separate contract

1.3    QUALITY ASSURANCE

       A.      General:

               1.     Performance Rating: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating
                      Seal.
               2.     Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.

       B.      Reference Standards:

               1.     AMCA 99          Standards Handbook.
               2.     AMCA 210         Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
               3.     AMCA 300         Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
               4.     AMCA 301         Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
                                       Data.
               5.     SMACNA           Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.

1.4    SUBMITTALS
       A.   Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300 and Section
            15010.

       B.      Provide product data on centrifugal fans and accessories as required for the work.

       C.      Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.

       D.      Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.

1.5    OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

AIR TERMINALS                                                                                   15860 - 1
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        JUNE 2, 2010


       A.      Submit operation and maintenance data per Section 01350 and 01700.

       B.      Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and
               wiring diagram.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA

       A.      Fans used shall not decrease in motor size, increase noise level, or increase tip speed by
               more than 10% or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20% for specified criteria. Fans
               shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of 10%.
       B.      All gas fired equipment shall be AGA approved for use with natural gas on indoor and/or
               outdoor equipment.
       C.      Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to
               occupied areas.
       D.      See Equipment Schedule on the drawings for capacities to specified units.


2.2      CEILING OR IN-LINE EXHAUST FAN

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: Penn Co. (Zephyr Model), Cook Co., Carnes, Greenheck,
               Powerline, Acme, Jenn Air, Cook, or approved equal.

       B.      Type: The ceiling exhaust fans shall be of the centrifugal fan, integral grille and housing
               type, with solid state variable speed controller, all completely self-contained.

       C.      Capacity: The capacity and model number of the units shall be as shown on drawings,
               and shall be certified by AMCA.

       D.      Fan: The fan shall be of the true centrifugal wheel design.

       E.      The Housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel, completely insulated internally
               with acoustical insulation material to deaden sound.

       F.      Each Fan to be equipped with a backdraft damper, inlet grille, discharge duct, roof, wall,
               or eave cap as indicated, and shall be UL approved.


2.3    SIDEWALL PROPELLER EXHAUST FANS

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: Greenheck, Acme Co., Cook, or approved equal.

       B.      Description: Belt-driven propeller fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring,
               motor, drive assembly, and accessories.

       C.      Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-
               enamel finish coat applied after assembly.



AIR TERMINALS                                                                                    15860 - 2
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    JUNE 2, 2010


       D.      Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum
               hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

       E.      Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, statically and dynamically
               balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor
               horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

               1.     Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4.

               2.     Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

               3.     Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
                      bearings.

               4.     Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

               5.     Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for
                      use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
                      adjustment range at fan design conditions.

               6.     Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
                      drives.

               7.     Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.

       F.      Accessories:

               1.     Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with
                      nylon bearings.

               2.     Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications,
                      removable for maintenance.

               3.     Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.

               4.     Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted
                      inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.4    VEHICLE FUME EXTRACTION EXHAUST SYSTEMPROVICED BY OWNER UNDER
                                              SEPARATE CONTRACT

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: PlymoVent Inc.

       The system specified herein shall be the base bid system. This system shall serve as the basis     Formatted: Indent: Hanging: 0.5"
              of design. Bid alternate manufacturers shall clearly identify deviations from this
              specification and include the description of the deviations in their bid.

       B.      Bid Alternate: Nederman Inc., or prior approved equal.

       C.      The complete auto-disconnect emergency response vehicle fume extractor system shall
               be furnished and installed in strict conformance with manufacturers requirements by the
AIR TERMINALS                                                                                15860 - 3
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                        Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        JUNE 2, 2010


               manufacturer or the manufacturer’s local representative. Contractors desiring pre-
               approval shall submit their qualifications to the Architect no later than fourteen days prior
               to bid. The information shall include years of operation for the business, and a list of at
               least three projects of the magnitude of this building with installations of the auto-
               disconnect emergency response vehicle fume extraction system within the past five
               years.

       D.      The emergency response vehicle fume extraction system shall be furnished complete
               with a rail, track, trolley, balancer, regulator assembly, upper vertical section hose, end
               stop, lower vertical hose, nozzle, and all controls for the system as indicated and detailed
               on the drawings. The system shall be complete in all respects and include all incidental
               items required for the complete system to be fully functional and operational.

       E.      Sliding Track: The sliding track shall be a one-piece continuous extruded aluminum track        Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Hanging: 0.5", No
               in a minimum length of 19 feet. The construction profile shall be of a Boxloc type profile,     bullets or numbering, No widow/orphan control, Tab
                                                                                                               stops: Not at -1"
               which shall adhere to the following dimensions. Track height 3 1/8”, width 1 ½”, thickness
               1/8”. The track material shall be aircraft aluminum alloy type AA-6063. The aluminum
               track shall be an extruded design that shall incorporate three separate and functioning
               channels. The three channels shall be as follows, the mounting channel, the trolley
               channel and the Boxloc channel. Each of these sections performs a specific function to
               make the system work effectively. The mounting compartment shall be designed to
               accept the slider bars (which shall be provided with factory supplied vertical support legs
               and riser clamp duct connection) and to allow positioning along the full length of the
               slotted track-mounting channel. The mounting channel shall also accommodate the
               compressed airlines for the purposes of safe storage and appearance. The trolley
               channel shall allow the trolley/balancer/ hose assembly to glide to the door threshold in a
               safe and effective manner. The Boxloc channel shall allow the whole track to remain
               rigid as it hangs from factory supplied leg supports and also shall provide an area to
               attach bolts for splicing additional tracks together for systems over 19 feet long. The
               overall extruded track lengths shall be 19 foot standard and shall weigh no more than 35
               lbs. The track system shall be equipped with end stops that limit travel of flex hose as the
               vehicle exits the building. The end stop shall be fabricated of zinc plated steel in a U
               shape form with a rubber end stop on the impact end. It shall be attached by using a ¼”
               molded locking bolt. The end stop shall be secured to the track with no less than (2) ¼”
               bolts and locking nuts located on the underside of the track. For security, a ¼” bolt shall
               be drilled through the ends of each track system to ensure that the trolley/balancer
               assembly(s) rolls no further than the end of the track system.

       F.      Support Legs: Support leg and mounting feet shall be manufactured and provided by the
               supplier of primary exhaust removal system (Equipment Manufacturer). This is to ensure
               that the unit is installed as a complete system including the mounting hardware. The
               support leg material shall be aircraft aluminum alloy type AA-6063.

       G.      Supports shall come standard in 19 feet lengths. A minimum of one support with
               appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 linear feet of track profile. The support
               legs shall consist of a square tubular profile with dimensions no less than 2" OD X 0.1”
               with 10mm fastening hardware provided. The vertical adjustable mounting foot shall be
               capable of attaching the leg assembly to a ceiling with a 30 degree pitch, complete with a
               slider bar and 3/8" hardware necessary for mounting the horizontal track to the mounting
               channel system. The horizontal adjustable mounting foot shall be capable of attaching
               the leg assembly to a wall, complete with a slider bar and 3/8" hardware necessary for
AIR TERMINALS                                                                                    15860 - 4
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       JUNE 2, 2010


               mounting the horizontal track to the mounting

       H.      Riser Clamp Assembly: The riser clamp shall be fabricated as a one piece welded
               assembly and manufactured to create the transfer of the hard spiral pipe joined at the top
               and flexible duct connection at the bottom. The riser clamp shall be pre-drilled to mount
               an air regulator assembly for the pneumatic nozzle and to accept airlines that pass
               through airtight seals mounted to riser pipe. A slider bar and associated hardware shall
               be provided with riser clamp assembly. Sizes of the riser clamp will range from 3" - 5 "
               diameter to match the output velocity of the vehicles that will park in that station.

       I.      Accutrack Trolley / Balancer Assembly: The trolley assembly shall be manufactured as a
               two piece galvanized steel assembly including bumper stops at each end. Fixed to the
               side of the trolley are solid steel pins, which shall be for load carrying bearings that are
               sealed and permanently lubricated. The load carrying bearings shall travel internally in
               track trolley channel. Two additional permanently lubricated trolley wheels shall be
               provided on bottom side of the track to reduce wobble of trolley as it conveys the hose
               assembly to the door threshold. A release plate shall be attached to the chassis of the
               trolley to smoothly energize the uncoupling release valve when the trolley-balancer
               assembly approaches the door threshold. The system balancer assembly shall be a self-
               adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a lifting capacity of no less than 31 Lb. The
               balancer shall have a minimum diameter stainless steel cable of .080 and a safety link
               connection. The system supplier shall manufacture the balancer and trolley for the sole
               purpose of conveying the flexible hose to the door threshold for automatic release of the
               system. Only a stainless steel balancer cable will be accepted.

       J.      Regulator Assembly: The regulator shall safely operate with an input pressure of 0 - 200
               psi; the output pressure shall be preset at 15 psi. The regulator shall be attached to each
               Riser Clamp Assembly/Hose Drop or to the Boxloc track to allow for independent
               adjustment of each pneumatic nozzle. The regulator shall also be provided with needle
               type adjustment gauge that is clearly marked with the proper operating range of the
               system and the gauge shall be visibly read from standing on the bay floor.

       K.      Uncoupling Valve Assembly: Shall be provided to activate the release of the pneumatic
               nozzle connection located on vehicle’s exhaust pipe. The valve shall be single direction
               action and affixed to a mounting bracket, which can be easily positioned and adjusted
               along the full length of the extruded aluminum track profile. The mounting bracket shall
               be formed from a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel and designed to fit snugly over
               the top of the Boxloc track system. A ¼ " opening shall be centered to the top side of
               bracket to accommodate a ¼” x 1" bolt with a ¼ " plated 1½" long bar providing the
               secure attachment of the Uncoupling Valve. When the system is put into service the
               release valve shall be set for the maximum exiting speed of the vehicle.

       L.      Upper Flexible Hose: Hose shall be flexible exhaust hose manufactured for the sole
               purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases, which are produced by internal
               combustion engines. The flexible hose shall be designed strictly for the harsh
               environment of rapid response and auto-release of a vehicle exhaust tailpipe. Hose shall
               range from 3” - 5 " diameters with varying lengths depending on the system length
               required ranging from 20 - 43 feet without joining or splicing connections. Hose material
               shall be high temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high temperature
               laminated fabric with a minimum overlapping thickness of 2 7/16". This construction of
               hose must be capable of operating at continuous temperatures of 400 degrees F and
AIR TERMINALS                                                                                   15860 - 5
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


               intermittent temperatures of 500 degrees F such as are experienced when pump checks
               are performed inside the station. Independent testing by a recognized UL laboratory must
               accompany this bid as proof of performance claim. Wire Helix shall be bound and
               protected in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion, which
               eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with an exposed hot metal helix.
                The hose shall further protect the internal wire helix from heat buildup and in turn add
               increased visibility to personnel. Wear strip shall be 9/16” wide and be provided as a
               safety yellow color. The bend radius of the high temperature hose shall be no less than
               1.5 times the diameter of hose to ensure that hot gases are not restricted as they pass
               through the system.

       M.      Lower Hose Assembly: Shall be a rigid 3”-5" diameter by 2 foot long section of yellow and
               black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose assembly. Lower hose shall
               support the pneumatic connection nozzle and chrome reducing elbow in a rigid fashion to
               allow for the operator to place hose collection nozzle onto the tailpipe without bending
               over. Lower hose is the only section of hose which shall disconnect from the upper hose
               assembly and act as a safety disconnect in the unlikely event the nozzle gets entangled.

       N.      Safety Disconnect Coupling: A (4) part segmented coupling with removable wear strips to
               protect the vehicle and disconnect from wear shall be incorporated in the design of the
               system. This coupling enables the lower two foot hose assembly to physically separate
               from the upper hose assembly thus reducing the possible chance of damage to system in
               the unlikely event the exhaust connection nozzle assembly may become entangled in the
               undercarriage of the vehicle. This device shall consist of two spun aluminum collars
               connected by a reusable-segmented coupling band. The release tension of this device
               shall be preset at 130 Lb. and adjustable from 20 Lb. to 206 Lb. of separating force to
               accommodate varying exit speeds of vehicles. This coupling shall be reusable. This is
               considered a safety requirement and any system bid must incorporate a safety
               disconnect. No Exceptions.

       O.      Collection Nozzle Assembly: The nozzle shall provide a substantially air tight seal around
               exhaust tail pipe when connected thus allowing for 100% source capture. The seal shall
               not allow for escape of life threatening exhaust gases, which may be present during the
               following conditions:

       1.      In the event vehicle's engine is accelerated above normal idle resulting in an exhaust
               velocity greater than 5000 feet per minute.
       2.      In the event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds the manufacturers
               normal capture velocity or CFM of exhaust system.
                                                                                                            Formatted: Indent: Hanging: 0.5", No widow/orphan
       The Nozzle shall automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tailpipe ranging from one   control, Tab stops: Not at -1" + 1.75"
             inch through six-inch diameter. If required the bidder of the nozzle shall offer both          Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Hanging: 0.5", No
             maximum diameter nozzles ranging from 4.75" diameter to 8.25" diameter. The nozzle             widow/orphan control, Tab stops: Not at -1" + 1.75"
             pressure shall not exceed 15 psi. when connected to the vehicle’s tailpipe. Nozzle
             construction shall be high temperature synthetic rubber vulcanized to a high temperature
             synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided for the primary temperature
             source at the tailpipe to act as a friction barrier. The chrome-reducing elbow that
             connects to the connection nozzle shall be fabricated using continuous welded
             construction. This important feature eliminates the escape of any potentially lethal
             exhaust gases and must provide for a smooth air flow transition from connection nozzle
             into the high temperature flexible hose. The angle of transition shall be no less than or
AIR TERMINALS                                                                                  15860 - 6
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        JUNE 2, 2010


               greater than 67 degrees from the centerline of the reducer. The chrome-reducer shall
               incorporate a primary expanded metal debris screen, which is permanently affixed by
               welded seams to the inside opening of exhaust fitting. Since this item is a point of safety
               for both personnel and the system itself, no exception will be allowed.

       P.      Manual Fill Valve: A manual connection fill valve shall be located 1 foot above safety
               release coupling approximately 4 feet from floor and shall be of a sliding/push button type
               for manual or automatic release. In its design this valve shall incorporate in its design a
               handle which the operator may easily operate in a standing position. The attachment of
               the collection nozzle shall not position the operator's breathing zone closer than 36" from
               the exhaust tailpipe. The automatic release of the connection valve shall be no greater
               than 3 psi. shift pressure to activate the automatic nozzle deflation. The primary air
               supply shall be accomplished by means of a compression type fitting. The regulated air
               supply line to collection nozzle shall be designed to safely release from the upper hose at
               a pressure no greater than 80 lbs. Since this is a safety item no exception will be allowed.

       Q.      Compressed Air Features: Airlines shall be ¼” (6mm) OD tubing capable of exposure of
               high temperature air stream inside the ventilation hose and duct. The airlines shall be fed
               through the exterior of the hose through Teflon and brass grommets. The airlines shall be
               fed through the exterior of the duct through high temperature rubber grommets to protect
               against abrasion. Unless a fire station air compressor is to be utilized the bidder shall
               provide a quiet operating compressor to be located proximate to the vehicle bays. It shall
               also be located so that preventative maintenance can be performed quickly and
               effectively. The operation of the compressor running inside station shall not generate
               sound decibels in excess of 25 dB. The compressor shall be equipped with a filter/dryer
               to ensure the conveyance of clean dry air to the pneumatic controls incorporated in the
               auto-release ventilation system.

       R.      Hose Saddle: A hose suspension saddle shall be fabricated of a rubber molded cushion
               specifically manufactured for the sole purpose of suspending high temperature exhaust
               ventilation hose in a rapid response and auto-release application. The design of the
               saddle shall smoothly transition the direction of the hose during its travel along the track.
               Securing clamps shall be provided including a link fastener, for the purpose of mounting it
               to the balancer safety link.

       S.      Vehicle Tailpipe Modification: The bidder shall supply a drawing for the precise
               modification procedure for the vehicles to attach to the exhaust removal system. The
               modification shall vent the exhaust gases at a 90-degree angle on the passenger side of
               the vehicle. Tailpipe modifications requiring a 45-degree angle of exhaust venting shall
               not be acceptable, in order to prevent exhaust blowback into the station after the auto-
               release system disengages from the tailpipe. A flange shall be provided and installed by
               the bidder as a precisely located stopping point for the collection nozzle. The
               manufacturer’s supplied adapter shall securely attach to the vehicle tailpipe. The flange
               shall be fabricated from 14 gauge-zinc-plated steel. The attachment to the tailpipe shall
               be made by a U bolt for ease of adjustment.

       T.      Controls: The control assembly shall be furnished complete to the installer for installation
               and                    wiring. The controls shall be wired in conformance with the
               manufacturer’s requirements to                provide a complete workable system to
               function per the manufacturer’s requirements.

AIR TERMINALS                                                                                    15860 - 7
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        JUNE 2, 2010


       1.      The auto-start control system shall be provided consisting of a pressure sensor(s),             Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5"
               temperature sensor(s) and control panel.
       2.      The control panel shall have functions for manual and automatic start/stop of the exhaust
               fan. The control panel shall energize the exhaust fan upon a signal from any one of the
               pressure and/or temperature sensors.
       3.      The pressure sensor shall react to increasing pressure (positive pressure) in the system
               upon the start-up of the vehicle/apparatus. The pressure sensor shall be adjustable to fit
               all engine sizes.
       4.      The temperature sensor shall react to increasing temperature in the system when the
               vehicle/apparatus is running. The temperature sensor shall be adjustable to fit all engine
               sizes.
       5.      The control panel shall have a 7-second to 6-minute timer that allows the exhaust fan to
               run for a pre-determined time by the Fire Department personnel. The exhaust fan run
               time shall be easily adjustable. The control panel shall activate the exhaust fan through a
               motor starter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    INSPECTION

       Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed with
       work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.

3.2    INSTALLATION

       A.      General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's
               installation instructions.

       B.      Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other
               work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no
               case less than that recommended by manufacturer.

       C.      Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 15
               ductwork sections.

       D.      Install roof curb in accordance with details on drawings and as specified in Division 7.

       E.      Installation and connection of gas-fired heaters and associated fuel and vent features
               and systems installed and connected in accordance with NFPA 54, applicable local
               codes and regulations, and manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

               1.     Connect gas piping in accordance with Division 15 Section "Natural Gas
                     Systems".
               2.     Connect vents in accordance with Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys
                     and Stacks".

3.3    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

       A.      Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air
               terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.

AIR TERMINALS                                                                                    15860 - 8
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010


       B.      Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and
               retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.4    IDENTIFICATION

       Identify heaters and connections in accordance with Division 15 Section "Mechanical
       Identification".

3.5    COMMISSIONING

       A.      Test functions, operations, and control sequences and protective features. Adjust to
               assure operation is in accordance with design.

       B.      Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
               requirements are met.

       C.      Startup Services: Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup
               services.

3.6    CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

       A.      Cleaning: Upon completion of installation, inspect equipment and associated
               components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up
               scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods
               and materials recommended by manufacturer. Replace filters used during construction.

       B.      Adjusting: Make unit adjustments for optimum performance and efficiency. Adjust
               distribution features, including louvers, vanes, shutters, dampers, and reflectors, to
               provide optimum distribution for objects, personnel, and spaces served.

3.7    DEMONSTRATION

       A.      Engage a factory authorized service representative train Owner’s maintenance personnel
               as specified below:

               1.     Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
                      startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
               2.     Review data in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.




END OF SECTION 15860




AIR TERMINALS                                                                                  15860 - 9
Scanlon SzynksieSzynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                         JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15880 – AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    RELATED

       "General Requirements", Division 1 and Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods Spec Section
       15050 of the Project Manual pertain to and are hereby made part of the work of the Spec
       Section.

1.2    DESCRIPTION OF WORK

       A.      Work of this section generally includes provisions of fans, ductwork, flues, air outlets and
               inlets, terminal boxes, equipment and accessories related to air distribution systems.

       B.      Types of Air Distribution Systems specified in this section include the following:

               1.      Sheet Metal and Accessories
               2.      Kitchen Ducts
               3.      Duct liner Insulation
               4.      Round Flexible Ductwork
               5.      Registers, Grilles and Diffusers


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    SHEET METAL WORK AND ACCESSORIES

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: Ruskin, Dowco, Louvers and Dampers, Tuttle and Bailey,
               Titus, United McGill, Air Balance, Prefco, or prior approved equal.

       B.      Access Door Hardware: Ventlok Series 100 latches, hinges, and gasketing to be used on
               doors less than 4 sq.ft. in area, Series 200 on larger doors.

       C.      Metal and Gauge: Unless specified otherwise, ASTM A 527, galvanized iron shall be
               used throughout. It shall be made from the best grade of mild steel sheets of the U.S.
               Standard Gauge as recommended in the latest edition of ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA
               manual. The minimum allowable sheet metal gauge shall be 26-gauge.

       D.      Rectangular Duct Fabrication: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts
               with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction
               Standards”. Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their associated details. Conform to the
               requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and
               intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. Fabricate rectangular ducts in
               lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification.
                Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks,
               roller marks, stains, and discolorations.

               1.      Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct
                       systems to the following pressure classifications:
AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                                  15880 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                     Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010



                       Supply Ducts: 2 inches water gage, SMACNA seal class A.
                       Return Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure.
                       Exhaust Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure.
                       Vehicle Exhaust Ducts: 10 inches water gage, negative pressure, SMACNA seal
                       class A.

               2.      Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak of bead duct sides that are 19
                       inches and larger and are 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced
                       panel area, as indicated in SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standard”, Figure
                       1-4, unless they are lines that are externally insulated.

       E.      Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and
               other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standard”
               1985 Edition.

       F.      Round Duct Fabrication: General: “Basic Round Diameter” as used in this article is the
               diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a
               given size of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat
               oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts
               with spiral lockseam construction, except where diameters exceed 72 inches. Fabricate
               ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal butt-welded seams.
               Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”, Table 3-2 for galvanized
               steel gages.

       G.      Round Supply and Exhaust Fittings Fabrication: 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and
               Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”,
               1985 Edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal
               seam straight duct. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch
               taps with no excess material projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance. Elbows:
               Fabricate in die-formed, gore, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius
               of the die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless
               elbow construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:

               1.      Mitered Elbows: Fabricate mitered elbows with welded construction in gages
                       specified below.
                       a.      Mitered Elbows Radius and Number of Pieces: Unless otherwise
                               indicated, construct elbow to comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct
                               Construction Standards”, Table 3-1.

                       b.      Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed
                               below for pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 2 inches:

                               (1)    3 to 26 inches: 24 gage.
                               (2)    27 to 36 inches: 22 gage.

                       c.      Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed
                               below for pressure classes from 2 inches to 10 inches.

                               (1)    3 to 14 inches: 24 gage.
                               (2)    15 to 26 inches: 22 gage.
AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                               15880 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010



               2.      Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree
                       elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
                       nonstandard bend angle configurations or ½-inch diameter (e.g. 3 ½ and 4 ½ inch
                       elbows with gored construction).
               3.      Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60,
                       and 90 degrees, except where space restrictions requires mitered elbow.
                       Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or ½ inch diameter (e.g. 9 ½
                       and 10 ½ inch) elbows with gored construction.
               4.      Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows: Gored elbows,
                       except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
               5.      Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 20 gage with
                       2-piece welded construction.
               6.      Round Gored Elbows Gages: Same as for non-elbow fittings specified above.
               7.      Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26
                       gage.

       H.      Rigid round ducts may be spiral lock seam conduit, as manufactured by Semco. Gauges
               shall be as recommended in the ASHRAE Guide or SMACNA manual.

       I.      Duct Turns: All 90 degree elbows up to 18" wide and 45 degree elbows shall consist of
               an inside radius of not less than ½ width of the duct or shall be furnished with single
               blade duct vanes with 2-1/2" blade spacing. 90 degree elbows larger than 18" shall be
               equipped with air foil type duct vanes having an inside radius of 1-1/2" and an outside
               radius of 2-1/2" and shall consist of Tuttle and Bailey Type D, Elgen Manufacturing Corp.,
               Vane Runners, or equal. Shop fabricated duct vanes shall conform to details of the
               Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's Manual.

       J.      Air Extractors: At each branch duct connection in supply ducts where noted and at each
               supply register, provide a "Vectrol" air extractor manufactured by Tuttle and Bailey,
               Semco, Titus Co., or equal by Millaire Units to be adjustable for diverting the supply air
               from the main duct into the branch duct with a manual adjusting lever which shall be
               accessible for system balancing. Provide access panels in ceilings and ducts where
               required.

       K.      Flexible Connections: Provide sound isolating flexible connections on the inlet and outlet
               of each fan and unit to which duct connections are made. Flexible connections in
               ordinary ventilating and air conditioning systems shall be made from ventfab, fire, water
               and weather resistant fabric. Connections in heating installations, and for those exposed
               to the weather shall be made from Ventglass, neoprene coated glass fabric.




AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                               15880 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


       L.      Dampers: Provide opposed blade type volume dampers where shown on drawings or
               otherwise necessary for proper balancing. Dampers to have felt or Neoprene edges,
               gasketed around inside of frame for tight fit. Dampers in ducts shall be a length equal to
               1-1/2 times the duct dimensions they are to close against.

       M.      Spin-In Fittings with Volume Dampers: Provide galvanized iron spin-in fittings with blade
               type volume dampers on all low pressure round duct connections to rectangular low
               pressure main duct, or where shown on the drawings, or otherwise necessary for proper
               balancing.

       N.      Duct Hardware for Surface Mounted Manual Dampers: Equip dampers with a length of
               12" or less with Ventlok No. 620, 1/4" dial regulators, with shaft lengths of 12" to 20",
               Ventlok No. 635, 3/8" dial regulators and No. 607 or No. 6411 3/8 or ½" size with No. 607
               end bearings.

       O.      Flues and Combustion Air Intakes: Provide Type I PVC, Schedule 40 for use in venting
               systems associated with Category IV appliances in accordance with ANSIZ21.47.
               Provide RTV sealant at flue/intake pipe connection to furnace. Provide all required tees,
               caps, increasers, elbows, flashings and collars to provide complete system.

       P.      Dryer Vent: Contractor shall furnish and install dryer vents for all dryers. Dryer vents
               shall be 26-gage steel sheet metal. Sizes as required and/or as shown on plans.
               Provide roof cap. Sheet metal screws shall not be used to attach joint and/or fittings.

       Q.      Louvers: Provide where shown on the drawings, 4" thick storm louvers with .100" wall
               thickness aluminum frames and .081" wall thickness aluminum fixed drainable blade
               louvers spaced on 3" centers and sloped at a 37-1/2 degree angle. Louvers shall have
               offset in blade for moisture elimination. Each louver shall be provided with a 1/4" mesh
               galvanized bird screen on the inside of the louver. Finish shall be a Kynar finish with a
               custom color. Coordinate with Architect prior to ordering. Acceptable manufacturers:
               Greenheck, Louvers & Dampers, and Ruskin.

       R.      Vehicle Exhaust Duct: Provide G-90 galvanized sheet metal, ASTM-A525 and –A527, in
               accordance with SMACNA Class 11 product conveying. It must meet or exceed criteria
               for construction and performance for Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards,
               SMACNA. Ducts 7” diameter and under shall be 24-gauge minimum and 8” diameter and
               above shall be 20-gauge minimum. Ducts shall be round spiral pipe constructed in
               accordance with an 8” w.g. (positive and negative) minimum operating pressure. Fittings
               shall be round and have a wall thickness 2 gauges heavier than the downstream section
               of duct. Converging duct branch fittings shall be 45-degree fittings. All seams, fittings
               and elbows shall be continuous stitch welded and internally sealed where necessary to
               insure air tightness.

2.2    KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCTS

       General: Fabricate kitchen exhaust ducts and supports, used for smoke and vapor removal from
       cooking equipment, of 16-gauge minimum galvanized steel where concealed, and of 18-gauge
       minimum stainless steel where exposed. For duct construction, comply with SMACNA "HVAC
       Duct Construction Standards", and NFPA 96 "Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors
       from Commercial Cooking Equipment." Provide cleanouts on all elbows of exhaust ducts.

AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                               15880 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                       BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                            JUNE 2, 2010


2.3    DUCT LINER - INSULATION

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Knauf, Certainteed, or
               approved equal.

       B.      The following ducts shall be insulated (lined) as specified below:

               All low pressure rectangular supply and return ducts on entire runs (as indicated on
               drawings).
               Exhaust air ducts where indicated on the drawings.

       C.      Duct Liner:

               1.      Square and Rectangular Ducts: 1" thick fiberglass, bonded with a thermosetting
                       resin and laced with a black mat, 2 lb. per cu.ft. density with "K" value at 75
                       degree maximum of 0.24. Increase sheet metal dimensions by 2 inches from
                       duct sizes shown on drawings.

       D.      All ducts exposed to ambient conditions shall have joints sealed absolutely weather tight
               with flanges and G.E. silicone sealer.

2.4    ROUND FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: Genflex, Thermaflex Co., Hart & Cooley, Flexmaster, Owens
               Corning, or approved equal.

       B.      Low Pressure Flexible Duct System: Genflex Model SFR-30A insulated factory fabricated
               assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel helix, wrapped with a nominal 1" thick 1
               lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass insulation, with the assembly sheathed in a vapor barrier
               jacket. The inner liner shall be of continuous non-perforated aluminum copolymer
               forming a positive inner air seal such that if the outer vapor barrier is punctured no air will
               be lost. The composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier shall meet the
               Class I requirements of NFPA Bulletin No. 90A, and be labeled by Underwriter's
               Laboratories, Inc., with a flame spread rated of 25 or less, and a smoke developed rating
               of 50 or under.

       C.      Include coupling as an integral part of one end, factory installed for quick connection to
               an air outlet device. Additional tap-ins, straps, tape and/or connectors as required.

2.5    REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: Titus, Kruger, Price, or approved equal.

       B.      Capacity: All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

       C.      Steel outlets to be supplied with off white enamel finish unless specified otherwise,
               aluminum outlets shall remain unpainted.

       D.      All steel grilles, registers, diffusers, etc., to be installed on white ceilings shall be finished
               with white baked enamel finish.

AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                                      15880 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                         JUNE 2, 2010


       E.      All duct interiors visible through registers, grilles, diffusers, etc., shall be painted flat
               black.

       F.      Suspended Grid Ceilings: Diffusers in suspended grid ceiling areas shall be same as
               above except steel mounting panel for integration with grid ceiling, finish to be white
               enamel. Volume damper to be included for each diffuser, where indicated.

       G.      Dampers: Provide dampers in diffusers and registers where called for in the schedule on
               the drawings. Dampers shall be volume control damper of the multi-blade type. The
               damper operator shall be equipped with a spring type lock nut which may be adjusted to
               the required friction to prevent readjustment of unauthorized persons and to prevent
               closing of the damper when in the partially open position because of static pressure.

       H.      Distributing Grid: Each ceiling diffuser shall be equipped with a distributing grid especially
               constructed to insure that the supply air is distributed uniformly in the neck of the diffuser.
                The grid shall be constructed of a series of adjustable bars set in a frame which is
               attached to the duct collar. Coordinate with Balance Contractor for adjustments of
               distribution grids.

       I.      Mounting: This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate the location of the diffuser, ceiling lights,
               and any other ceiling outlets to avoid possible conflicts.

2.6    FILTERS-THROW AWAY TYPE

       A.      Approved Manufacturers: American Air Filter, Cambridge, Farr, Flanders.

       B.      Description: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type, replaceable air filters with
               holding frames in sizes and having performance characteristics as indicated. Utilize for
               rooftop HVAC units (Section 15670 only).

       C.      Media: Throwaway media of interlaced glass fibers, sprayed with nonflammable
               adhesive.

       D.      Frame: 20-gage minimum galvanized steel with expanded metal grid on outlet side and
               steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged with pull and retaining handles.

       E.      Duct Holding Frames: 20-gage galvanized steel capable of holding media and media
               frame in place, with gaskets to prevent unfiltered air bypass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    SHEET METAL WORK AND ACCESSORIES

       A.      Install all sheet metal duct systems, connections, splitters, dampers, duct turns, housings,
               hinged sheet metal doors and necessary removable access doors for the complete
               supply, return and exhaust systems in accordance with SMACNA manual. Access doors
               shall be provided in ductwork wherever required for observation and maintenance of all
               motorized dampers.

       B.      Duct Workmanship: All ductwork and accessories shall be constructed and erected in a
               workmanlike manner. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly
AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                                   15880 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                     BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                          JUNE 2, 2010


               finished joints, air-tight, and shall be free from vibration under all conditions of operation.
               The internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of air flow. The ducts shall
               be securely attached to the building construction in an approved manner. Changes in
               dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual. All duct sizes fall within the limiting
               dimensions indicated on the drawings unless otherwise approved. Curved elbows shall
               have a center line radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct.

       C.      Ductwork Sealing: All low pressure ductwork systems, including supply, return, exhaust
               and outside air duct systems, to inlet or outlet shall be installed and sealed as required in
               accordance with SMACNA manual to withstand pressure indicated above on entire
               ductwork systems. Taping of joints will not be allowed. Ducts shall be sealed in
               accordance with SMACNA Seal Class A.

       D.      Ductwork Testing:

               1.      All vehicle exhaust ductwork shall be tested in accordance with SMACNA Manual.
                        Raise duct pressure to 10" w.g. and let stand. Check for audible leaks at 10"
                       w.g. Ductwork shall withstand 10" w.g. Leakage shall not exceed 1% of total air
                       volume. All visual and audible leaks shall be sealed air tight.

               2.      All low pressure ductwork shall be tested to withstand 2.0" w.g. Leakage shall not
                       exceed 1% of total air volume. All visual and audible leaks shall be air tight.

               3.      Testing of ductwork system shall be accomplished prior to installation of
                       insulation. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer and approved.
                       Owner/Engineer reserves the right to have insulation removed if there appears to
                       be unsatisfactory leakage in the system.

       E.      Flexible Connections: Install sound isolating flexible connections on the inlet and outlet
               of each fan and unit to which duct connectors are made. At least one inch slack shall be
               allowed in these connections to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fan to
               ductwork. The fabric shall either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar
               frames at each end to prevent air leakage.

       F.      Joints and openings in ducts and around equipment with excessive leakage shall be
               caulked air tight. All ducts run on roof shall have all joints caulked with G.E. Silicone
               sealer.

       G.      Flanges: Wherever exposed ducts pass through walls, floors or ceiling, a 2" flanged
               sheet metal collar fitting close around ducts shall be slipped along duct until flange is tight
               against finished surface covering edges of openings and presenting a neat appearance.
               Lock collar to duct.

       H.      Dampers: Install all dampers securely. Splitter dampers shall be of heavy construction,
               adequately braced and properly mounted to prevent causing any noise in the ducts.

       I.      Flues and Combustion Air Intakes: Install positive pressure flues for furnaces and water
               heaters. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's installation instructions and
               adopted edition of International Fuel Gas Code.

3.2    ROUND FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                                   15880 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                      Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                   BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        JUNE 2, 2010



       A.      Flexible ducts shall be installed in a fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using
               only the minimum length required to make the connection. Maximum length of any duct
               run shall be 6'-0".

       B.      Where horizontal support is required, flexible duct shall be suspended on 36-inch centers
               with a minimum 3/4-inch wide flat banding material. All joints and connections shall be
               made with ½" wide positive.

       C.      Where "lift-out" ceilings occur, flex ducts shall be installed with volume damper in flex
               duct at connection to main duct, and a distributing grid at the diffuser.

       D.      Where permanent ceilings occur, omit the damper in flex duct, provide an opposed blade
               volume damper at the diffuser (omit the distributing grid at the diffuser).

3.3    DUCT LINER

       A.      Duct liner (square and rectangular ducts) shall be secured to the metal with a solid coat
               of adhesive, black mat side to the air stream. Top and bottom sections shall overlap the
               sides, and all joints shall be firmly butted and ends coated with adhesive.

       B.      Duct sizes as indicated on drawings are clear inside dimensions, and where duct liner is
               used, duct sizes shown shall be increased to allow for liner.

       C.      All ducts exposed to weather shall have joints sealed absolutely weather tight with
               flanges and General Electric silicone sealer.

3.4    REGISTERS, GRILLES, DIFFUSERS

       A.      Mounting: This Sub-Contractor shall coordinate the location of the diffuser, ceiling lights,
               and any other ceiling outlets to avoid possible conflicts.

       B.      Install all units to provide a vibration free connection to the fan system.

3.5    EQUIPMENT

       A.      Install all exhaust fans to the curb or structure as required and make necessary
               adjustments to eliminate vibration. Verify proper rotation direction of fan wheels.

       B.      Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.6    KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCTS AND HOODS




AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                                 15880 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                    Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       JUNE 2, 2010


       General: Fabricate joints and seams with continuous welds for watertight construction. Provide
       for thermal expansion of ductwork through 2000 deg. F (1093 deg. C) temperature range. Install
       without dips or traps which may collect residues, except where traps have continuous or
       automatic residue removal. Provide access openings at each change in direction, located on
       sides of duct 1-1/2" minimum from bottom, and fitted with grease tight covers of same material as
       duct.

3.7    SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

       A.      General: Seal all duct seams and joints per SMACNA seal Class A as follows:

       B.      Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints,
               longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations.

       C.      Pressure Clarification 2 and 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal
               seams.

               1.      Pressure Classification Less Than 2 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints and
                       longitudinal seals.

       D.      Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.

3.8    HANGING AND SUPPORTING

       A.      Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
               SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”, Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1
               through 4-8.

       B.      Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch
               intersection.

       C.      Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

       D.      Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the
               failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.

       E.      Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3.9    CONNECTIONS

       A.      Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with
               Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories”.

       B.      Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”,
               Figures 2-16 through 2-18.

       C.      Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction
               Standards”, Figures 2-16 through 2-17.

       D.      Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction
               Standards”, Figure 2-19.
AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                                15880 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                   Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010



3.10   FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

       A.      Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to
               accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with test requirements.

       B.      Conduct test, in the presence of the Architect, at static pressures equal to the maximum
               design pressure of the system or the section being tested. If the pressure classifications
               are not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system design pressure. Do not
               pressurize systems above the maximum design operating pressure. Give 7 day’s
               advanced notice for testing.

       C.      Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating leakage to the
               surface area of the test sections.

       D.      Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1989 Handbook,
               “Fundamentals” Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6 and Figure 10. Comply with requirements
               for leakage classification 3 for round and flat oval ducts, leakage classification 12 for
               rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 inches water gage
               (both positive and negative pressures), and leakage classification 6 for pressure
               classifications greater than 2 inches water gage and less than and equal to 10 inches
               water gage.

       E.      Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum
               allowable leakage.

       F.      Leakage Test: Perform volumetric measurements and adjust air systems as described in
               ASHRAE 1987 “HVAC Systems and Application” Volume, Chapter 57 and ASHRAE 1989
               “Fundamentals” Volume, Chapter 13, and Section 15990 “TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
               BALANCING”.

3.11   ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

       A.      Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to
               achieve required air flow. Refer to Section 15990 “TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
               BALANCING” for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.

       B.      Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.




END OF SECTION 15880




AIR DISTRIBUTION                                                                              15880 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including
       control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired
       controls.

  B.   Related Sections include the following:

       1.    Division 13 Section "Lighting Controls" for building lighting control system.
       2.    Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for fire and smoke detectors mounted in HVAC
             systems and equipment.
       3.    Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this
             Section.
       4.    Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."


1.3    DEFINITIONS

  A.   DDC: Direct-digital controls.

  B.   LAN: Local area network.

  C.   MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.

  D.   PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.


1.4    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

  A.   Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
       equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

  B.   Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
       equipment, other apparatus, accessoriesand accessories., and software connected to
       distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing
       network and programmed to control mechanical systems.



HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                        15900 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  JUNE 2, 2010


1.5    SEQUENCE OF OPERATION


1.6    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
       dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
       materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

       1.    Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

  B.   Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
       required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
       field connection.

       1.    Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
             devices.
       2.    Wiring Diagrams:       Power, signal, and control wiring.         Differentiate between
             manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
       3.    Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
       4.    Written description of sequence of operation.
       5.    Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
       6.    Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.
       7.    Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data
             conductors.
       8.    Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
       9.    System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point
             addresses, and operator notations.
       10.   System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies,
             diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

  C.   ASHRAE BACnet Statement: PICS for each DDC system component (panel, zone
       controller, field devices, and operator workstation) proposed.

  D.C. Samples: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover.

  E.D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

       1.    Software operating and upgrade manuals.
       2.    Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
             data files.
       3.    Device address list.
       4.    Printout of software application and graphic screens.
       5.    Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

  F.   Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power system
       revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

  G.E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
       requirements.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                         15900 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


  H.F. Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
       Include the following:

       1.    Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and
             compressed-air station.
       2.    Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components
             and devices.
       3.    Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator
             function.
       4.    Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and
             calibration tolerances.
       5.    Calibration records and list of set points.

  I.G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

  J.H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including
       control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation
       and operating sequences.


1.7    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative and a
       certified installer of the automatic control system manufacturer for both installation and
       maintenance of units required for this Project. Installer shall have an office within 75 miles
       of the project site.

  B.   Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperature-
       control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
       service performance.

  C.   Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
       NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
       marked for intended use.

  D.   Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."

  E.   Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system control components.

  F.   Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately
       processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and
       twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations.


1.8    DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

  A.   Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are
       indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to
       unit manufacturer.


HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                           15900 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


1.9    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate location of thermostats, sensors, and other exposed control sensors with plans
       and room details before installation.

  B.   Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator
       workstation.

  C.   Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with
       starter coils and annunciation devices.

  D.   Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve
       compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

  E.   Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
       Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
       "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


1.10   EXTRA MATERIALS

  A.   Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
       packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

  B.   Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique
       valve motor, controller, thermostat and positioning relay.

  C.   Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjusting key[s].


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1    MANUFACTURERS

  A.   Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
       following:

       1.    Control Systems Components:

             a.    Air Monitor Corp.
             b.    Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
             c.    Daikin AC
             d.    Delta Controls Inc.
             e.    Diversified Electronics, Inc.
             f.    Ebtron, Inc.
             g.    Enerstat Corp.
             h.    Heat-Timer Corp.
             i.    Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control.
             j.    Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.
             k.    KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                         15900 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               JUNE 2, 2010


             l.    Landis & Staefa, Inc.
             m.    Magnatrol Valve Corporation.
             n.    Mamac Systems.
             o.    TCS/BASYS Controls; HVAC Sensors & Transducers Division.
             p.    Tour & Andersson Control, Inc.; HVAC Sensors & Transducers Div.
             q.    TSI Inc.; Environmental Measurements & Controls Div.
             r.    Uni-Line North America; Robertshaw Division.
             s.    Vaisala, Inc.
             t.    Vulcain

       2.    Electric, Electronic, and DDC Systems:
             a.    Automated Logic Corporation.
             b.    CSI Control Systems International, Inc.
             b.c. Daikin AC
             c.d. Danfoss Automatic Controls.
             d.e. Delta Controls Inc.
             e.f. EDA Controls Corp.
             f.g. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control.
             g.h. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.
             h.i. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
             i.j.  Landis & Staefa, Inc.
             j.k. McQuay International.
             k.l. Siebe Environmental Controls; Barber-Coleman/Robertshaw Products.
             l.m. TCS/BASYS Controls; HVAC Sensors & Transducers Division.
             m.n. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
             n.o. Uni-Line North America; Robertshaw Division.


2.2    DDC EQUIPMENT

  A.   Operator Station:   Intelligent controller station with a touch screen or similar operator
       interface.


       1.    Basis-of-Design: Daikin AC Intelligent Touch Controller

  B.   Application Software: Include the following:

       1.    Input/output capability from operator station.
       2.    Operator system access levels via software password.
       3.    Database creation and support.
       4.    Dynamic color graphic displays.
       5.    Alarm processing.
       6.    Event processing.
       7.    Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
       8.    Data collection.
       9.    Graphic development on workstation.
       10.   Maintenance management.



HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                      15900 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                        BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             JUNE 2, 2010


  C.   Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,
       random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface
       equipment; and backup power source.

       1.   Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; execute
            commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download
            from or upload to operator station.
       2.   Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
            include the following:

            a.   Global communications.
            b.   Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
            c.   Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
            d.   Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and
                 controlled environment.

       3.   Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator
            station.
       4.   BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN in Ethernet IEEE 802.3, Class 3,
            minimum, with routers between LAN and other panels, with at least one
            communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following
            areas:

            a.   Network.
            b.   Functional groups.
            c.   Standard application services supported.
            d.   Standard objects supported.

  D.   Local Control Units:       Modular, comprising processor board with         electronically
       programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

       1.   Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download
            from or upload to operator station.
       2.   Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
            include the following:

            a.   Global communications.
            b.   Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
            c.   Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

       3.   Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator
            station.
       4.   BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN using MS/TP, Class 2, minimum, with
            at least one communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for
            the following areas:

            a.   Network.
            b.   Functional groups.
            c.   Standard application services supported.
            d.   Standard objects supported.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                     15900 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010


  E.     LANs: Capacity for a minimum of 10 workstations connected to multiuser, multitasking
         environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units.

         1.    Media: Ethernet, peer-to-peer CMA/CD, operating at 10 MBps.
         2.    Media: MS/TP, EIA 485, operating at 76.8 kBps.

  F.     Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.             Include and
         implement the following capabilities from the control units:

         1.    Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
         2.    Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling,
               start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, DDC with fine tuning, and trend
               logging.
         3.    HVAC Control Programs:         Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy
               switchover.
         4.    Chiller Control Programs: Control function of chilled-water reset and equipment
               sequencing.
         5.    Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm messages, weekly
               scheduling, and interlocking.


2.32.2   ANALOG CONTROLLERS

  A.     Step Controllers: Six- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads
         and operated by electric motor.

  B.     Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers:          Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type,
         proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus
         10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.

  C.     Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision
         for remote-resistance readjustment.     Identify adjustments on controllers, including
         proportional band and authority.

         1.    Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control
               readjustment potentiometer.

  D.     Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of
         motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum
         fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring
         motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.

  E.     Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct
         or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional
         band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.

         1.    Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span,
               input signal of 3 to 13 psig.
         2.    Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig.
         3.    Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                             15900 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


         4.    Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal 0 to
               supply pressure.
         5.    Gages: 2-1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to
               match transmitter input or output pressure.


2.42.3   TIME CLOCKS

  A.     Solid-state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs; 24-hour battery carryover;
         individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays;
         choice of fail-safe operation for each program; and system fault alarm.

  A.     The time clock function shall reside within the operator station.


2.52.4   SENSORS

  A.     Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting
         as required.

         1.    Thermistor temperature sensors as follows:

               a.    Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.36 deg F at calibration point.
               b.    Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
               c.    Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not
                     affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
               d.    Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to
                     temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as
                     required.
               e.    Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of
                     2-1/2 inches.
               f.    Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.
               g.    Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

         2.    Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum.

               a.    Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.
               b.    Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
               c.    Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not
                     affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
               d.    Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to
                     temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as
                     required.
               e.    Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of
                     2-1/2 inches.
               f.    Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.
               g.    Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
               h.    Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and
                     security screws.


HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                              15900 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010


         3.    Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected
               input, and temperature compensated.

               a.    Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
               b.    Output: 4 to 20 mA.
               c.    Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg.
               d.    Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg.

         4.    Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable
               for system; proportional output 4 to 20 mA.

  B.     Equipment operation sensors as follows:

         1.    Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5
               inches wg.
         2.    Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with
               adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig.
         3.    Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,
               adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

  C.     Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and
         2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

  D.     Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting
         type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless-steel or bronze
         paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vaporproof type.

  E.     Carbon-Monoxide and Nitrogen-Dioxide Detector/Sensing System:


         1.    Basis of Design: Vulcain. Alternate manufacturers shall submit for approval prior to
               bid.
         2.    Model VA301C controller with VA201TQ1CO-NET CO sensor and VA201TQ1NO2-
               NET NO2 sensor and 120-volt/24-volt transformer, as required.


2.62.5   THERMOSTATS

  A.     Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-, or
         four-position, push-button or lever-operated fan switch.

         1.    Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.

  B.     Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch
         type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.

  C.     Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,
         enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral
         manual on-off-auto selector switch.


HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                            15900 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


         1.   Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on
              dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.
         2.   Dead Band: Maximum 2 deg F.

  D.     Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action
         with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

  E.     Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or
         automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length
         is equal to or below set point.

         1.   Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
         2.   Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

  F.     Electric High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or
         automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length
         is equal to or above set point.

         1.   Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
         2.   Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.
                                                                                                       Formatted: PR1
  2.G. Variable Refrigerant System Fan Coil Unit Control: Wall controller/thermostat provided by
       system manufacturer.


2.72.6   ACTUATORS

  A.     Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
         action or two-position action.

         1.   Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type:             Gear trains completely oil
              immersed and sealed.          Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring
              mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit
              switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
         2.   Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque
              of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
         3.   Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and
              breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
         4.   Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running
              torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
         5.   Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and
              breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

  B.     Electronic Damper and Large-Valve Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum
         60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

         1.   Valves: Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential
              pressure.
         2.   Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

              a.    Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                        15900 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  JUNE 2, 2010


               b.   Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
               c.   Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft of damper.
               d.   Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
               e.   Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to
                    2500 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5.
               f.   Dampers with 3 to 4 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to
                    3000 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 2.0.

         3.    Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
         4.    Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
         5.    Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,
               manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
         6.    Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
         7.    Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
         8.    Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
               signal.
         9.    Temperature Rating: 40 to 104 deg F.
         10.   Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.


2.82.7   CONTROL VALVES

  A.     Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
         maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

  B.     Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable
         composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

  C.     Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc,
         flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

  D.     Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

         1.    Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
         2.    Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel or brass.

               a.   Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for
                    plug on top and bottom of guided plugs.
               b.   Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding
                    surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.

         3.    Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
         4.    Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics;
               three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. Operators shall close valves
               against pump shutoff head.

  E.     Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
         or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-
         replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

         1.    Body Style: Lug.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                         15900 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    JUNE 2, 2010


         2.    Disc Type: Elastomer-coated ductile iron.
         3.    Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

  F.     Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two- or three-port as indicated,
         replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends.

         1.    Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
         2.    Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump
               shutoff head.
         3.    Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics;
               three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.


2.92.8   DAMPERS

  A.     Dampers:     AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 0.1084-inch minimum,
         galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than
         0.0635-inch galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
         1.   Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
              hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
              brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings
              at each end of every blade.
         2.   Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
         3.   For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
         4.   For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable
              seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm
              per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg when damper is
              being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.102.9 CONTROL CABLE

  A.     Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section
         "Control/Signal Transmission Media."


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1      EXAMINATION

  A.     Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

  B.     Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping
         are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2      INSTALLATION

  A.     Install equipment level and plumb.

  B.     Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of
         programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                           15900 - 12
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


  C.   Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

  D.   Verify location of thermostats, sensors, and other exposed control sensors with plans and
       room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches above the floor.
       1.    Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

  E.   Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
       1.     Apparatus bays.
       2.     Storage rooms.
       3.     Where indicated.

  F.   Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

  G.   Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
       temperatures.

  H.   Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15
       Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

  I.   Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15
       Section "Mechanical Identification."

  J.   Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
       Section "Hydronic Piping."

  K.   Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
       Section "Refrigerant Piping."

  L.   Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts.

  M.   Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
       Transmission Media."

3.3    ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

  A.   Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
       Boxes."

  B.   Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

  C.   Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
       Transmission Media."
       1.     Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and
              piping are exposed.
       2.     Install exposed cable in raceway.
       3.     Install concealed cable in raceway.
       4.     Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
              several cables follow a common path.
       5.     Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
              against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                        15900 - 13
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


       6.    Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
             system, except local individual room control cables.

  D.   Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.
       Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

  E.   Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when
       switch is in hand position.

3.4    CONNECTIONS

  A.   Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.       Drawings
       indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

       1.    Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

  B.   Ground equipment.
       1.   Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
            torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
            specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.   Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
       inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
       electrical connections. Report results in writing.
       1.     Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
              retest until no leaks exist.
       2.     Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
              proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
              retest.
       3.     Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
              and equipment, and retest.
       4.     Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
              operation with compatible signal generator.

  B.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

  C.   Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
       1.   Start, test, and adjust control systems.
       2.   Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and
            control sequences.
       3.   Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of
            operation specified.

  D.   Verify DDC as follows:
       1.    Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset
             controls, and occupied/unoccupied cycles.
       2.    Verify operation of operator workstation.
       3.    Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                         15900 - 14
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               JUNE 2, 2010


3.6    DEMONSTRATION

  A.   Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
       to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components.
       1.    Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
             stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
       2.    Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting
             data, executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default
             values, and requesting logs. Include a minimum of 16 hours' dedicated instructor
             time on-site.
       3.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
             Closeout."
       4.    Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
             Maintenance Data."
       5.    Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
             notice.

3.7    ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

  A.   Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to
       three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and
       to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and
       controls to suit actual conditions.




HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS                                                     15900 - 15
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                          Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                   JUNE 2, 2010




END OF SECTION 15900




HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS         15900 - 16
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - CONTROLS


PART 1 – GENERAL (NOT USED)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1    SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

       A.      GENERAL

               1.     All set points shall be adjustable (adj.).
               2.     The Temperature Control Contractor (TCC), and/or Mechanical Contractor
                      (MC) shall meet with the Owner to determine the building
                      occupied/unoccupied schedule(s) prior to submitting temperature control shop
                      drawings to the Engineer. The schedule(s) shall appear in the shop drawings.
                       Please note, the schedule may vary for each zone, e.g. each fan coil unit may
                      have a unique schedule.
               3.     The mechanical equipment schedules and alarms shall be reported to the
                      Operator Interface. The Operator Interface shall be located in the
                      Communications Room 121. Refer to Section 15900 for the Operator
                      Interface basis-of-design requirements.
               4.3.   TCC shall coordinate locations and quantities of electrical power (j-boxes), as
                      required, to provide electrical power for the control system.

       B.      HEATING WATER SYSTEM (BOILERS AND PUMPS):

               1.     Boiler Control: The hot water boilers shall have packaged boiler controls
                      provided by the Manufacturer as outlined in Section 15513.
               2.     TCC/(MC) shall provide a controller to modulate the pump speed (HWP-3/4) to
                      maintain a 10 psi heating water system static pressure.
               3.     The boiler firing rate shall modulate to maintain the heating water supply
                      temperature. Provide reset of the heating supply water in accordance with the
                      following schedule:
                         Outdoor Temperature                 Water Temperature
                               0 Degrees                       160 Degrees F
                               60 Degrees                      140 Degrees F
                      The pumps and boilers shall be off above 65 degrees F.
               4.     Energize pumps (HWP-1/2) whenever there is a call for heat from the
                      associated boiler.
               5.     If system water flow stops as sensed by HWS flow switch, standby pump shall
                      be energized. If standby pump fails to energize, an alarm will sound and a red
                      light will indicate no flow.
               6.     All boiler and pump status and alarm points shall be reported to the central
                      operator interface station.

       C.      VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV) HVAC SYSTEM

               1.     The VRV outdoor heat recovery equipment, indoor fan coil units, branch selector
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION                                                                       15940 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                      JUNE 2, 2010


                      units and associated components shall operate in accordance with the
                      manufacturer’s operating instructions in order to maintain the indoor space
                      temperature set point.
               2.     The space temperature set point shall be 70 °F (adj.) for heating and 75 °F (adj.)
                      for cooling.
               3.     Indoor fan coil units (FCU):
                      a.      The supply fan shall run continuously during occupied hours. The supply
                              fan shall cycle on upon a call for heat/cool during unoccupied hours.
                      b.      The associated branch selector unit and fan coil unit shall stage the
                              heating or cooling upon a call for heat/cool from the space
                              thermostat/controller.
                      c.      In the heating mode, the first stage of heat shall be the VRV system, i.e.
                              FCU refrigerant coil. The second stage of heat shall be the duct-mounted
                              hot water coil. If the first stage is unable to meet the heating set point
                              after 2-minutes (adj.), the second stage of heat shall stage on.
               4.     All VRV equipment shall be connected to the Operator Interface station.

       D.      EXHAUST FANS

               1.     EF-1: Fan shall be controlled via the vehicle exhaust control system panel. Refer
                      to Specification Section 15860.Provided by owner under separate contract.
               2.     EF-2: Fan shall be energized via a reverse-acting thermostat to maintain a space
                      temperature of 80 °F (adj.).
               3.     EF-3, EF-4 and EF-5: Fan shall be controlled by wall switch. Fan shall run
                      continuously whenever the switch is in the “on” position.

       E.      ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR

               1.     The supply and exhaust fans shall run continuously and the outside air intake and
                      exhaust dampers shall open during occupied hours.
               2.     The supply and exhaust fans shall turn off and the outside air intake and exhaust
                      dampers shall close during unoccupied hours.
               3.     Provide supply air temperature sensor in supply duct for monitoring.
               4.     Report supply fan status, exhaust fan status, unit alarms and supply air
                      temperature to the Operator Interface station.
               3.     The heat wheel and defrost control shall be operated in accordance with Section
                      15720.
               4.     ERV shall be controlled via time clock.
               5.     ERV/fan failure: Connect alarm module w/indicating light to supply fan motor
                      auxiliary contacts to alert building occupants of equipment failure.

       F.      DUCT HOT WATER HEATING COILS

               1.     Refer to VRV system sequence of operation for staging of coil in FCU heat mode.
               2.     Upon a call for the heating coil to stage, the control valve shall open. The control
                      valve shall close when the space temperature heating set point is met.
               3.     Refer to the HEATING COIL SCHEDULE on Drawing M5.01 for 2-way or 3-way
                      control valve requirements.

       G.      CABINET UNIT AND UNIT HEATERS

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION                                                                          15940 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010


               1.     Open the 2-position valve and cycle the fan to maintain space temperature set
                      point via a wall-mounted thermostat.
               2.     Space temperature shall be 65 °F (adj.). Interlock fan with an aquastat in the
                      heating water pipe so fan operates only when water is above 130 °F.

       H.      BASEBOARD RADIATORS

               1.     Open the 2-position valve to maintain space temperature set point via a wall-
                      mounted thermostat.
               2.     Space temperature shall be 68 °F (adj.).

       I.      GAS-FIRED INFRARED RADIANT HEATERS

               1.     The draft fan, gas valve and burner shall energize and modulate in response to
                      the space thermostat to maintain a 50 °F (adj.) space temperature.

       J.      MISCELLANEOUS

               1.     Domestic Hot Water Booster Cirulation Pump: TCC/(MC) shall wire the packaged
                      system sensor/transmitter to the system pump logic controller. Pump shall be
                      energized via time clock and run continuously during occupied hours.
                      a.     Report pump status to Operator Interface station.

               2.     Glycol Feed Pump System: Pumps shall be controlled by a pressure switch
                      located in feed line on discharge side of feeder pump. When glycol feed line
                      pressure drops below 20 psi, pressure switch shall energize pump. Once 35 psi
                      is obtained in glycol feed line, pressure switch shall de-energize pump.
                      a.      Report alarm condition to Operator Interface station.

               3.     Smoke Detectors: Approved smoke detectors shall be installed in the main
                      supply duct and main return duct of ERV-1 as shown on the electrical drawings,
                      refer to Electrical Drawings. The controls shall be arranged to open the relief and
                      outside air damper and close the return air damper when the return air smoke
                      detector is in the alarm mode. The controls shall also be arranged to de-
                      energized the supply fan by means of the motor starters when the supply air
                      smoke detector is in the alarm mode. The main supply air detector shall be
                      downstream from the filters. Mounting and wiring shall be in accordance with the
                      following schedule of responsibility.

                                             Furn     Mechanical                    Fire Alarm
                                             By      Mount           Interlock      Interlock

               Return Air Detectors          MD       MD            MD               ED
               Supply Air Detectors          MD       MD            MD               ED
               All Space Detectors           ED       ED            ED               ED

               *      See electrical drawings for locations

               ED = Electrical Division of the Specifications
               MD = Mechanical Division of the Specifications

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION                                                                          15940 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                  Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO              JUNE 2, 2010




END OF SECTION 15940




SEQUENCE OF OPERATION                 15940 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.         Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010



SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1    RELATED DOCUMENTS

  A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
       Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2    SUMMARY

  A.   This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
       objectives, including the following:

       1.   Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
            branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
       2.   Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
       3.   Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
       4.   Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
       5.   Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
       6.   Measuring sound and vibration.
       7.   Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

  B.   Related Sections include the following:

       1.   Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
            included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
       2.   Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
            equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.


1.3    DEFINITIONS

  A.   Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
       reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

  B.   Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches,
       and terminals, according to design quantities.

  C.   Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
       high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
       withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

  D.   Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield
       repeatable results.

  E.   Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                         15990 - 1
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


  F.   Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement.
       In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

  G.   Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
       side.

  H.   System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
       cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

  I.   System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance
       ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan
       was performance tested.

  J.   Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
       the distribution system.

  K.   Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

  L.   Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
       reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

  M.   AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

  N.   AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

  O.   CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

  P.   NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

  Q.   SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.


1.4    SUBMITTALS

  A.   Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
       submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this
       Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified
       in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

  B.   Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to
       Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of
       this Section.

  C.   Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
       submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
       procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
       report forms intended for use on this Project.

  D.   Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
       as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
       balancing Agent.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                         15990 - 2
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


  E.   Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
       forms.

  F.   Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.


1.5    QUALITY ASSURANCE

  A.   Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
       AABC or NEBB.

  B.   Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's
       representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
       procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation
       of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized
       service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7
       days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

       1.   Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

            a.    Submittal distribution requirements.
            b.    Contract Documents examination report.
            c.    Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
            d.    Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
            e.    Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
            f.    Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

  C.   Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
       and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

       1.   Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
            adjusting, and balancing reports.
       2.   Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
            testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in
            this Specification.

  D.   Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
       standard forms approved by the Architect.

  E.   Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.

  F.   Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural
       Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II,
       "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

  G.   Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more
       frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.


1.6    PROJECT CONDITIONS

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                          15990 - 3
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               JUNE 2, 2010


  A.   Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the
       entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing,
       adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.


1.7    COORDINATION

  A.   Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
       equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
       equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

  B.   Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
       times.

  C.   Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
       distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.


1.8    WARRANTY

  A.   General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article
       shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
       the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
       warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

  B.   National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National
       Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the
       Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the
       Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

  C.   Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
       completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and
       balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the
       following provisions:

       1.   The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
            Documents.
       2.   Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
            installation limits.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1    EXAMINATION




TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                        15990 - 4
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


  A.   Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
       conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
       systems and equipment.

       1.   Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
            Contract.
       2.   Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
            flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
            required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
            balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
            efficient system and equipment operation.

  B.   Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

  C.   Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
       Documents."

  D.   Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
       statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
       statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

  E.   Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves.                   Relate
       performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can
       create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a
       system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC
       equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
       equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
       systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
       through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare
       this data with the design data and installed conditions.

  F.   Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
       testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
       Sections have been performed.

  G.   Examine system and equipment test reports.

  H.   Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
       devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing
       valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations
       are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
       equipment operation.

  I.   Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
       balancing.

  J.   Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
       greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
       operation.


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                         15990 - 5
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


  K.   Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that
       they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

  L.   Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
       pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

  M.   Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

  N.   Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
       mixing fluid flows.

  O.   Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

  P.   Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction
       piping.

  Q.   Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

  R.   Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

       1.    Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
       2.    Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
       3.    Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
             closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
             boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
       4.    Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing
             and diverting valves, are properly connected.
       5.    Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts,
             and cold walls.
       6.    Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
       7.    Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
       8.    Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions
             to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
       9.    Interlocked systems are operating.
       10.   Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

  S.   Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
       balancing procedures.


3.2    PREPARATION

  A.   Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
       procedures.

  B.   Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports.              Verify the
       following:

       1.    Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
       2.    Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
       3.    Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                            15990 - 6
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  JUNE 2, 2010


       4.    Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
       5.    Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
       6.    Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
       7.    Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
             access to balancing devices is provided.
       8.    Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
             met.


3.3    GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

  A.   Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
       contained in AABC national standards and this Section.

  B.   Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
       contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
       Environmental Systems" and this Section.

  C.   Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
       contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
       Section.

  D.   Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
       minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
       balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
       removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
       Project.

  E.   Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
       including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
       controls and devices, to show final settings.


3.4    FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

  A.   Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
       recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
       with required fan volumes.

  B.   Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

  C.   For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

  D.   Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
       measurements.

  E.   Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
       exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

  F.   Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                           15990 - 7
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


  G.   Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

  H.   Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

  I.   Check for airflow blockages.

  J.   Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

  K.   Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.


3.5    CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

  A.   The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
       systems. Additional procedures are required for process exhaust-air systems. These
       additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.

  B.   Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
       fan manufacturer.

       1.    Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

             a.    Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
                   and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
             b.    Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
                   connection.
             c.    Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
                   as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
                   restrictions.
             d.    Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
                   that houses the fan.

       2.    Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

             a.    Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
                   personnel must change filters.

       3.    Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps,
             heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
       4.    Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
             pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
             calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
             corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
       5.    Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make
             required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
             accommodate fan-speed changes.
       6.    Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
             manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
             motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
             full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake
             horsepower.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                             15990 - 8
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


  C.   Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
       airflows within specified tolerances.

       1.   Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
            volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

            a.    Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
                  tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
                  calculate the total airflow for that zone.

       2.   Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
            adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

  D.   Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

       1.    Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's
             written instructions and calculating factors.

  E.   Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
       tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
       extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.

       1.    Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
             quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
             Contract Documents.
       2.    Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.


3.6    FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

  A.   Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to
       end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate.
       Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

  B.   Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

  C.   Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to
       the general preparation procedures specified above:

       1.    Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
       2.    Check expansion tank liquid level.
       3.    Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
       4.    Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
       5.    Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not
             set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several
             terminal valves are kept open.
       6.    Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
       7.    Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device
             so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
       8.    Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                          15990 - 9
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


3.7    HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

  A.   Determine water flow at pumps.          Use the following procedures, except for positive-
       displacement pumps:

       1.    Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify
             with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure
             differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in
             gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and
             confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.
       2.    Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
             pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
             discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
       3.    Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for
             the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare
             calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report
             conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
       4.    Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

  B.   Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

  C.   Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

       1.    System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-
             drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

  D.   Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that
       is 5 percent greater than design flow.

  E.   Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

       1.    Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
       2.    Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage
             over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over
             design flow.
       3.    Record settings and mark balancing devices.

  F.   Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,
       pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.

  G.   Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of
       balancing.


3.8    VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

  A.   Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at
       maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for
       hydronic systems.


TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                            15990 - 10
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


3.9    PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

  A.   Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.


3.10   MOTORS

  A.   Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

       1.   Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
       2.   Motor horsepower rating.
       3.   Motor rpm.
       4.   Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
       5.   Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
       6.   Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
       7.   Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

  B.   Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
       varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
       proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial
       numbers, and nameplate data.


3.11   BOILERS

  A.   Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.


3.12   HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

  A.   Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

       1.   Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
       2.   Water flow rate.
       3.   Water pressure drop.
       4.   Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
       5.   Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less
            than 7500 cfm.
       6.   Airflow.
       7.   Air pressure drop.


3.13   TEMPERATURE TESTING

  A.   During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
       regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

  B.   Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
       successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
       temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                        15990 - 11
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     JUNE 2, 2010


  C.   Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.


3.14   TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

  A.   Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

  B.   Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
       control functions.

  C.   Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
       measurements.

  D.   Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

  E.   Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
       operators.

  F.   Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
       and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
       input changes.

  G.   Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

  H.   Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

  I.   Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

  J.   Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates
       on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

  K.   Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.


3.15   TOLERANCES

  A.   Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

       1.    Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
       2.    Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
       3.    Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
       4.    Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.


3.16   REPORTING

  A.   Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
       specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
       systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
       devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                             15990 - 12
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    JUNE 2, 2010


       and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance
       measuring and balancing devices.

  B.   Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
       procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
       problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each
       system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.


3.17   FINAL REPORT

  A.   General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
       3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

  B.   Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
       balancing engineer.

       1.    Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

  C.   Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:

       1.    Pump curves.
       2.    Fan curves.
       3.    Manufacturers' test data.
       4.    Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
       5.    Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
             Shop Drawings and Product Data.

  D.   General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in
       the final report, as applicable:

       1.    Title page.
       2.    Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
       3.    Project name.
       4.    Project location.
       5.    Architect's name and address.
       6.    Engineer's name and address.
       7.    Contractor's name and address.
       8.    Report date.
       9.    Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
       10.   Summary of contents, including the following:

             a.    Design versus final performance.
             b.    Notable characteristics of systems.
             c.    Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
                   Documents.

       11.   Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
       12.   Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
       13.   Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
       14.   Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                             15990 - 13
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                 Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   JUNE 2, 2010


             a.    Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
             b.    Conditions of filters.
             c.    Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
             d.    Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
             e.    Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
                   diameter.
             f.    Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
             g.    Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
             h.    Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

  E.   System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
       Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:

       1.    Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
       2.    Water and steam flow rates.
       3.    Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
       4.    Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
       5.    Terminal units.
       6.    Balancing stations.

  F.   Fan Coil Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

       1.    Unit Data: Include the following:

             a.    Unit identification.
             b.    Location.
             c.    Make and type.
             d.    Model number and unit size.
             e.    Manufacturer's serial number.
             f.    Unit arrangement and class.
             g.    Discharge arrangement.
             h.    Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
             i.    Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
             j.    Number of belts, make, and size.
             k.    Number of filters, type, and size.

       2.    Motor Data: Include the following:

             a.    Make and frame type and size.
             b.    Horsepower and rpm.
             c.    Volts, phase, and hertz.
             d.    Full-load amperage and service factor.
             e.    Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
             f.    Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

       3.    Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

             a.    Total airflow rate in cfm.
             b.    Total system static pressure in inches wg.
             c.    Fan rpm.
             d.    Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                           15990 - 14
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                               Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


            e.    Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
            f.    Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
            g.    Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
            h.    Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
            i.    Outside airflow in cfm.
            j.    Return airflow in cfm.
            k.    Outside-air damper position.
            l.    Return-air damper position.
            m.    Vortex damper position.

  G.   Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

       1.   Coil Data: Include the following:

            a.    System identification.
            b.    Location.
            c.    Coil type.
            d.    Number of rows.
            e.    Fin spacing in fins per inch.
            f.    Make and model number.
            g.    Face area in sq. ft..
            h.    Tube size in NPS.
            i.    Tube and fin materials.
            j.    Circuiting arrangement.

       2.   Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Airflow rate in cfm.
            b.    Average face velocity in fpm.
            c.    Air pressure drop in inches wg.
            d.    Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
            e.    Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
            f.    Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
            g.    Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
            h.    Water flow rate in gpm.
            i.    Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
            j.    Entering-water temperature in deg F.
            k.    Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
            l.    Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
            m.    Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
            n.    Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
            o.    Inlet steam pressure in psig.

  H.   Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory startup
       equipment reports, include the following:

       1.   Unit Data: Include the following:

            a.    System identification.
            b.    Location.
            c.    Make and type.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                        15990 - 15
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


            d.    Model number and unit size.
            e.    Manufacturer's serial number.
            f.    Fuel type in input data.
            g.    Output capacity in Btuh.
            h.    Ignition type.
            i.    Burner-control types.
            j.    Motor horsepower and rpm.
            k.    Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
            l.    Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
            m.    Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
            n.    Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

       2.   Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Total airflow rate in cfm.
            b.    Entering-air temperature in deg F.
            c.    Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
            d.    Air temperature differential in deg F.
            e.    Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.
            f.    Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.
            g.    Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.
            h.    Low-fire fuel input in Btuh.
            i.    High-fire fuel input in Btuh.
            j.    Manifold pressure in psig.
            k.    High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.
            l.    Operating set point in Btuh.
            m.    Motor voltage at each connection.
            n.    Motor amperage for each phase.
            o.    Heating value of fuel in Btuh.

  I.   Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

       1.   Fan Data: Include the following:

            a.    System identification.
            b.    Location.
            c.    Make and type.
            d.    Model number and size.
            e.    Manufacturer's serial number.
            f.    Arrangement and class.
            g.    Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
            h.    Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

       2.   Motor Data: Include the following:

            a.    Make and frame type and size.
            b.    Horsepower and rpm.
            c.    Volts, phase, and hertz.
            d.    Full-load amperage and service factor.
            e.    Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                        15990 - 16
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


            f.    Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
            g.    Number of belts, make, and size.

       3.   Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Total airflow rate in cfm.
            b.    Total system static pressure in inches wg.
            c.    Fan rpm.
            d.    Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
            e.    Suction static pressure in inches wg.

  J.   Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
       representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

       1.   Report Data: Include the following:

            a.    System and air-handling unit number.
            b.    Location and zone.
            c.    Traverse air temperature in deg F.
            d.    Duct static pressure in inches wg.
            e.    Duct size in inches.
            f.    Duct area in sq. ft..
            g.    Design airflow rate in cfm.
            h.    Design velocity in fpm.
            i.    Actual airflow rate in cfm.
            j.    Actual average velocity in fpm.
            k.    Barometric pressure in psig.

  K.   Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:

       1.   Unit Data: Include the following:

            a.    System and air-handling unit identification.
            b.    Location and zone.
            c.    Test apparatus used.
            d.    Area served.
            e.    Air-terminal-device make.
            f.    Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
            g.    Air-terminal-device type and model number.
            h.    Air-terminal-device size.
            i.    Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft..

       2.   Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Airflow rate in cfm.
            b.    Air velocity in fpm.
            c.    Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
            d.    Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
            e.    Final airflow rate in cfm.
            f.    Final velocity in fpm.
            g.    Space temperature in deg F.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                       15990 - 17
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                           Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              JUNE 2, 2010


  L.   System-Coil Reports:    For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
       following:

       1.   Unit Data: Include the following:

            a.    System and air-handling unit identification.
            b.    Location and zone.
            c.    Room or riser served.
            d.    Coil make and size.
            e.    Flowmeter type.

       2.   Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Airflow rate in cfm.
            b.    Entering-water temperature in deg F.
            c.    Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
            d.    Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
            e.    Entering-air temperature in deg F.
            f.    Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

  M.   Condensing Unit Reports: For each chiller, include the following:

       1.   Unit Data: Include the following:

            a.    Unit identification.
            b.    Make and model number.
            c.    Manufacturer's serial number.
            d.    Refrigerant type and capacity in gal..
            e.    Starter type and size.
            f.    Starter thermal protection size.

       2.   Condenser Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Refrigerant pressure in psig.
            b.    Refrigerant temperature in deg F.

       3.   Compressor Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

            a.    Make and model number.
            b.    Manufacturer's serial number.
            c.    Suction pressure in psig.
            d.    Suction temperature in deg F.
            e.    Discharge pressure in psig.
            f.    Discharge temperature in deg F.
            g.    Oil pressure in psig.
            h.    Oil temperature in deg F.
            i.    Voltage at each connection.
            j.    Amperage for each phase.
            k.    The kW input.
            l.    Crankcase heater kW.
            m.    Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                        15990 - 18
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 JUNE 2, 2010


             n.    Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.

       4.    Refrigerant Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

             a.    Oil level.
             b.    Refrigerant level.
             c.    Relief valve setting in psig.
             d.    Unloader set points in psig.
             e.    Percentage of cylinders unloaded.
             f.    Bearing temperatures in deg F.
             g.    Vane position.
             h.    Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F.

  N.   Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by
       plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.

       1.    Unit Data: Include the following:

             a.    Unit identification.
             b.    Location.
             c.    Service.
             d.    Make and size.
             e.    Model and serial numbers.
             f.    Water flow rate in gpm.
             g.    Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
             h.    Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
             i.    Pump rpm.
             j.    Impeller diameter in inches.
             k.    Motor make and frame size.
             l.    Motor horsepower and rpm.
             m.    Voltage at each connection.
             n.    Amperage for each phase.
             o.    Full-load amperage and service factor.
             p.    Seal type.

       2.    Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

             a.    Static head in feet of head or psig.
             b.    Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
             c.    Actual impeller size in inches.
             d.    Full-open flow rate in gpm.
             e.    Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
             f.    Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
             g.    Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
             h.    Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
             i.    Final water flow rate in gpm.
             j.    Voltage at each connection.
             k.    Amperage for each phase.

  O.   Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                          15990 - 19
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                              Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  JUNE 2, 2010


       1.    Unit Data: Include the following:

             a.    Unit identification.
             b.    Location.
             c.    Service.
             d.    Make and type.
             e.    Model and serial numbers.
             f.    Fuel type and input in Btuh.
             g.    Number of passes.
             h.    Ignition type.
             i.    Burner-control types.
             j.    Voltage at each connection.
             k.    Amperage for each phase.

       2.    Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

             a.    Operating pressure in psig.
             b.    Operating temperature in deg F.
             c.    Entering-water temperature in deg F.
             d.    Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
             e.    Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS.
             f.    Safety valve settings in psig.
             g.    High-limit setting in psig.
             h.    Operating-control setting.
             i.    High-fire set point.
             j.    Low-fire set point.
             k.    Voltage at each connection.
             l.    Amperage for each phase.
             m.    Draft fan voltage at each connection.
             n.    Draft fan amperage for each phase.
             o.    Manifold pressure in psig.

  P.   Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

       1.    Report Data: Include the following:

             a.    Instrument type and make.
             b.    Serial number.
             c.    Application.
             d.    Dates of use.
             e.    Dates of calibration.


3.18   ADDITIONAL TESTS

  A.   Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing
       and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
       correct unusual conditions.



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                            15990 - 20
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                                Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                JUNE 2, 2010


  B.   Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
       during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing,
       and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING                                                        15990 - 21
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.                                                            Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                  JUNE 2, 2010




END OF SECTION 15990




TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING         15990 - 22
Scanlon Szynskie Group, Inc.             Aurora, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART I - GENERAL

1.1   EXECUTION OF THE WORK

      A.   These specifications call out certain duties of the Contractor and his Subcontractors.
           They are not intended as a material list of items required by the Contract.

      B.   This division of the specification covers the electrical systems of the project. It
           includes work performed by the electrical trades as well as trades not normally
           considered as electrical trades.

      C.   Provide all items and work indicated on the Drawings and all items and work called
           for in this division of the specification in accordance with the conditions of Division
           One - General Requirements, of the Contract Documents. This includes all
           incidentals, equipment, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools,
           supervision, labor, consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide
           complete systems. Perform start-up and checkout on each item and system to
           provide fully operable systems.

      D.   Comply with all provisions of the Contract Documents including Division 1, General
           Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions of the specifications.

      E.   Certain terms such as "shall, provide, install, complete, start up" are not used in
           some parts of these specifications. This does not indicate that the items shall be
           less than completely installed or that systems shall be less than complete.

      F.   Examine and compare the Electrical Drawings and Specifications with the Drawings
           and Specifications of other trades, and report any discrepancies between them to
           the Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written instructions for changes
           necessary in the work. At time of bid the most stringent requirements must be
           included in said bid. Install and coordinate the electrical work in cooperation with
           other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, make proper provisions
           to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. All changes
           required in the work of the Contractor, caused by his neglect to do so, to be made
           by him at this own expense.

      G.   It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete workable
           system ready for the Owner's operation. Any item not specifically shown on the
           Drawings or called for in the Specifications, but normally required to conform with
           the intent, are to be considered a part of the Contract.

      H.   These Specifications are basically equipment and performance Specifications.
           Actual installations shall be as shown on the Drawings. Installations and details
           shown on the Drawings shall govern where these differ from the Specifications.

      I.   All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be new and unused (temporary
           lighting and power products are excluded) and free from defects. All materials used
           shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc. label provided a standard has been
           established for the material in question.


ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                            16010-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



      J.   All products and materials to be new, clean, free of defects and free of damage and
           corrosion.

      K.   No exclusion from, or limitation in, the symbolism used on the Drawings for electrical
           work or the languages used in the Specifications for electrical work shall be
           interpreted as a reason for omitting the accessories necessary to complete any
           required system or item of equipment.

      L.   The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other
           indications denote that more than one item is referred to.

      M.   Except for conduit, conduit fittings, outlet boxes, wire and cable, all items of
           equipment or material shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout. Multiple
           manufacturers will not be permitted.

1.2   COORDINATION OF THE WORK

      A.   Certain materials will be provided by other trades.          Examine the Contract
           Documents to ascertain these requirements.

      B.   Carefully check space requirements with other trades and the physical confines of
           the area to insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto
           including finished suspended ceilings. Make modifications thereto as required and
           approved.

      C.   Transmit to other trades all information required for work to be provided under their
           respective Sections in ample time for installation.

      D.   Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades
           to insure that all trades have the information necessary so that they may properly
           install all the necessary connections and equipment. Identify all items of work that
           require access so that the ceiling trade will know where to install access doors and
           panels.

      E.   Consult with other trades regarding equipment so that motor controls are of the
           same manufacture.

      F.   Due to the type of the installation, a fixed sequence of operation is required to
           properly install the complete system. Coordinate, project and schedule work with
           other trades in accordance with the construction sequence.

      G.   The locations of lighting fixtures, outlets, panels and other equipment indicated on
           the Drawings are approximately correct, but they are understood to be subject to
           such revision as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is
           installed in consequence of increase or reduction of the number of outlets, or in
           order to meet field conditions or to coordinate with modular requirements of ceilings,
           or to simplify the work, or for other legitimate causes.




ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                           16010-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


     H.    Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, outlets, switches,
           etc., and have precise and definite locations approved by the Architect/Engineer
           before proceeding with the installation.

     I.    The Drawings show only the general run of raceways and approximate location of
           outlets. Any significant changes in location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in
           order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the
           Architect/Engineer and receive his approval before such alterations are made. All
           such modifications shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.

     J.    Obtain from the Architect/Engineer in the field the location of such outlets or
           equipment not definitely located on the Drawings.

     K.    Circuit "tags" in the form of arrows are used where shown to indicate the home runs
           of raceways to electrical distribution points. These tags show the circuits in each
           home run and the panel designation. Show the actual circuit numbers on the
           finished record tracing and on panel directory card. Where circuiting is not
           indicated, Electrical Subcontractor must provide required circuiting in accordance
           with the loading indicated on the drawings and/or as directed.

     L.    The Drawings generally do not indicate the exact number wires in each conduit for
           the branch circuit wiring of fixtures, and outlets, or the actual circuiting. Provide the
           correct wire size and quantity as required by the indicated circuiting and/or circuit
           numbers indicated and control wiring diagrams, if any, specified voltage drop or
           maximum distance limitations, and the applicable requirements of the NEC.

     M.    Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, pull boxes, fixtures, etc. to
           accommodate the work to prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered.
           Determine the exact route and location of each raceway prior to fabrication.

           1.      Right of Way: Lines which pitch have the right-of-way over those which do
                   not pitch. For example: steam, condensate, and plumbing drains normally
                   have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have
                   right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

           2.      Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction to raceways and bus duct
                   and as required maintaining proper head room in pitch of sloping lines
                   whether or not indicated on the Drawings.

     N.    Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional Detail Drawings to
           scale similar to that of the bidding Drawings, prepared on tracing medium of the
           same size as Contract Drawings. With these layouts, coordinate the work with the
           work of other trades. Such detailed work to be clearly identified on the Drawings as
           to the area to which it applies. Submit for review Drawings clearly showing the work
           and its relation to the work of other trades before commencing shop fabrication or
           erection in the field.

     O.    Contractor shall furnish services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be in
           constant charge of all work, and who shall coordinate his work with the work of other
           trades. No work shall be installed before coordinating with other trades.



ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                              16010-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


1.3   EXAMINATION OF SITE

      A.   Prior to the submitting of bids, the Contractor shall visit the site of the job and shall
           familiarize himself with all conditions affecting the proposed installation and shall
           make provisions as to the cost thereof. Failure to comply with the intent of this
           paragraph will in no way relieve the contractor of performing all necessary work
           shown on the Drawings.

1.4   PROGRESS OF WORK

      A.   The Contractor shall order the progress of his work so as to conform to the progress
           of the work of other trades and shall complete the entire installation as soon as the
           conditions of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from the defective or
           ill-timed work performed under this section shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.5   PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

      A.   Ship and store all products and materials in a manner which will protect them from
           damage, weather and entry of debris. If items are damaged, do not install, but take
           immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair. Any such repairs shall be subject
           to review and acceptance of the Architect/Engineer.

      B.   Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer's
           unopened container fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type,
           class, grade, size and color.

      C.   Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Store materials suitably sheltered
           from the elements, but readily accessible for inspection by the Architect/Engineer
           until installed. Store all items subject to moisture damage in dry, heated spaces.

1.6   EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES

      A.   Establish sizes and location of the various concrete bases required. Coordinate with
           General Contractor and provide all necessary anchor bolts together with templates
           for holding these bolts in position.

      B.   Provide supports, hangers and auxiliary structural members required for support of
           the work.

      C.   Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of raceways through structural, masonry and
           concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection
           of each raceway and bus duct passing through building surfaces.

      D.   Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts.
           Groups or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles,
           channels, or bars. Prefabricated steel channels providing a high degree of mounting
           flexibility, such as those manufactured by Kindorf, Globe-Strutt and Unistrut, may be
           used for mounting arrays of equipment.

1.7   EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING



ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                              16010-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


      A.   Provide excavation for the work. Excavate all material encountered, to the depths
           indicated on the Drawings or required. Remove from the site excavated materials
           not required or suitable for backfill. Provide grading as may be necessary to prevent
           surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. Remove any water
           accumulating therein. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be necessary for the
           protection of the work and for the safety of personnel.

      B.   Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade
           bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work
           on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is
           encountered, do not excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations
           are required, excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of four inches below the trench
           depths indicated on the Drawings or required. Backfill overdepths in the rock
           excavation and unauthorized overdepths with loose, granular, moist earth,
           thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level as specified by the Architect.
           Whenever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work, as
           determined by the Architect/Engineer, is encountered in the bottom of the trench,
           remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with
           coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.

      C.   Excavate trenches for utilities to a depth that will provide the following minimum
           depths to cover from existing grade or from indicated finished grade, whichever is
           lower, unless otherwise specifically shown.

           1.      Secondary electric service: 2 feet (minimum)

           2.      Telephone service: 2 feet (minimum).

1.8   BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES

      A.   Do not backfill trenches until all required tests have been performed and the
           installation observed by the Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other
           sections of these specifications. Deposit in 6 inch layers and thoroughly and
           carefully tamp until the work has a cover of not less than 1 foot. Backfill and tamp
           remainder of trench at 12 inch intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished
           surface.

1.9   CUTTING, PATCHING, ETC.

      A.   The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Where cutting, channeling, chasing
           or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for the
           proper installation, support or anchorage of raceway, outlets or other equipment, the
           work shall be carefully done. Any damage to the building, piping, equipment or
           defaced finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc. shall be repaired by skilled
           mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner.

      B.   The Contractor shall do no cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of unfinished
           masonry, tile, etc., unless he first obtains permission from the Architect/Engineer. If
           permission is granted, the Contractor shall perform this work in a manner approved
           by the Architect/Engineer.



ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                              16010-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010


       C.   Where conduits, outlet, junction or pull boxes are mounted on a painted surface, or
            a surface to be painted, they shall be painted to match the surface. Wherever
            support channels are cut, the bare metal shall be cold galvanized.

       D.   Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs will
            be provided by the various trades in their respective materials. The trade requiring
            them to properly locate such openings shall be responsible for any cutting and
            patching caused by the neglect to do so.

1.10   NOMINAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)

       A.   Unless otherwise noted or required because of special conditions, locate outlets as
            follows:

            1.     Heights listed are from finished floor to center of device. Verify exact
                   locations with the Architect/Engineer before installation.

                   Convenience and signal outlets: 18 inches unless otherwise noted.

                   Lighting Switches: 48 inches

                   Disconnect Switches and Motor Controllers: 60 inches

                   Wall Telephone Outlets: 48 inches

                   Above counter convenience outlets: 42 inches

                   Strobes: No less than 80" and no greater than 96", and to be consistent
                          throughout building.

                   Horn/Strobes: No less than 80" and no greater than 96", and to be
                          consistent throughout building.

                   Mini-Horns: No less than 80" and no greater than 96", and to be consistent
                          throughout building.

                   Doorbell: 48 inches

                   Emergency call patient station: 48 inches

                   Emergency call pull cord station: 39 inches

                   Card key access reader: 48 inches

                   Fire alarm pull station: 48 inches

                   Disposal switch: 42 inches

                   Light fixtures: Refer to luminaire schedule and drawings.

1.11   DEMOLITION AND CONTINUANCE OF EXISTING SERVICES


ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                          16010-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



       A.   All existing electrical services not specifically indicated to be removed or altered
            shall remain as they presently exist.

       B.   Should any existing services, etc., interfere with new construction, the Contractor
            shall (after obtaining written approval from the Architect/Engineer) alter or reroute
            such existing equipment to facilitate new construction.

       C.   Under no circumstances shall existing services, etc., be terminated or altered unless
            deemed necessary by the Architect/Engineer or specified herein; also, prior to
            altering any existing situation, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing giving
            two (2) weeks advance notice of planned alteration.

       D.   It shall be solely the Contractor's responsibility to guarantee continuity of present
            facilities (with respect to damage or alteration due to new construction) and any
            unauthorized alteration to existing equipment shall be corrected by the Contractor to
            the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction at the Contractor's expense.

1.12   CLEANING UP

       A.   Contractor shall take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc.,
            resulting from the installation of his work. Contractor shall remove from the
            premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and keep the premises clean, subject to
            the Architect/Engineer's instructions, which shall be promptly carried out.

       B.   Contractor shall clean all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project.

       C.   All switchboards, panelboards, wireways, trench ducts, cabinets, enclosures, etc
            shall be thoroughly vacuumed clean prior to energizing equipment and at the
            completion of the project. Equipment shall be opened for observation by the
            Architect/Engineer as required.

1.13   WATERPROOFING


       A.   Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs,
            machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary,
            perform it prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required.
             Advise the Architect/Engineer and obtain written permission before penetrating any
            waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown on the Drawings.

       B.   If Contractor penetrates any walls or surfaces after they have been waterproofed, he
            shall restore the waterproof integrity of that surface at his own expense and as
            directed by the Architect/Engineer.

1.14   SUPPORTS

       A.   Support work in accordance with the best industry practice and the following.




ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                              16010-7
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


       B.   Include supporting frames and racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for
            work indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of
            supporting the weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets.

       C.   Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical mounting,
            which is required in a free standing position.

       D.   Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty
            support system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and
            adequately braced to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to
            assure a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment mounted on them.

       E.   Nothing, (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on
            electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support, except that threaded hub type
            fittings having a gross volume not in excess of 100 cubic inches may be supported
            by heavy wall conduit, where the conduit in turn is securely supported from the
            structure within five inches of the fittings on two opposite sides.

       F.   Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath,
            plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling).

       G.   Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, {bus duct}, equipment, etc., so
            that loading will not exceed allowable loadings of structure.

1.15   FASTENINGS

       A.   Fasten electrical equipment and devices to building structure in accordance with the
            best industry practice and the following.

       B.   As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 100
            pounds or less, fasten to building elements of:

            1.      Wood - with wood screws.

            2.      Concrete and solid masonry - with bolts and expansion shields.

            3.      Hollow construction - with toggle bolts.

            4.      Solid metal - with machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs.

            5.      Steel decking or subfloor - with fastenings as specified below for applied
                    weights in excess of 100 pounds.

       C.   As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to building attachment points
            exceeds 100 pounds, but is 300 pounds or less, conform to the following:

            1.      At concrete slabs utilize 24" x 24" x 1/2" steel fishplates on top with through
                    bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and routed flush with the top
                    of slab screed line, where no fill is to be applied.




ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                             16010-8
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       AUGUST 9, 2010


                2.      At steel decking or subfloor for all fastenings, utilize through bolts or
                        threaded rods. The tops of bolts and rods shall be set at least one inch
                        below the top fill screed line and routed in. Suitable washers shall be used
                        under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or subfloor
                        manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or
                        subfloor such hangers shall be utilized.

        D.      Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 300 pounds, coordinate
                with and obtain approval of Architect and conform to the following:

                Utilize suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural
                         steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be
                         suitably welded or clamped to building steel. Utilize threaded rods or bolts to
                         attach to bridging members.

        Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include
               floor anchor fastenings in all cases.

        For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the
               building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary
               channel or angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1     If products and materials are specified or indicated on the Drawings for a specific item or
        system, use those products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in either of
        the above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of Shop Drawings
        where Shop Drawings are required or as approved in writing where Shop Drawings are not
        required.

2.2     All equipment capacities, etc., are listed for job site operating conditions. All equipment
        sensitive to altitudes or ambient temperatures to be derated and method of derating shown
        on Shop Drawings. Where operating conditions shown differ from the laboratory test
        conditions, the equipment to be derated and the method of derating shown on Shop
        Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Follow manufacturer's instructions for installing, connecting and adjusting all equipment. Provide
       one copy of such instructions to the Architect/Engineer before installing any equipment.
       Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during any work on the equipment.
       Provide all special supports, connections, wiring, accessories, etc.

Use mechanics skilled in their trade for all work.

Keep all items protected before and after installation. Clean up all debris.

Perform all tests required by local authorities in addition to tests specified herein, such as life safety
       systems.




ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                                    16010-9
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                         Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


Applicable equipment and materials to be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and Manufactured in
       accordance with ASME, NEMA, ANSI or IEEE standards and as approved by local
       authorities having jurisdiction.

Before commencing work, examine all adjoining, underlying, etc., work on which this work is in any
       way dependent for perfect workmanship and report any condition which prevents
       performance of first class work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing conditions
       to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered.


                                       END OF SECTION




ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS                                                            16010-10
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16020 - WORK INCLUDED

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    DESCRIPTION

       General: Provide the work included in accordance with the Contract Documents.

       Provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appliances, auxiliaries, services, hoisting,
              scaffolding, support, supervision, and Project Record Documents, and perform all
              operations for the furnishing and installing of the complete electrical system,
              including but not limited to the work described hereinafter. The work shall meet or
              exceed the latest codes, regulations and requirements of the Authority Having
              Jurisdiction.

       The electrical work is shown schematically on the Drawings to indicate the general system
              arrangement and configuration. The work of this Division shall include coordination
              with the work of other Divisions of the Specifications and the Contract Documents so
              as to provide a complete and operational system capable of being readily operated
              and maintained, including approved re-arrangement of the systems and equipment
              and re-routing of distribution services to enable the complete system to fit within the
              confines of the allotted electrical spaces, all to the satisfaction of the
              Architect/Engineer or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

       The work includes, but is not limited to the following:

               Equipment supports and miscellaneous steel for electrical equipment.

               Vibration isolation for the electrical installation.

               Temporary power and lighting system.

               Exterior lighting.

               Distribution feeders.

               Complete 120/208 volt light and power distribution system, including standby
                     system.

               Lighting fixtures, lamps, convenience outlet systems, and miscellaneous wiring
                       devices.

               Motor power wiring.

               Miscellaneous electrical equipment and system, unless otherwise noted.

               Balancing loads.

               Grounding system.


WORK INCLUDED                                                                               16020-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                       AUGUST 9, 2010



               Mechanical system connections.

               Sealing of sleeves and other electrical openings.

               Electrical heaters: baseboard, cabinet and unit types.

               Lighting control system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    NOT USED


                                      END OF SECTION




WORK INCLUDED                                                                  16020-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                       Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16025 - CODES AND FEES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    DESCRIPTION

       A.      General: Comply with Codes in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2    CODES

       A.      The electrical installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of
               the Authority Having Jurisdiction, OSHA, NEC and the rules, regulations and
               requirements of the power company supplying power to the buildings.

       B.      The electrical installation and the Contractor shall comply fully with all city, county
               and state laws, ordinances and regulations applicable to electrical installations.

       C.      All equipment shall be equal to or exceed the minimum requirements of NEMA, and
               IEEE, and UL.

       D.      Should any change in Drawings or specifications be required to comply with
               governmental regulations, the Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer prior to
               execution of the work. The work shall be carried out according to the requirements
               of such code in accordance with the instruction of the Architect/Engineer and at no
               additional cost to the Owner.

FEES

       All local fees and permits and services of inspection authorities shall be obtained and paid
               for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with local utility
               companies with respect to their services. Contractor shall exclude from his bid, any
               costs to be incurred relative to power service (primary and/or secondary) and
               telephone service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    NOT USED


                                        END OF SECTION




CODES AND FEES                                                                               16025-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO            AUGUST 9, 2010




CODES AND FEES                      16025-2
AE Design Group, Inc.            Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16030 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

      General: Provide Project Record Documents of Electrical Work in accordance with the
            Contract Documents.

      During construction keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown
             on Drawings and that which is actually installed. Keep this record set of prints at job
             site for review by the Architect/Engineer.

      Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the Architect a complete hardcopy set of
            construction documents. Enter therein, in a neat and accurate manner, a complete
            record of all revisions to the original Drawings as actually installed. The cost for
            transparencies and for making required change shall be borne by this Contractor.
            Submit one (1) set prints of these revised drawings to the Architect/Engineer for
            review. After review by the Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner.

      Provide as-built panel schedules upon completion of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1   Provide in the main electrical service room a framed copy under glass of the appropriate
      single line riser diagram as reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. Media shall be a high
      quality presentation-type.


                                      END OF SECTION




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                   16030-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO            AUGUST 9, 2010




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS            16030-2
AE Design Group, Inc.            Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16035 - REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT

      A.   Wherever the word "for approval" or "approved" are used in regard to
           manufactured specialties, or wherever it is desired to substitute a different make
           or type of apparatus for that specified, submit all information pertinent to the
           adequacy and adaptability of the proposed apparatus and secure
           Architect/Engineer's acceptance before apparatus is ordered.

      B.   All requests for substitution of materials or equipment shall be made by the
           Contractor within thirty (30) days after the execution of the Owner/Contractor
           Agreement. No requests for substitution will be accepted prior to execution of
           the Owner/Contractor agreement or from anyone other than the successful
           Contractor.

      C.   Wherever operating results such as quantity delivered, or the like are specified,
           or a definite make and size of apparatus is specified, for which such quantities
           are readily determinable - the make and size of apparatus which is proposed
           using must conform substantially (in regard to the operating results) to the
           quantities specified or implied. Same shall apply to important dimensions
           relating to operation of apparatus in coordination with the rest of the system, or to
           properly fitting it into available space conditions. Any substitution of equipment
           or apparatus shall include all necessary revisions, as required to complete the
           installation.

      D.   Acceptance of substitutions for equipment specified herein will not be given
           merely upon submission of manufacturers' names and will be given only after
           receipt of complete and satisfactory performance data covering a complete range
           of operating conditions in tabular and graphical form. Furnish complete and
           satisfactory information relative to equipment dimensions, weight, etc.
           Acceptance of all equipment specified or shown on the Drawings, or substitutions
           submitted for that specified or shown on the Drawings, will be granted if such
           equipment, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, conforms to the performance
           requirements, space conditions, weight requirements and quality requirements.
           Any additional construction and design costs incurred as a result of any accepted
           substitution shall be borne by this Contractor. The opinion and judgement of the
           Architect/Engineer shall be final, conclusive and binding.

1.2   SUBMITTAL LIST

      A.   Within thirty (30) days after date of execution of Owner/Contractor Agreement,
           submit for review and acceptance a list of all material and equipment
           manufacturers whose products are proposed, as well as names of all
           subcontractors whom this trade proposes to employ.




REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES                                                                16035-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010



     B.    Any requests for substitutions of equipment or materials must be submitted and
           returned prior to submitting the Submittal List. Only specified or accepted
           manufacturers or suppliers shall appear on the Submittal List.

     C.    The complete Submittal List must be reviewed and accepted by the
           Architect/Engineer prior to submittal of shop drawings. No shop drawings will be
           processed without an accepted Submittal List.

     D.    The Submittal List shall include all material, systems and equipment as listed
           herein.

SHOP DRAWINGS

     A.    Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for materials, systems and
           equipment as listed herein, including locations and sizes of all openings in floor
           decks, walls and floors.

     B.    The work described in any shop drawing submission shall be carefully checked
           for all clearances (including those required for maintenance and servicing), field
           conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and proper coordination with
           all trades on the job. Each submitted shop drawing shall include a certification
           that all related job conditions have been checked and that no conflict exists.

     C.    All drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of field requirements to
           allow ample time for checking and resubmitting as may be required. All
           submittals shall be complete and contain all required and detailed information.

     D.    Acceptance of any submitted data or shop drawings for material, equipment
           apparatus, devices, arrangement and layout shall not relieve Contractors from
           responsibility of furnishing same of proper dimensions and weight, capabilities,
           sizes, quantity, quality and installation details to efficiently perform the
           requirements and intent of the Contract. Such acceptance shall not relieve
           Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort
           on submitted data or shop drawings.

     E.    Each shop drawing shall contain job title and reference to the applicable drawing
           and specification article.

     F.    Individual shop drawing submittals shall be provided for each specific material,
           system or equipment as identified herein. Submittals provided in other than this
           manner will be returned without review.

     G.    Each equipment submittal shall substantiate conformance to the specification by
           supplying a document indicating equipment submitted meets or exceeds each
           line item in the specification or exception taken. Submittals provided without this
           information will be returned without review.

     H.    All nameplate data shall be complete at time of equipment submittals - refer to
           Section 16060 for identification requirements.


REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES                                                                16035-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                            AUGUST 9, 2010



     I.    For each room or area of the building containing switchboards, panelboards,
           motor control centers, transformers, emergency generators, substations,
           dimming cabinets, sound systems cabinets, bus ducts, telephone backboards,
           signal system backboards, fire alarm terminal cabinets, fire alarm control panels,
           consoles, etc. the following is required to be submitted for review and acceptance
           at the time of the equipment submittal.

           1.     Floor Plans

                  Plan reviews (including sections and elevations when requested) for the
                  equipment indicated in the exact location in which it is intended to be
                  installed. These plans shall be of a scale not less than 1/4" = 1'-0". They
                  shall be prepared in the following manner.

                  a.     Indicated the physical boundaries of the space including door
                         swings and ceiling heights and ceiling types (as applicable).

                  b.     Illustrate all electrical equipment proposed to be contained therein.
                          Include top and bottom elevations of all electrical equipment. The
                         drawings must be prepared utilizing the dimensions contained in
                         the individual equipment submittals.

                  c.     Illustrate all other equipment therein such as conduits, detectors,
                         luminaires, ducts, registers, pullboxes, wireways, structural
                         elements.

                  d.     Note the operating weight of each piece of equipment.

                  e.     Note the heat release from each piece of electrical equipment in
                         terms of BTU per hour. This information shall be that which is
                         supplied by the respective manufacturers.

                  f.     Illustrate all concrete pads, curbs, etc.

                  g.     Note all code clearances from all equipment by dimensions.

                  h.     Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for
                         each piece of equipment (as per each respective manufacturer's
                         recommendation).

                  i.     On engine generator layout plans, indicate position of radiator and
                         direction of air movement and provide manufacturer's signed
                         statement that engine will operate within approved temperature
                         ranges as shown on the plans.

           2.     Equipment Removal Routes

                  Provide in conjunction with the above, a set of reproducible documents
                         from the then current Contract Documents indicating the methods
                         of equipment removal for all major pieces of equipment.

REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES                                                              16035-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                             Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010




                    Indicate on floor plans by means of arrows, the complete path for
                            equipment removal.

                    Where equipment will be required to be hung temporarily from a slab or
                          beam, note same on the submission including the weight of the
                          equipment to be hung and the weight of the hoisting equipment.

                    Note all heights of conduits, ductwork, link beams, doorways, transoms,
                           piping, etc. in the proposed path assuring that adequate
                           headroom is provided.

      Shop Drawing Submittals shall be provided for the applicable equipment.

           Maintenance Manuals (16045)
           Raceways and Boxes (16110)
           Wire and Cable (16120)
           Fire Seals (16122)
           Wiring Devices (16140)
           Panelboards (16160)
           Disconnect Switches (16170)
           Fuses (16181)
           TVSS (16400)
           Emergency Generator (16403)
           Switchboards (16440)
           Grounding (16450)
           Automatic Transfer Switches (16490)
           Luminaires and Accessories (16500)
           Lightning Protection Systems (16601)
           Fire Alarm System (16740)
           Lighting Control (16930)
PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1   NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1   NOT USED

                                    END OF SECTION




REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES                                                                16035-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16040 - GUARANTEE

PART 1 - GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

       General: Provide a guarantee in accordance with the Contract Documents.

       Submit a single guarantee stating that all portions of the work are in accordance with
             Contract requirements. Guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and
             workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the
             Owner, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified
             herein, such longer term to apply. Within 24 hours after notification, correct any
             deficiencies which occur during the guarantee period at no additional cost to Owner,
             all to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect/Engineer. Obtain similar
             guarantees from subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and subtrade specialists.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    NOT USED


                                      END OF SECTION




GUARANTEE                                                                                16040-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO            AUGUST 9, 2010




GUARANTEE                           16040-2
AE Design Group, Inc.            Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16045 - MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.     General: Provide maintenance manuals in accordance with the Contract
             Documents.

1.2   SUBMITTALS

      A.     Provide five (5) copies of each manual.

      B.     Manuals to be 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches size in hard back 3-ring loose leaf binders.
             Use more than one volume if required; do not overfill binders.

      C.     Submit one (1) copy to Architect/Engineer. After review and acceptance assemble
             (4) remaining copies.

      D.     Manuals to be completed and in Owner's hand prior to turning building over to
             Owner and at least 10 days prior to instruction to operating personnel.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1   MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE

      A.     General: Provide manufacturers literature on all items of equipment and
             components as regularly published by the respective manufacturers for proper
             preventative and comprehensive maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1   Provide maintenance manuals including but not limited to the following:

      A.     Alphabetical list of all system components, with the name, address, and 24-hour
             phone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first
             year of operation.

      B.     Operating instructions for complete system including:

             1.     Normal starting, operating, and shut-down.

             2.     Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment.

             3.     Summer and winter special procedures, if any.

             4.     Day and night special procedures, if any.

      C.     Maintenance instruction including:


MAINTENANCE MANUALS                                                                     16045-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



               1.      Proper lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment, and date when
                       lubricated.
               2.      This shall be a separate list in addition to manufacturer's data.

               3.      Necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule.

       Manufacturer's data on each piece of equipment including:

               Installation instructions.

               Drawings and specifications.

               Parts list, including recommended items to be stocked.

               Table of lamps installed with recommended replacement and purchase source.

               Complete wiring diagrams.

               Marked or changed prints locating all concealed parts and all variations from the
                     original system design.

               Test and inspection certificates.

Provide specific equipment data including but not limited to all materials and equipment listed in
       Section 16035-1.03. In addition, include information for Raceways and Boxes (16110).


                                            END OF SECTION




MAINTENANCE MANUALS                                                                       16045-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


SECTION 16055 - TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.     General: Provide temporary lighting and power in accordance with the Contract
             Documents.

      B.      Related Work Specified in Division 16000

             1.      Electrical General Provisions - Section 16010

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.     Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
             with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

             1.      Local electrical utility company – Colorado Springs Utilities.

             2.      Federal Public Law PL-91-596 cited as the Williams-Steifer Occupational
                     Safety and Health Act of 1970.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the Owner for the new
      installation of temporary lighting and power services tailored for this project and the setting
      of temporary meters in accordance with the Utility Company's requirements. He shall pay
      for the installation and maintenance of all temporary light and power wiring, including, but
      not limited to conduits, wire, switches, fuse boxes, receptacles, distribution panel boards,
      fused disconnect switches, ground fault interruption equipment, fixtures, lamps, fuses and
      any other incidental material and/or equipment required to provide efficient illumination and
      power as required by O.S.H.A. and all other authorities having jurisdiction for all areas of the
      site where work will be performed by the Contractor, his subcontractors, or any other
      contractors.

2.2   Furnish and install one complete set of 100 watt lamps, including those required for trailers
      and/or temporary offices. He shall also furnish and install one complete set of fuses for
      temporary light and power services, as required. The replacement of burned out and
      broken lamps shall be carried out by those using the trailers and/or offices.

2.3   Temporary power circuits and outlets, etc. shall be provided in accordance with the power
      requirements of the various horsepower ratings of the equipment to be installed under all
      contracts and for temporary motors, elevators, etc. Temporary power required for motor
      operated tools and appliances to be used by various contractors in construction work, and
      not to be a part of the permanent equipment shall be provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER                                                                 16055-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


3.1   Irrespective of the working hours for the electricians, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain
      and pay the entire regular and overtime labor cost of keeping the temporary light and power
      system energized from a period of 15 minutes before the established starting time of the
      building trade which starts work earliest to a period of 15 minutes after the established
      stopping time of the trade which stops work latest. This shall apply to every working day of
      the week during the life of the contract, unless otherwise directed, or until such time that the
      maintenance of the temporary light and power system is no longer required by reason of the
      activation of and use of the permanent light and power systems.

3.2   Should this Contractor or any contractor require temporary light or power, or both, before or
      after the hours set forth in the preceding paragraphs, this Contractor or other contractors
      shall pay the extra cost of keeping the systems energized and in serviceable condition.

3.3   Remove the temporary light and power systems, when directed. This Contractor shall
      replace and make good all damage to the permanent parts. Under no circumstances shall
      temporary wiring be left in finished hung ceiling space.

3.4   When the permanent lighting and power systems are installed and operational, this
      Contractor shall make the change-over. The cost of making the change-over of the
      electrical services from the temporary lines to service from permanent lines shall be borne
      by this Contractor.


                                       END OF SECTION




TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER                                                                 16055-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16060 - IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    DESCRIPTION

       A.      General: Provide fixed identification of all distribution equipment and conductors in
               accordance with the Contract Documents.

       B.      Related Work Specified in Division 16000

               1.       Wire and Cable - Section 16120

               2.       Panelboards - Section 16160

               3.       Disconnect Switches - Section 16170

               4.       TVSS - Section 16400

               5.       Switchboards - Section 16440

               6.       Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500

               7.       Fire Alarm and Detection Systems - 16721

               8.       Lighting Control - Section 16930

1.2    STANDARDS

       A.      Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
               with the latest recommendations of the following.

               1.       Industry standards shall apply.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be black bakelite plates with white engraved
       upper case letters enclosed by white border on beveled edge.

2.2    Nameplates for equipment supplied by the emergency system shall be red bakelite with
       white lettering.

2.3    All nameplates must be engraved and must be secured with rivets, brass or cadmium plate
       screws. The use of Dynamo type or the like is unacceptable.

2.4    Lettering heights unless otherwise noted must be as follows:

              Items                           Lettering Height

       Switchboards & Unit Substations                2"

IDENTIFICATION                                                                             16060-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



       Panelboards & Load Centers                    1/2"
       Feeder Switches                               1/4"
       Disconnect Switches                           1/2"
       Feeder Switches (Fuse Identification)         1/4"
       Wall Plates                                   1/8"
       TVSS Cabinet                                  1/4"

2.5    Cable tags must be flameproof secured with flameproof non-metallic cord.

2.6    Nameplate inscriptions must bear the name and number of equipment to which they are
       attached as indicated on the Drawings. The engineer reserves the right to make
       modifications in the inscription as necessary.

2.7    The Engineer reserves the right to request additional nameplates at time of review of shop
       drawings and upon site observations. These shall be furnished at no additional cost to the
       Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    SWITCHBOARDS, SUBSTATIONS MULTIPLE METER CENTERS, AND MOTOR
       CONTROL CENTERS

       A.      Furnish and install a master nameplate for each switchboard, substation, multiple
               meter center and motor control center engraved with the equipment identification
               indicated on the Drawings. Mount at top of incoming section.

       B.      Provide on each main switch an identifying nameplate. Where multiple mains are
               employed each switch shall be numbered. Inscription shall be "main switch" or
               "main switch no. 1" et al.

3.2    PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS

       A.      Furnish and install a nameplate for each panelboard and load center engraved with
               the identification indicated on the Drawings. Mount at top of panel.

       B.      After installations are complete, provide and mount under sturdy transparent shield
               in the directory frame of each panel door, a neat, accurate and carefully typed
               directory properly identifying the lighting, receptacles, outlets, and equipment each
               overcurrent device controls.

       C.      Include on directory the panel or load center identification, the cable and raceway
               size of panel feeder, and the feeder origination point.

3.3    DISCONNECT SWITCHES

       A.      Furnish and install a nameplate for each disconnect switch engraved with the
               equipment designation which the disconnect serves.

3.4    MOTOR CONTROLLERS


IDENTIFICATION                                                                             16060-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



       A.      Furnish and install a nameplate for each motor controller or combination motor
               controller for both individual motor controllers and those in a motor control center,
               etc. Engraving must indicate the motor served and the type of service (eg. AC-8 -
               1st floor supply, EF-2 - electric closet exhaust).

3.5    BUS DUCTS

       A.      Furnish and install nameplates for bus ducts engraved with bus duct designation.
               Install at each bus duct in every electrical closet and on horizontal runs at not less
               than 50' on center.

3.6    FEEDER SWITCHES

       A.      Furnish and install for each feeder switch including, but not limited to those in
               switchboards, those in switch and fuse panelboards, those take-offs at bus ducts,
               those in motor control centers, those in multiple meter center, etc, two (2)
               nameplates as follows.

               1.       The first nameplate must be white background with red lettering. Engraved
                        with the words "REPLACE ONLY WITH                   FUSE". Engrave with
                        the proper fuse trade named and ampere rating (i.e. Bussman LPS-R 100).

               2.       The second nameplate shall indicate the load served, the size and type of
                        cable and raceway example:

                        LP-4, 5, 6
                        4#500 MCM-THW-CU-3-1/2"C.

3.7    REMOTE SMOKE DETECTOR LAMPS AND TEST STATIONS

       A.      Furnish and install a nameplate on each remote smoke detector lamp and/or test
               station. Engraving must indicate the location of the device to which the lamp is
               connected as approved by the Engineer.

3.8    SWITCHES

       A.      Furnish and install an engraved nameplate for each switch controlling loads which
               are not local to the switch. Engraving shall be as directed by the Engineer.

3.9    PULLBOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE TERMINATIONS

       A.      Furnish and install cable tags on each cable which enters a pullbox, enclosure,
               switchboard and at terminations. Mark tags with type written inscription noting the
               load served, type and size of cable and the overcurrent device protecting the cable.

3.10   FREEZE PROTECTION

       A.      Install decal type labels on each pipe which is provided with freeze protection.

       B.      Labels shall be inscribed "CAUTION -- ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING"

IDENTIFICATION                                                                              16060-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010




       C.      Affix labels to the thermal insulation not more than 25' on center but not less than
               every length of pipe.

3.11   FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINETS

       A.      Furnish and install on each fire alarm terminal cabinet an approved nameplate.

       B.      Nameplates shall indicate floor and where multiple terminal cabinets are installed a
               prime designation for each cabinet (e.g. FATC-1B).

3.12   CAPPING AND STAKING

       A.      Wherever raceways are for future use and are terminated outside of the structure,
               stake the location with a 2' long 1" x 1" wooden stake having a conspicuous color
               flag.

       B.      Provide metal markers inserted into 8" D x 12" concrete ballast at all raceway
               terminations exterior to the structure. Inserts must state the date the raceway was
               installed, the size of the raceway and the point of the raceway termination.

3.13   LUMINAIRES

       A.      Where connected to other than 120 volt circuit, provide each fluorescent or high
               intensity discharge fixture with the ballast voltage stenciled on the ballast cover in
               letters not less than 1/2 inch high.

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION CABINETS (TVSS)

       Provide nameplate on TVSS cabinet or box indicating category A, B, or C. Type of
              connection,
              i.e. (L-G), (L-L), (N-G), (L-N).


                                        END OF SECTION




IDENTIFICATION                                                                              16060-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16065 - TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    General: Complete testing of equipment and systems shall be provided throughout
            in accordance with contract Documents.

      B.    Related Work Specified in Division 16000

            1.     Codes and Fees - Section 16025

            2.     Wire and Cable - Section 16120

            3.     Individual Motor Controllers - Section 16155

            4.     Packaged Engine Generator System - Section 16403

            5.     Switchboards - Section 16440

            6.     Grounding Systems - Section 16450

            7.     Luminaires and Accessories - Section 16500

            8.     Fire Alarm and Detection System - Section 16721

            9.     Lighting Control - Sections 16930

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.    Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents comply with
            the latest applicable provisions and the latest recommendations of the following.

            1.     Industry standards shall apply except as otherwise specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   GENERAL

      A.    Provide all labor, premium labor and materials required by shop and field testing as
            specified in the Contract Documents and as required by the authorities having
            jurisdiction.

2.2   SYSTEMS

      A.    The following systems are to be tested, inspected and certified.

            1.     Wire and Cable (600 Volts and Below)


TESTING, ACCEPTANCES, AND CERTIFICATIONS                                               16065-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



                  a.       Inspect all splices and terminations and make mechanically and
                           electrically tight during a fifteen (15) day period immediately prior to
                           final acceptance of the work.

                  b.       Perform standard 600 volt insulation test with "megger" tester on all
                           feeders. Submit certification to the Architect/Engineer.

                  c.       Minimum Test Requirements:

                                   1.      Wire and cable rated for 600 volts shall be tested with
                                           a 500 V megohmmeter and shall test at least 25
                                           megohms for lengths less than 1000 feet.

            2.    Motors

                  a.       Test all motors under load and verify that motor rotation is correct.

            3.    Emergency Power System

                  a.       Factory Testing

                                   1.      Prior to shipment of the engine-generator set from the
                                           factory, a certified load test shall be performed and
                                           the results submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
                                           approval before shipment of the unit. The test shall
                                           verify the proper operation of all alarms and shut
                                           down circuits.

                                   2.      The test shall also demonstrate compliance with the
                                           set performance criteria as specified herein.

                                   3.      Testing shall be performed as follows:

                                           In a period of four (4) hours with a loading of 25, 50,
                                                   75, 100 and 110 percent of rated load. Step
                                                   loading procedure shall be utilized (i.e. 25
                                                   percent first hour, 50 percent second hour,
                                                   etc.).

                                           Testing shall be under rated load and rated power
                                                  factor.   Testing at unity power factor
                                                  (resistance banks only) is not acceptable.

                  b.       Field Testing

                                   1.      After completion of the installation, the Contractor
                                           shall arrange with the Architect/Engineer for a load
                                           test. The unit shall be required to start-up and accept
                                           full load within 10 seconds. The unit shall continue to
                                           operate for not less than four (4) hours at 100 percent

TESTING, ACCEPTANCES, AND CERTIFICATIONS                                                  16065-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010



                                       rated load and power factor. The test shall also
                                       include demonstrating that all alarms and shut down
                                       devices are functioning properly. The Contractor
                                       shall be responsible for securing all temporary
                                       load-banks, etc. required for the tests.

                               2.      This Contractor shall supply all fuel for the testing.
                                       Upon acceptance by the Architect/Engineer, the day
                                       tank and main fuel oil tank shall be filled to capacity
                                       after testing.

            4.    Switchboards and Motor Control Centers

                  a.    At the completion of the work each switchboard and motor control
                        center shall be field tested in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.
                         Tests to be conducted by the service organization of the
                        manufacturer.

                  b.    Tests shall include the following:

                               1.      Operation of each disconnecting means under load.

                               2.      Operation of all metering equipment.

                               3.      Operation of all alarm devices.

                               4.      Operation of all key interlocks.

                  c.    The manufacturer shall observe all cable bracing both incoming and
                        outgoing and certify that same is provided in accordance with the
                        manufacturers recommendations.

                  d.    The ground fault system shall be set at the level specified by the
                        switchboard supplier. Each system shall be tested by checking
                        coordination between ground fault and phase to ground fault of a
                        1P-20 ampere lighting branch circuit.

                  e.    Bus work shall be retorqued in accordance with manufacturer's
                        recommendations. Submit certification of same.

                  f.    After installation and building occupation, a complete infrared scan
                        shall be made of all current carrying parts to detect loose or poor
                        electrical connections. All connections shall be tightened until
                        satisfactory scan results have been obtained.

            5.    Fire Alarm and Detection System

                  a.    All wiring must be inspected and tested to insure that there are not
                        grounds, opens or shorts. The minimum allowable resistance
                        between any two conductors and ground is ten (10) megohms as

TESTING, ACCEPTANCES, AND CERTIFICATIONS                                              16065-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                              Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



                         measured with a 500 volt megger after all conduit, conductors,
                         detector bases, etc. have been installed, but before the detector
                         devices are plugged into the bases or end-of-line devices installed.

                  b.     The Contractor must perform all electrical and mechanical tests
                         required by the equipment manufacturer's form. All test and report
                         cost must be in the Contract price. A checkout report is to be
                         prepared by the technician and submitted in triplicate with the
                         equipment manufacturer. The report is to include, but not limited to:

                                1.      A complete list of installed and wired devices.

                                2.      Indication that all equipment is properly installed and
                                        functions and conforms with these specifications.

                                3.      Tests of individual zones as applicable.

                                4.      Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number
                                        for each measured in place.

                                5.      Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization
                                        detector as measured in place.

                                6.      Response time on detectors.

                  c.     Contractor shall submit a certified report indicating the following:


                                Operating all manual stations and all detectors that can be
                                       reset.

                                Verifying line supervision of each initiating and indicating
                                        circuit.

                                Verifying the operation of each initiating circuit.

                                Verifying the operation of all indicating devices.

                                Verifying the operation of all alarm initiated functions.

                                Verifying full operation of the F.A.C.P.

            6.    Ballasts

                  a.     Submit manufacturer's certification that ballasts and transformers for
                         discharge type lamps comply with the latest energy code
                         specifications which have been issued.

            7.    Air Handling Plenums and Luminaires


TESTING, ACCEPTANCES, AND CERTIFICATIONS                                                 16065-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010



                       a.      For recessed luminaires to be mounted in ceilings utilized as air
                               handling plenums, submit manufacturer's certification that they,
                               together with external connections, are suitable for the purpose.

               8.      Emergency Battery System, Packs and Quartz Standby Units

                       a.      Each emergency battery pack and system shall be shown to operate
                               satisfactory. This shall be accomplished by the use of the unit
                               mounted test switch as one test. The second test shall be
                               interruption of power to the unit.

                       b.      Quartz standby lamps in H.I.D. luminaires shall be tested to show
                               proper operation by testing as listed above.

               9.      Grounding System

                       Upon completion of the electrical grounding system, the contractor shall test
                             the grounding system for stray currents, grounds, shorts, etc. These
                             tests shall be performed with approved instruments. Contractor shall
                             submit in writing to Architect/Engineer a letter indicating the ohmic
                             resistance of the service grounds (25 ohm maximum) and a
                             statement that the grounding system is free of all defects, stray
                             currents, shorts, etc.

2.1    CALIBRATION

       A.      Calibrate and adjust all components requiring same as directed, in accordance with
               manufacturer's procedures and recommendations or as required, for the following
               categories of equipment.

               Switchboards.

               Lighting fixtures (lamp positions, reflector positions, etc., as required).

               Automatic transfer switches.

       Provide overloads in all motor starters, in accordance with motor nameplate data and as
              recommended by the manufacturer.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

Notify the Architect/Engineer seven (7) days prior to the testing dates. If the Architect/Engineer so
        elect not to witness a specific test a statement of certification must be forwarded to the
        Architect/Engineer for approval.

Conduct tests at a time agreeable to the Architect/Engineer. Provide premium labor as necessary.

Products which are found defective or do not pass such tests shall be removed and replaced at the
      Contractor's expense. Tests shall be repeated.

TESTING, ACCEPTANCES, AND CERTIFICATIONS                                                        16065-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                        Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010




Conduct all test required by the authorities having jurisdiction.


                                        END OF SECTION




TESTING, ACCEPTANCES, AND CERTIFICATIONS                                   16065-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16102 - EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.   General: Provide final connections to equipment and coordinate same in
           accordance with the Contract documents.

      B.   Equipment to receive final connections shall include but not be limited to the
           following:

           1.      Motors and Equipment

           2.      Appliances

           3.      Owner Furnished Equipment

      C.   Related Work Specified in Division 16000

           1.      Testing and Acceptances - Section 16065

           2.      Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110

           3.      Wire and Cable - Section 16120

           4.      Disconnect Switches - Section 16170

           5.      Packaged Engine Generator - Section 16403

           6.      TVSS - Section 16400

           7.      Grounding Systems - Section 16450

      D.   Related Work Specified in Other Division of these Specifications:

           1.      Vertical Transportation

           2.      Motors

           3.      FF&E Package

           4.      Control Wiring

           5.      Appliances

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.   Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
           with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION                                                16102-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                              Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010




             1.     American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and
                    Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1).

1.3   QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.     Prior to the submitting of bids, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with all
             conditions affecting the proposed installation of equipment requiring electrical
             connections and shall make provisions as to the cost thereof. Failure to comply with
             the intent of this paragraph shall in no way relieve the Contractor of performing all
             necessary work required for final electrical connections and equipment and the
             coordination thereof.

      B.     Connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
             and approved shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   Only those products listed in Division 16000 shall be employed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1   EQUIPMENT

      A.     Connections for and coordination of motors and equipment requiring electrical
             connections shall include but not be limited to the following:

             1.     Provide and install a disconnect switch for each motor and each piece of
                    equipment. Provide disconnects where required by code.

             2.     Verify that the motor rotation is correct and reconnect if necessary.

             3.     Provide separate ground wires in flexible, metal conduit and non-metallic
                    conduit so as to provide an electrically continuous ground path. Ground all
                    equipment.

             4.     Provide motor branch circuit conductors and connections to each individual
                    motor controller and from each controller to the motor through an approved
                    disconnect switch. Make final connection in minimum 24 inch length of
                    liquid-tight, flexible, metal conduit.

             5.     Where equipment is fed from branch circuit routed in or under the slab,
                    terminate branch circuit at junction box on 2 foot rigid conduit stub-up and
                    make final connection to equipment in liquid-tight, flexible, metal conduit.
                    Provide suitable knee brace on conduit stub-up.

             6.     Where equipment is fed from overhead support conduit feeder descending
                    from ceiling on flanged floor fitting with conduit type fitting connecting to
                    motor with 24-inch minimum of liquid-tight flexible steel conduit.


EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION                                                   16102-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



           7.      Where nameplate on equipment indicates fuse protection the disconnecting
                   means shall be equipped with dual element fuses.

3.2   APPLIANCES

      A.   Connections for and coordination of appliances shall include but not be limited to the
           following:

           1.      The basic requirements for motors and equipment specified above shall
                   apply where applicable.

           2.      Where cord and plugs are provided with the appliances this contractor shall
                   coordinate the receptacle installation to match.

           3.      Direct connected equipment shall be serviced by disconnecting means.

3.3   OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

      A.   The requirement for equipment furnished by the owner for installation by this
           contractor shall include but not be limited to the following:

           1.      The coordination of the proper delivery scheduling of such equipment.

           2.      The receiving and unloading of such equipment at the property line.

           3.      The inspection of such equipment for damages, defacement, corrosion,
                   missing components, etc. at the job site. All deficiencies shall be recorded.
                   Deficiencies occurring after inspection shall be corrected by this contractor
                   at his cost.

           4.      The safe handling at secure storage of such equipment from unloading to
                   the time of permanent installation.

           5.      The completion of field make up of internal wiring as required.

           6.      The lamping of equipment.

           7.      The installation of accessories on such equipment.

           8.      The installation of such equipment including the transportation of the
                   equipment to the installation area, and the installation of all supports,
                   fasteners, canopies, extensions, etc. required to insure safe support and
                   adaptation to the finished structural, electrical and architectural conditions.

           9.      The final connections and grounding to the building electrical system
                   including all necessary labor and materials including but not limited to
                   junction box extensions, lug change outs, etc.

           10.     The testing of such equipment in its final location.


EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION                                                   16102-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL COORDINATION

        A.    Furnish electrical services to Division 15 equipment as outlined below.

        B.    Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be
              furnished, set in place, and wired By the Division 15 Contractor. Contractor should
              note that the intent of this wiring schedule is to have the Division 15 Contractor
              responsible for coordinating all control wiring regardless of voltage as outlined,
              whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and
              specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 15 for electrical
              work of this Division 16 which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed
              for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The Division 16
              Contractor shall refer to the Division 15 specifications and plans for all power wiring
              and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding.


 Item                                  Furnished         Set By          Power          Control
                                          By                             Wiring         Wiring

 Equipment Motors                          MC              MC             EC               ---
 Motor Starters and Thermal                MC              EC             EC              MC
 Overload Heaters (See Note 1)
 Fused & Unfused Disconnect                EC              EC             EC               ---
 Switches
 Manual Operating & Speed                  MC              EC             EC              MC
 Switches (carring load currents)
 (See Note 3 & 4)
 Control Relays & Transformer              MC              MC             EC              MC
 (See Note 2)
 Thermostats (Line Voltage)                MC              EC             EC              MC
 including Aquastats
 Temperature Control Panels                MC              MC             EC              MC
 Building Fire Alarm System Fire           EC              EC             EC              EC
 & Smoke Detectors, including
 Relays for Fan Shutdown
 Motor & Solenoid Valves,                  MC              MC              ---            MC
 Damper Motors, PE & EP
 Switches, Control Valves, Fan
 Interlocking Wiring, Low Voltage
 Thermostats
 Duct Detection (Note 6)                   EC              MC              ---          EC/MC
 Pushbutton Stations & Pilot               MC              MC              ---            MC
 Lights (Manually operated

EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION                                                      16102-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010




 Item                                   Furnished        Set By         Power          Control
                                           By                           Wiring         Wiring
 Switches not carrying Load
 Currents) (See Note 3)
 Boiler Controls including FM gas          MC              MC             EC             MC
 train
 Fire Sprinkler System Alarms,             FPC            FPC             EC             EC
 Tamper Switches, Flow Switches
 and Fire Alarm Systems Tie-ins
 to provide a complete Fire
 Protection System
 Water Softener Timeclocks,                MC              MC             EC             MC
 Timers, Lock-out Devices,
 Wheatstone Bridges and Meters
 Temporary Heating Connections             MC              MC             EC             MC
 Electric Freeze Protection Heat           EC              EC             EC             EC
 Cable (Snowmelt)
 Freeze Protection Heat Trace              MC              MC             EC             EC
 HVAC Water Treatment                      MC              MC             ---            MC
 Interlocks
 Variable Frequency Drives                 MC              MC             EC             MC

        MC = Mechanical Contractor Under Division 15 of the Work
        EC = Electrical Contractor Under Division 16 of the Work
        FPC = Fire Protection Contractor

        Notes for the Electrical/Mechanical Coordination Schedule

         All starters, other than those in Motor Control Centers and noted on the Drawings shall be
                furnished under Division 15. All starters furnished under Division 15 shall be
                complete with three overload heaters and shall conform to NEC and NEMA
                requirements. All starters shall have 65,000 AIC rating.

         Control relays and control transformers shall be furnished under Division 15 except where
               furnishing such items are specifically required under Division 16 specifications
               and/or drawings.

         Pushbuttons stations carrying full load current are to be wired under Division 16 of the
              work.

         Exhaust Fans: The Electrical Contractor under Division 16 of the work will furnish and
              install circuits, feeders and disconnect switches, and make all connections to motors


EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION                                                    16102-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



              and controls unless interlocked with other mechanical equipment or exhaust fans in
              locations indicated. Where exhaust fans are switched with lights, a two-pole toggle
              switch will be provided under Division 16. Where exhaust fans are interlocked with
              other mechanical equipment, the interlock wiring will be furnished by the Mechanical
              Contractor under Division 15.

       Electrical contractor shall provide disconnects for all starters and variable frequency
              drives. Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnects at the equipment if it is not in
              line of sight of starter disconnect.

       Electrical contractor provides control wiring to fire alarm panel. Mechanical contractor
              provides control wiring to mechanical unit.

 All temperature control conduit and wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 15. All
        motorized damper equipment shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 and wired
        under Division 16.


                                       END OF SECTION




EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION                                                       16102-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010


SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    General: Provide raceways in accordance with the Contract Documents.

      B.    Related Work Specified in Division 16000

            1.     Identification - Section 16060

            2.     Testing, Acceptances & Certifications - Section 16065

            3.     Grounding Systems - Section 16450

      C.    Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications

            1.     Finish Painting

            2.     Concrete

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.    Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
            with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

            1.     Rigid Conduit

                   a.     UL Standard UL-6.
                   b.     ANSI C80-1.
                   c.     Federal Specification WW-C-581E.

            2.     Intermediate Metallic Conduit

                   a.     UL Standard UL-1242.
                   b.     Federal Specification WW-C 581E

            3.     Electrical Metallic Tubing

                   a.     UL Standard UL-797.
                   b.     ANSI C80-3
                   c.     Federal Specification WW-C-563

            4.     Flexible Steel Conduit

                   a.     UL Standard UL-1

            5.     Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit



RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                     16110-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


                   a.      UL Standard UL-360

            6.     Rigid Nonmetallic conduit

                   a.      NEMA TC2; Schedule 40 PVC

            7.     Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing

                   a.      NEMA TC12

            8.     Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters

                   a.      U.L. Standard UL-870

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Provide listing of manufacturers proposed in the submittal list identified in Section
            16035 of these specifications.

      B.    Where wireways and/or auxiliary gutters are employed full erection drawings must
            be submitted. Drawings to include plan views, elevations, size of wireways, type and
            quantity of conductors proposed to be installed therein, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

      A.    Rigid Steel Conduit - Allied, Wheatland, Republic, LTV, Triangle.

      B.    Intermediate Metallic Conduit - Allied, Wheatland, Republic, LTV, Triangle.

      C.    Electric Metallic Tubing - Allied, Wheatland, Republic, LTV, Triangle.

      D.    Flexible Steel Conduit - Triangle, Allflex, Galflex, Interflex, Condux.

      E.    Liquid-Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit - Columbia Cable & Electric Corporation,
            Sealtite.

      F.    Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit - Carlon, Certain TEED, Condux, PWP.

      G.    Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing - Carlon, PWP.

      H.    Wireways & Auxiliary Cutters - Square D, Queen, Unity.




RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                       16110-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010


      I.    Outlet, Junction & Pull Boxes - Appleton, Steel City, Raco, Bowers, Hoffman,
            Queens, Unity, Circle AW.

2.2   RACEWAY TYPES

      A.    Standard Threaded Rigid Steel Conduit

            1.     Rigid conduit heavy wall galvanized

      B.    Intermediate Metallic Conduit

            1.     Light weight rigid steel conduit

      C.    Electric Metallic Tubing

            1.     Continuous, seamless tubing galvanized or sheradized on the exterior
                   coated on the interior with a smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or
                   enamel.

            2.     All couplings, connectors, etc., used in conjunction with this raceway which
                   are 2 inch in size and smaller may be set screw type. Conduits of 2-1/2 inch
                   in size and larger must employ steel compression gland fittings, "Tomic"
                   tap-on or "Tomic" compression type or set screw type.

            3.     Where installed in slab or concrete work, provide approved concrete tight
                   fittings.

      D.    Flexible Steel Conduit

            1.     Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double-wrapped steel,
                   galvanized inside and outside forming smooth internal wiring channel.

            2.     Maximum length: 6 feet

            3.     Each section of raceway must contain a bonding wire bonded at each end
                   and sized as required. Provide connectors with insulating bushings.

      E.    Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit

            1.     Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, inert watertight plastic
                   outer jacket.

            2.     Cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one-piece
                   brass grounding bushings which thread to interior of conduit. Spiral molded
                   vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated throat.

      F.    Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

            1.     PVC conduit shall be rated for 90 Centigrade operating temperature.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                    16110-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                              Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010


            2.      Conduit shall be a minimum of Schedule 40.

      G.    Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing

            Shall be rated for 90 Centigrade operating temperature.

      H.    Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters

            1.      Of sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings and as required.

            2.      Provide all necessary elbows, tees, connectors, adaptors, etc.

            3.      Hinged cover secured with captive screws.

            4.      Wire retainers not less than 12 inches on center.

      I.    MC Cable

            1.      Allowed for branch circuiting only.

2.3   OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

      A.    Provide zinc-coated or cadmium-plated sheet steel outlet boxes not less than 4
            inches octagonal or square, unless otherwise noted. Equip fixture outlet boxes with
            3/8 inch no-bolt fixture studs where required. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an
            accessible type ceiling, provide a junction box and extend flexible conduit to each
            fixture. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceiling or walls with appropriate covers, set flush
            with the finished surface. Where more than one switch or device is located at one
            point, use gang boxes and covers unless otherwise indicated. Sectional switch
            boxes or utility boxes will not be permitted. Provide Series "GW" (Steel City) tile
            box, or as accepted, or a 4 inch square box with tile ring in masonry walls which will
            not be plastered or furred. Where drywall material is utilized provide plaster ring.
            Provide outlet boxes of the type and size suitable for the specific application. Where
            outlet boxes contain 2 or more 277 volt devices, or where devices occur of different
            applied voltages, or where normal and emergency devices occur in same box,
            provide suitable barrier.

      B.    Construct junction or pull boxes not over 150 cubic inches in size as standard outlet
            boxes, and those over 150 cubic inches the same as "cabinets", with screw covers
            of the same gauge metal.

      C.    Plug any open knockouts not utilized.

      D.    Provide surface mounted outlet and junction boxes in indoor locations where
            exposed to moisture and outdoor locations of cast metal with threaded hubs. All
            outdoor receptacles shall have tamper resistant cover plates.

      E.    All junction boxes containing emergency power shall be painted red.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                          16110-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



3.1   APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS

      A.    The following applications must be adhered to except as otherwise required by
            Code. Raceways not conforming to this listing must be removed by this Contractor
            and replaced with the specified material at this Contractors expense.

      B.    Raceway Types                 Application

            Rigid Conduit         Application: Where exposed to mechanical injury, where
                                  specifically required, where required by codes, in hazardous
                                  areas, and for all circuits in excess of 600 volts.

            I.M.C.                Application: Same as standard threaded rigid steel conduit.

            M.C.                  Application: Feedeer run from distribution panel to unit load
                                  center. Final branch circuit to devices (except where romex,
                                  NM cable is allowed per the NEC within wood frame
                                  construction).

            E.M.T.                Application: Use in every instance except where another
                                  material is specified.

            Flexible Steel        Application: Use in dry areas for final connections to lighting
                                  fixtures in hung ceilings, connections to equipment installed
                                  in removable panels of hung ceilings at bus duct takeoffs, at
                                  all transformer or equipment raceway connections where
                                  sound and vibration isolation is required.

            Liquid-Tight          Application: Use in areas subject to moisture where flexible
                                  steel
            Electrical Conduit    is unacceptable at connections to all motors, and all raised
                                  floor areas.

            Rigid Nonmetallic     Application:    Buried in earth and embedded in concrete
                                  slabs.

            Electrical Nonmetallic Application:   Where indicated on the Drawings and as
                                   otherwise

            Tubing                specifically approved.

            Wireways and          Application:    Where indicated on the Drawings and as
                                  otherwise

            Auxiliary Gutters     specifically approved.

            MC Cable              Application: Refer to drawings for applicable usage. MC
                                  Cable shall be allowed for all branch circuiting, however EMT
                                  must be used for all conduit homeruns.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                      16110-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010


3.2   RACEWAY SYSTEMS IN GENERAL

      A.    All types of raceways (metallic and nonmetallic) shall have ground conductors. The
            grounding conductor shall be considered an insulated conductor when sizing
            raceway. Minimum size 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch for home runs and 1 inch minimum for
            power distribution. Wiring of each type and system must be installed in separate
            raceways.

      B.    Install capped bushings on raceways as soon as installed and remove only when
            wires are pulled. Securely tie embedded raceway in place. Raceways installed
            below or in floor slabs must extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished slab to
            the first connector. Lay out the work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations
            of multiple raceway runs.

      C.    Locate raceways so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and they
            do not conflict with the services of other trades. Install 1-inch or larger raceways in
            or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in the manner
            accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight.
            Protect threads from corrosion with one (1) coat red lead and zinc chromate after
            installation.

      D.    Above Grade - Defined as the area above finished grade for a building exterior and
            above top surface of any slabs (or other concrete work) on grade for a building
            interior. Above-grade raceways to comply with the following:

            1.     Install raceways concealed except at surface cabinets and for motor and
                   equipment connections in electrical and mechanical rooms. Install a
                   minimum of 6 inches from flues, steam pipes, or other heated lines. Provide
                   flashing and counter-flashing for waterproofing of raceways, outlets, fittings,
                   etc., which penetrate the roof. Route exposed raceways parallel or
                   perpendicular to building lines with right-angle turns and symmetrical bends.
                    Run concealed raceways in a direct line and, where possible, with long
                   sweep bends and offsets. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls,
                   floor slabs and partitions for passage of raceways. Waterproof sleeved
                   raceways where required.

            2.     Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways with
                   necessary bonding conductor at building expansion joints and between
                   buildings or structures and where required to compensate for raceway or
                   building thermal expansion and contraction.

            3.     Provide one (1) empty 3/4 inch raceway for each three (3) spare unused
                   poles or spaces of each flush-mounted panelboard. Terminate empty 3/4
                   inch conduit in a junction box, which after completion, is accessible to
                   facilitate future branch circuit extension.

            4.     Provide raceway installation (with appropriate seal-offs, explosion-proof
                   fittings, etc) in special occupancy area, as required. Provide conduit
                   seal-offs where portions of an interior raceway system pass through walls,
                   ceiling or floors which separate adjacent rooms having substantially different
                   maintained temperatures, as in refrigeration or cold storage rooms.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                        16110-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



            5.     Provide drag wire in all spare or empty raceways and in those which the
                   Contractor has elected to install. Tag both ends of wire denoting opposite
                   end termination location with black india ink on flameproof linen tag. Identify
                   special system (POS, PC, TV, etc.) conduits in the method described above.

      E.    Below Grade: Defined as the area below furnished grade for a building exterior and
            below or within the bottom floor slab for a building interior. Below grade raceways to
            comply to the following:

            1.     Duct banks shall be installed to drain away from buildings; ducts between
                   handholes and pull boxes shall drain toward the handholes. Duct slopes
                   shall not be less than 3 inches per 100 feet.

            2.     Duct banks shall be reinforced as shown on the Drawings.

            3.     Conduits shall be laid in trenches on a clean backfill bedding not less than 6
                   inches thick and well graded.

            4.     Where indicated on the drawings underground conduits shall be encased in
                   a 3-inch concrete envelope of 1-3-5 mix unless indicated otherwise and
                   arranged in tiers. Banked conduits shall be held securely in place, at a
                   minimum 1 -inch spacing between conduits, by approved separators
                   installed at 5 ft. intervals.

            5.     Top 2 inches of all concrete envelopes to be mixed with 10 pounds of iron
                   oxide per cubic yard.

            6.     Where indicated on the drawings conduits running under the building shall
                   have a 2" concrete cap. Concrete in cap to be mixed with 10 pounds of iron
                   oxide per cubic yard.

            7.     The minimum cover for conduits shall be 24 inches unless otherwise
                   permitted by Engineer.

            8.     Conduit entrances to buildings and structures shall be made with rigid metal
                   conduit.

            9.     Where bends in conduits are required, long radius elbows, sweeps, and
                   offsets shall be used.

            10.    All conduits shall be rodded and a mandrel drawn through followed by a
                   swab to clean out any obstructions which may cause cable abrasions. The
                   mandrel shall be 12 inches in length and the diameter 1/2 inch less than the
                   inside diameter of the conduit.

            11.    Spare conduits shall be plugged and sealed watertight at all handholes, pull
                   boxes, buildings and structures.

            12.    Conduits in use shall be sealed watertight at all handholes, pull boxes,
                   buildings and structures.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                       16110-7
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



            13.    For PVC runs, a PVC to metallic conduit adapter shall be used at the lower
                   PVC elbow. All exposed conduit shall be metallic.

            14.    PVC joints shall be made so as to prevent the passage of concrete inside
                   the conduit to form obstructions or cause cable abrasions. A joint
                   compound, approved for the purpose, shall be applied uniformly over the
                   tapered surface before insertion into the coupling.

            15.    Handhole and pull box covers in streets shall finish flush with finished paving
                   and in other areas shall finish 3 inches above crown of adjacent roadway.

            16.    Concrete monuments shall be provided at each stubbed conduit location.
                   Monuments shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be installed in the
                   same manner outlined for manhole covers.

            17.    All underground conduit shall be PVC, except vertical risers and elbows.
                   Vertical risers and elbows shall be rigid metal conduit.

            18.    Provide raceway expansion joints where required to compensate for
                   raceway thermal expansion and contraction.

      F.    Conduits and sleeves of any material not harmful to concrete and within limitations
            listed below may be embedded in concrete with approval of the Structural Engineer,
            provided they are not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete.

            Conduits of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural concrete unless
                  effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or
                  electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.

            Conduits and sleeves passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair
                  significantly the strength of the construction.

            Conduits with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than
                  4 percent of the area of cross section on which strength is calculated or
                  which is required for fire protection.

            Except when plans for conduits are approved by the Structural Engineer, conduits
                   embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those merely passing
                   through) shall satisfy the following:

                   They shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness
                          of slab, wall, or beam in which they are embedded.

                   They shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on center.

                   They shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction.

                   Conduits, and sleeves may be considered as replacing structurally in
                         compression the displaced concrete provided.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                       16110-8
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010


                    They are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration.

                    They are of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard
                           Schedule 40 steel pipe.

                    They have a nominal inside diameter not over 2 inches and are spaced not
                          less than 3 diameters on centers.

                    Raceways running parallel to slabs supports, such as beams, columns and
                         structural walls, shall be installed not less than 12 inches from such
                         supporting elements.

                    To prevent displacement during concrete pour of lift slab, saddle supports
                           for conduit, outlet boxes, junction boxes, inserts, etc., shall be
                           secured with suitable adhesives.

      A.    Raceways in hung ceilings shall be run on and secure to slab or primary structural
            members of ceiling, not to latching channels or T-bars, Z-bars or other elements
            which are the direct supports of the ceiling panels. Secure conduit firmly to steel by
            clips and fittings designed for that purpose. Install as high as but not less than 1'-0"
            above hung ceilings.

      B.    Exposed raceways shall be run parallel or at right angles with building lines. Secure
            raceway clamps or supports to masonry materials to toggle bolts, expansion bolts,
            or steel inserts. Install raceway on steel construction with approved clamps which
            do not depend on friction or set-screw pressure alone.

      C.    Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. This
            shall be done with ball mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit inside
            diameter) followed by close fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This
            assembly may be pulled in together with, but ahead of the cable being installed. All
            empty raceways shall be similarly cleaned. Clear any raceway which rejects ball
            mandrel.

      D.    Support less than 2" trade size, vertically run, raceways at intervals no greater than
            eight feet. Support such raceways, 2" trade size or larger, at intervals no greater
            than the story height, or fifteen feet, whichever is smaller.

      E.    Support less than 1" trade size, horizontally run, raceways at intervals no greater
            than seven feet. Support such raceways, 1" trade size or larger, at intervals no
            greater than ten feet.

3.3   WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTER

      A.    Wireways installed in hung ceilings shall be placed such that the cover will hinge
            upward from the side.

      B.    12" clear shall be provided from wireway cover when it is in the open position.

OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES


RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                         16110-9
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010


      Provide outlet, junction, and pull boxes as indicated on the Drawings and as required for the
             complete installation of the various electrical systems, and to facilitate proper pulling
             of wires and cables. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be sized per N.E.C.
             minimum.

      The exact location of outlets and equipment is governed by structural conditions and
            obstructions, or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that
            when fixtures or equipment are installed, they will be symmetrically located
            according to the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment.
            Verify final location of outlets, panel equipment, etc., with Architect.

      Back-to-back outlets in the same wall, or "thru-wall" type boxes not permitted. Provide
             12-inch (minimum) spacing for outlets shown on opposite sides of a common wall to
             minimize sound transmission.


                                       END OF SECTION




RACEWAYS AND BOXES                                                                          16110-10
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    General: Provide 600 volt wire and cable in accordance with the Contract
            Documents.

      B.    Related Work Specified in Division 16000.

            1.     Identification - Section 16060

            2.     Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065

            3.     Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.    Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
            with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

            1.     Conductors

                   a.      ASTM

                   b.      NEMA WC 5

            2.     Terminal Blocks

                   a.      UL-1059

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Provide listing of manufacturers proposed in the submittal list identified in Section
            16035 of these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

      A.    Wire and Cable

            1.     General Electric, Triangle, General Cable, Okonite, Simplex, South Wire,
                   Kerite, Rome.

      B.    Connectors

            1.     Hand Applied


WIRE AND CABLE (600VOLT AND BELOW)                                                      16120-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



                   a.       "Wing Nut" (Ideal Industries), "Piggy" (Thomas & Betts) or
                            "Scotchlok"

            2.     Tool Applied

                   a.       Manufacturer: "Scotchlok" S-11, S-31 (3M Company), "Stakon"
                            (Thomas & Betts), "Number 410 Crimp Connector" (Ideal Industries),
                            or "Wrap-Cap" (Buchanan).

      C.    Electric Tape

            1.     Johns-Manville or 3M Company

2.2   WIRE AND CABLE

      A.    General

            1.     Provide wire with a minimum insulating rating of 600 volts, except for wire
                   used in 50 volts or below applications for control of signal systems use 300
                   volt minimum or 600 volt where permitted to be incorporated with other
                   wiring systems.

      B.    Conductor

            1.     Electrical grade, annealed copper, tinned if rubber insulated, and fabricated
                   in accordance with ASTM standards. Minimum size number 12 for branch
                   circuits; number 14 for control wiring.

            2.     All conductors are copper.

      C.    Stranding and Number of Conductors

            1.     Cables larger than number 10, stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B
                   stranding designations.

            2.     Control wires stranded in accordance with ASTM Q Class B stranding
                   designations.

            3.     Cables, multi-conductor unless otherwise noted for low tension systems.

      D.    Insulation

            1.     Type THW or THWN-Thermoplastic insulation suitable for use in wet
                   locations up to 75 degrees centigrade. Use for lighting, receptacle and
                   motor circuits and for panel and equipment feeders.

            2.     Type THHN - Flame retardant: Heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation, nylon
                   jacket rated for 90 degrees centigrade operation. Use for lighting branch
                   circuit wiring installed and passing through the ballast channels of


WIRE AND CABLE (600VOLT AND BELOW)                                                     16120-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                               Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



                   fluorescent fixtures, wiring in metal roof decks in or near roof insulation, in
                   attic or joist spaces, or in raceways exposed to the sun.

            3.     Consult equipment manufacturer for insulation type when installation
                   requires an insulation rating above 90 degrees centigrade.

      E.    Color Coding

            1.     Provide consistent color coding of all feeders, sub feeders, motor circuits
                   and the like as follows:

                   120/208 Volts Code
                   Phase A - Black
                   Phase B - Red
                   Phase C - Blue
                   Neutral - White
                   Ground - Green

            2.     Color-code wiring for control systems installed in conjunction with
                   mechanical and/or miscellaneous equipment in accordance with the wiring
                   diagrams furnished with the equipment. Factory color code wire number 8
                   and smaller. Wire number 6 and larger may be color coded by color tapping
                   of the entire length of the exposed ends.

2.3   CONNECTORS

      A.    Make connections, splices, taps and joints with solderless devices, mechanically
            and electrically secure. Protect exposed wires and connecting devices with
            electrical tape or insulation to provide not less than that of the conductor.

      B.    Branch Circuit wires (Number 10 and smaller): Use any of the following types of
            terminals and connecting devices:

            1.     Hand applied

                   a.      Coiled tapered, spring wound devices with a conducting
                           corrosion-resistant coating over the spring steel and a plastic cover
                           and skirt providing full insulation for splice and wired ends. Screw
                           connector on by hand.

            Tool applied

                   Steel cap, with conduction and corrosion resistant metallic plating, open at
                          both ends, fitted around the twisted ends of the wire and compressed
                          or crimped by means of a special die designed for the purpose.
                          Specifically fitted plastic or rubber insulating cover wrap over each
                          connector.

2.1   ELECTRICAL TAPE


WIRE AND CABLE (600VOLT AND BELOW)                                                       16120-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                 Denver, CO
       BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
       BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



               A.    Specifically designed for use as insulating tape.

       2.2     LUBRICANT

               A.    Use lubricant only where the possibility of damage to conductors exists. Use only a
                     lubricant approved by the cable manufacturer and one which is inert to cable and
                     raceways.

       PART 3 - EXECUTION

       3.1     WIRE AND CABLE

               A.    Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway system. Mount wiring through
                     a specified raceway, regardless of voltage application.

               B.    Drawings do not indicate size of all branch circuit wiring. For branch circuits whose
                     length from panel to furthest outlet exceeds 100 feet for 120-volt circuits, use
                     number 10 or larger. Voltage drop of branch circuiting shall be within three (3)
                     percent of system voltage. Conductor sizing shall adhere to the following tables.

                          Single phase branch circuit wire sized for 3% voltage drop

                                              DISTANCE IN FEET

                                                  120 VOLT

WATTS    50         100       150       200        250        300        350       400        450        500

500      #12        #12       #12       #12        #10        #10        #10       #8         #8         #8
1000     #12        #12       #10       #8         #8         #6         #6        #6         #6         #4
1500     #12        #10       #8        #6         #6         #6         #4        #4         #4         #2
2000     #12        #8        #6        #6         #4         #4         #4        #2         #2         #2
2500     #10        #8        #6        #4         #4         #2         #2        #2         #2         #1
3000     #10        #6        #6        #4         #2         #2         #2        #1         #1         #1
3500     #10        #6        #4        #4         #2         #2         #1        #1         #1/0       #1/0
4000     #8         #6        #4        #2         #2         #1         #1        #1/0       #1/0       #2/0
4500     #8         #6        #4        #2         #2         #1         #1/0      #1/0       #2/0       #2/0
5000     #8         #4        #2        #2         #1         #1         #1/0      #2/0       #2/0       #3/0
5500     #8         #4        #2        #2         #1         #1/0       #2/0      #2/0       #3/0       #3/0


                                                  208 VOLT




       WIRE AND CABLE (600VOLT AND BELOW)                                                        16120-4
       AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
       BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                    BID SET
       BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                       AUGUST 9, 2010



500         #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #12       #12        #12         #12      #12
1000        #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #12       #12        #10         #10      #10
1500        #12        #12        #12        #12       #10        #10       #10        #8          #8       #8
2000        #12        #12        #12        #10       #10        #8        #8         #8          #6       #6
2500        #12        #12        #10        #10       #8         #8        #8         #6          #6       #6
3000        #12        #12        #10        #8        #8         #6        #6         #6          #6       #4
3500        #12        #12        #10        #8        #8         #6        #6         #6          #4       #4
4000        #12        #10        #8         #8        #6         #6        #6         #4          #4       #4
4500        #10        #10        #8         #6        #6         #6        #4         #4          #4       #2
5000        #10        #10        #8         #6        #6         #4        #4         #4          #2       #2
5500        #10        #10        #8         #6        #6         #4        #4         #4          #2       #2



                         Three phase wire sizes for utilization equipment to upstream panel.

                                                   DISTANCE IN FEET

                                                       208 VOLT


WATTS       50         100        150        200       250        300       350        400         450      500

500         #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #12       #12        #12         #12      #12
1000        #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #12       #12        #12         #12      #12
1500        #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #12       #12        #12         #!2      #10
2000        #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #12       #10        #10         #10      #10
2500        #12        #12        #12        #12       #12        #10       #10        #10         #10      #8
3000        #12        #12        #12        #12       #10        #10       #10        #8          #8       #8
3500        #12        #12        #12        #12       #10        #10       #8         #8          #8       #8
4000        #12        #12        #12        #10       #10        #8        #8         #8          #6       #6
4500        #12        #12        #12        #10       #10        #8        #8         #8          #6       #6
5000        #12        #12        #10        #10       #8         #8        #8         #6          #6       #6
5500        #12        #12        #10        #10       #8         #8        #6         #6          #6       #6


       C.         Do not install wire in incomplete conduit runs nor until after the concrete work and plastering is
                  completed and moisture is swabbed from conduits. Eliminate splices wherever possible. Where
                  necessary, splice in readily accessible pull, junction, or outlet box.

       D.         Provide cable supports for all vertical risers where required by code not to exceed the following:

                          Minimum Conductor Size                     Vertical Supports
                                                               Aluminum            Copper

                         No. 18 AWG to No. 8 AWG               100 ft                 100 ft
                         No. 6 AWG to No. 0 AWG                200 ft                 100 ft
                         No. 00 AWG to No. 0000 AWG            180 ft                 80 ft
                         211,601 CM to 350,000 CM              135 ft                  60 ft
                         350,001 CM to 500,000 CM              120 ft                  50 ft

       WIRE AND CABLE (600VOLT AND BELOW)                                                             16120-5
       AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                       Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



                    500,001 CM to 750,000 CM                 95 ft                   40 ft

      E.     Flashover or insulation value of joints to be equal to that of the conductor. Provide Underwriters'
             Laboratories listed connectors rated at 600 volts for general use and 1000 volts for use between
             ballasts and lamps or gaseous discharge fixtures.

      F.     Use terminating fittings, connectors, etc., of a type suitable for the specified cable furnished. Make
             bends in cable at termination prior to installing compression device. Make fittings tight.

      G.     Install wire in raceways and make up terminations in accordance with manufacturer's
             recommendations using special washers, nuts, etc., as required. Use an accepted wire-pulling
             lubricant equivalent to "Yellow" (Ideal) for all wire number 4 and larger. Strip insulation so as to
             avoid nicking of wire.

      H.     Extend wire sizing for the entire length of a circuit, feeder, etc. unless specifically noted otherwise.

      I.     A #10 AWG copper neutral conductor shall be used for all isolated ground circuits.

      J.     The neutral conductor shall be rated at 200% of the phase conductors from the secondary of all K-
             rated transformers to the panelboard.

TESTING

      See specification 16065 for testing requirements.


                                              END OF SECTION




WIRE AND CABLE (600VOLT AND BELOW)                                                          16120-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16122 - FIRE SEALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    DESCRIPTION

       A.      General: Provide premixed putty sealant at wall, ceiling and/or floor electrical
               penetration fire seals in accordance with the Contract Documents.

       B.      Related Work Specified in other Divisions of these Specifications.

               1.       Finish painting.

1.2    STANDARDS

       A.      Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
               with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

               1.       ASTM E119-73

               2.       UL 1479

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

       A.      3M Company

               Penetration Seals Series 7900 (for conduit/data penetrations).

               FS-195 Wrap and CP-255/L-Caulk (for bus duct penetrations).

       A.      Nelson Electric

2.2    BASIC REQUIREMENTS

       A.      The system shall provide an immediate fire seal, require no curing time, emit no
               hazardous or toxic fumes and be asbestos free.

       B.      The system must have an intumescent nature, expand when heated to increase
               flame and smoke containment.

       C.      The system shall be easy to use, require no special tools and shall be capable of
               being installed from one side.

       D.      The system shall not require derating whatsoever of the wiring systems passing
               through the seal.

       E.      The system shall be factory modified for additions or deletions of raceways or
               cables.

FIRE SEALS                                                                                 16122-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010




       F.      Existing materials must be reusable to accommodate penetrations changes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

GENERAL

       Putty shall be installed no thinner than 0.75 inches.

       A minimum of 0.5 inches of putty shall be placed around each penetrating item. When this
              is not possible a cone shall be built up around the penetrating items, using a second
              layer of putty. Slope the cone at 30 degrees (30) from wall or floor.

       Wall openings must not have an unsupported space of putty greater than 4 inches and floor
              openings an unsupported opening of 1.5 inches.

       Provide ceramic wool temperature rated 2300F in conjunction with putty in accordance
              with the manufacturer's instructions.

       Provide ceramic fiberboard temperature rated 2000F in conjunction with the putty in
              accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

       Penetrating items must be firmly anchored prior to the putty installation. Provide all
              necessary anchor bolts, fittings, etc. as necessary.


                                       END OF SECTION




FIRE SEALS                                                                                16122-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16140 – WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    DESCRIPTION

       A.      General: Provide wiring devices in accordance with the Contract Documents.

       B.      Related work Specified in Division 16000

               1.       Electrical General Provisions (Mounting Heights) - Section 16010

               2.       Identification - Section 16060

               3.       Raceways and Boxes - Section 16110

               4.       Wire and Cable - Section 16120

               5.       Grounding Systems - Section 16450

       C.      Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications

               1.       Finish painting

1.2    STANDARDS

       A.      Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
               with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

               1.       Switches

                        a.     Federal Specification Standard WS-896E.

               2.       Receptacles

                        N.E.M.A. Standard WD-1, 3.02 through 3.10

                        U.L. Standard 498 Federal Specification WC596-D.

1.1    SUBMITTALS

       A.      Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts and specifications for all wiring devices and
               plates.

       B.      Switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    APPROVED MANUFACTURERS


WIRING DEVICES                                                                            16140-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                    BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                       AUGUST 9, 2010



       A.      Switches

               1.       Hubbell 1220 Series

               2.       Arrow Hart - Approved equal

               3.       Pass & Seymour - Approved equal

               4.       Leviton - Approved equal

       B.      Switch and Pilot Light

               1.       Hubbell - 1221 PL

               2.       Arrow Hart - Approved equal

               3.       Pass & Seymour - Approved equal

               4.       Leviton - Approved equal

       C.      Duplex Convenience Receptacles

               1.       Hubbell - 5362

               2.       Arrow Hart -Approved equal

               3.       Pass & Seymour - Approved equal

               4.       Leviton - Approved equal

       D.      Faceplates

               1.       Nylon: Hubbell P Series or approved equal
                        Stainless: Hubbell S Series or approved equal

       E.      Outdoor Receptacles

               1.       Hubbell - 5362

               2.       Arrow Hart - Approved equal

               3.       Pass & Seymour - Approved equal

               4.       Leviton - Approved equal

       F.      Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

               1.       Hubbell GF5362

               2.       Arrow Hart - Approved equal

WIRING DEVICES                                                                 16140-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                       Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010




               3.       Pass & Seymour - Approved equal

               4.       Hubbell -GF5252I

               5.       Leviton - Approved equal

       G.      Isolated Ground Receptacles

               1.       Hubbell - IG5362

               2.       Arrow Hart - Approved equal

               3.       Pass & Seymour - Approved equal

               4.       Leviton - Approved equal

2.2    SWITCHES

       A.      Switches

               Provide specification grade, flush mounting, quiet-operating AC type, with toggle
                      operator, heat-resistant plastic housing and self grounding metal strap.
                      Silver alloy contact. Rated 20A at 120-277V and capable of full capacity on
                      tungsten or fluorescent lamp load. Design for side or back wiring with up to
                      Number 10 wire. Verified by UL to meet or exceed Federal specification
                      WS-896E.

       A.      Use single-pole, double-pole, 3-way, 4-way, pilot or keyed type, as indicated on
               Drawings or required.

       B.      Switches controlling lighting connected to the emergency power system shall be red
               and of the illuminated toggle type-illuminated when the switch is in the off position.

       C.      Switches controlling lighting by way of low-voltage lighting control relays shall be
               3-position, momentary-contact, center-off type to match the other switches.

       D.      Switch and Pilot Light: Switch as indicated with red neon pilot light.

       E.      Color of normal devices as selected by Architect.

2.3    DUPLEX CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES

       A.      Provide 3-pole NEMA and A.N.S.I. standard type, with bronze contacts that accept
               plug with 2 parallel blades and 1 grounding blade. Heat-resistant plastic enclosure
               with nylon face and green grounding screw. Break-off terminals for 2-circuit wiring.
               Rated 20 amperes at 125-volt electrical alternating current.

       B.      All devices connected to the emergency system are to be red in color.


WIRING DEVICES                                                                              16140-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



       C.      Color of normal devices as selected by Architect.

2.4    FACEPLATES

       A.      Provide cover plates for wall receptacles, outlets, and switches of nylon to match
               device finish, unless otherwise noted. When two or more switches or devices are
               shown in one location, mount under a common plate.

2.5    OUTDOOR LOCATIONS

       A.      Each receptacle installed in a damp location shall be corrosion resistant having all
               metal parts from stainless steel or be nickel plated brass.

       B.      Protect exterior switches and those in mechanical rooms which act as plenums by a
               cast aluminum metal plate with a fiber shield and spring loaded cover.

       C.      Protect exterior receptacles and those in mechanical rooms which act as plenums
               by a cast aluminum metal plate with a stainless steel spring-loaded, gasketed,
               double flap lift cover to remain locked in either open or closed position.

       D.      Where indicated or required provide ground fault circuit interrupters which will
               interrupt leakage currents between 4-6 mA having a maximum circuit current of 20
               amperes. Employ feed through devices as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    SWITCHES

       A.      Mount switches vertically with the "on" position on top, unless noted or specified
               otherwise.

       B.      Where switches are indicated to be installed near doors, corner walls, etc., mount
               same not less than 2 inches and not more than 12 inches from trim. Verify exact
               location with the Architect.

       C.      Carefully coordinate the location of switches to insure locations at the strike side of
               doors.

       D.      Furnish and install an engraved legend for each switch that controls motors,
               equipment systems, etc., not located within sight of the controlling switch.

       E.      All wallbox dimmers shall be mounted under a separate cover plate. Do not gang
               with other devices.

RECEPTACLES

       Unless otherwise noted, mount receptacle vertically with U-shaped ground position at
             bottom.

       Prior to final payment replace broken faceplates, switches and receptacles.


WIRING DEVICES                                                                               16140-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                             AUGUST 9, 2010



                             END OF SECTION




WIRING DEVICES                                       16140-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                             Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO            AUGUST 9, 2010




WIRING DEVICES                      16140-6
AE Design Group, Inc.            Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1    DESCRIPTION

       A.      General: Provide panelboards in accordance with the Contract Documents.

       B.      Related Work Specified in Division 16000

               1.       General Electrical Provisions (Equipment supports) - Section 16010

               2.       Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035

               3.       Identification - Section 16060

               4.       Laundry and Kitchen Equipment - Section 16101

               5.       Fuses 600 Volts and Less - Section 16181

               6.       Grounding Systems - Section 16450

       C.      Related work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications.

               1.       Finish painting

1.2    STANDARDS

       A.      Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
               with the latest applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

               1.       Panelboards

                        a.     UL Standards #50 and #67.

                        b.     Federal Standard W-P-115A Type II, Class 1.

                        c.     NEMA Standard PB-1-1971.

               2.       Circuit Breakers

                        UL Standard #489.

                        Federal Standard W-C-375a Amendment No. 4 and W-C-375b.

                        NEMA Standard AB-1-1969.

1.1    SUBMITTALS



PANELBOARDS                                                                                16160-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010



       A.      Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedures and additional documents for
               submittals in concert with panelboard submittals. Submittals failing to meet the
               following criteria will be returned without a review or acceptance.

       B.      With each panelboard drawing the following is required.

               1.       Show main devices and lug sizes; branch circuit device sizes and
                        arrangement; bus ampacities; withstandability and short circuit rating;
                        dimensions and construction; gutter and backbox dimensions; nameplate
                        and legend; protective coating; and all pertinent details of panel, enclosure,
                        cover, and method of securing cover and lock.

1.2    QUALITY ASSURANCE

       A.      Each panelboard as a complete and finished product shall receive a single
               integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment
               short-circuit wiring shall certify that all equipment is capable of withstanding the
               thermal and magnetic stress of a fault equal to the value specified on the Drawings.
                Such rating shall be established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar
               equipment. This certification shall be permanently affixed to each panelboard. Test
               data shall be submitted to the Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance
               Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1    APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

       A.      All panelboards are to be of the same manufacturer as the switchboards.

       B.      120/208 volts circuit breaker type panelboards are to be equal to Square D Type
               NQOD unless otherwise noted on the panel schedules.

2.2    PANELBOARDS IN GENERAL

       A.      Provide panelboards consisting of an assembly of branch circuit switching and
               protective devices (circuit breakers, switch and fuse units, or combination thereof)
               mounted inside a dead front enclosure. Provide the number and size of these
               branch circuit devices as indicated by the circuiting, on the drawings, and in the
               schedules.

       B.      Provide the following modifications and additional equipment as shown on the
               Drawings.

               1.       Main circuit breakers.

               2.       Shunt trip circuit breakers.

               3.       Integral remote control switches.

               4.       Subfeed switches.

PANELBOARDS                                                                                  16160-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010




               5.       Panelboard integral mounted relays and contactors.

               6.       Feed through or sub feed lugs and/or bus.

               7.       Feed through cabling arrangement.

               8.       Double lugs for multiple cables or for future provisions.

               9.       Circumferential compression lugs where aluminum conductors are
                        employed.

               10.      Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers.

               11.      Where main breakers are indicated, they shall be factory mounted to the bus
                        and shall be located at top center panel. Back connected branch circuit
                        breakers are not acceptable as main breakers.

       C.      Interiors

               1.       Rigid removable assembly of copper bus bars and interchangeable bolted
                        branch circuit devices.

               2.       Bus bars drilled to permit branch circuit devices of all sizes and number of
                        poles to be interchangeable and installed in any spare space of sufficient
                        size, without disturbing adjacent units; without removing main bus or branch
                        circuit connectors and without machining, drilling, or tapping in the field.

               3.       Arrange bus in sequence or distributed phasing so that multi-pole circuit
                        breaker can replace any group of single circuit breakers of the same size.

               4.       Provide neutral bus in each panelboard.

               5.       Provide ground bus in each panelboard.

               6.       Provide a non-linear rated panelboard when feed from a K-rated
                        transformer.

               7.       Provide an isolated ground bus when panelboard feeds isolated ground
                        receptacles.

               8.       Provide feed through and/or sub feed interiors as indicated on the panel
                        schedules and one line diagram.

       D.      Enclosure

               1.       Code gauge steel box galvanized.

               2.       Provide a bolt-on ground connector to inside of enclosure.


PANELBOARDS                                                                                 16160-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010



               3.       Flush mounted in finished areas and where indicated. Surface mount
                        elsewhere.

               4.       All panelboards installed outdoors or indoors in sprinklered electrical rooms
                        shall have a NEMA 3R enclosure.

       E.      Front

               1.       Doors must be provided on all lighting and power panels. On switch and
                        fuse panelboards doors over overcurrent devices are not to be provided
                        unless rated for same.

               2.       Heavy code gauge steel as required to maintain panel face flat.

               3.       Hold front closed with latch and lock.

               4.       Factory finished in ANSI 61 gray enamel or two coats of air-drying lacquer
                        over a rust inhibitor.

               5.       Provide directory for total number of poles.

               6.       Provide approved lock. All panels keyed alike. Furnish four (4) sets
                        matching keys and one key per panel to the Owner.

               7.       Welded angle rest at the bottom of the door to facilitate cover installation.

               8.       Doors over 48" in height shall have auxiliary fasteners at top and bottom of
                        door in addition to lock and catch.

               9.       No commercial logo on face of equipment.

       F.      Terminal Lugs

               1.       Bolted type, labeled for either copper or aluminum conductors.

               2.       Locate main lugs properly at top or bottom, depending where main feeder
                        enters.

       G.      Electrical Ratings

               1.       Panelboards are to be rated 120/208 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, full neutral with
                        ampacities as indicated on the Drawings (unless otherwise noted).

               2.       Short circuit withstand ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

               3.       Where indicated, provide panelboards having a "service entrance" Type UL
                        label with neutrals factory bonded to frame or enclosure.

       H.      Circuit Breaker Devices


PANELBOARDS                                                                                  16160-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                  BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                     AUGUST 9, 2010



               1.       Plastic molded case. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating
                        handle. Trip ampere rating and ON/OFF indication clearly visible.

               2.       Thermal-magnetic trip-free, trip-indicating, quick-make, quick-break, with
                        inverse time delay characteristics. Single-handle and common tripping
                        multi-pole breakers.

               3.       Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc-quenching devices.

               4.       Panelboard must be of the type which will accept the field installation of
                        shunt trip devices of 60 amperes or less on the branch devices.

               5.       Interrupting capacities shall be as indicated on the Drawings. In general,
                        120/208 volt devices shall not be less than (10,000 AIC) and 277/480 not
                        less than (14,000 AIC).

               6.       For lighting circuits that are controlled at panel, provide devices labeled
                        "SWD" for switching purposes.

               7.       Bolted type terminals U.L. listed for either aluminum or copper 75C cables.

               8.       Provide main breakers in panels served from transformers.

               9.       Locate next to each breaker or space unit an individual number.

               10.      Circuit breakers serving kitchen equipment beneath cooking hoods shall
                        include a shunt trip coil.

               11.      The use of series rated breakers shall be approved by the engineer prior to
                        preparation of submittals.

       I.      Ground fault interrupter branch circuit breakers shall be as indicated in panel
               schedules. Circuit breakers shall be circuit interrupting which will operate manually
               for normal switching functions and automatically under overload, short circuit, and
               0.005 amp line-to-ground fault conditions. The operating mechanism shall be
               entirely trip-free so that contact cannot be held close against an abnormal
               overcurrent, short circuit, or ground fault condition. The device shall be bolt-on type
               with insulated case construction and shall be interchangeable with standard 1P
               breakers utilized in the panelboard.

       J.      Switch and Fuse Devices

               Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front type. Each switch a self-contained unit,
                     externally operable from the front.

               Fuse and switch compartment interlocked to prevent access to the fuse
                     compartment until switch is thrown to "OFF" position. Interlock intentionally
                     releasable by externally applied tool to permit checking switch and fuses
                     under load.


PANELBOARDS                                                                                  16160-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                   AUGUST 9, 2010



               Switch units interchangeable for replacement, without disturbing balance of
                      distribution panelboard's operation.

               Switches are to reject fuses other than those specified.

               Provide Class R rejection type fuses as specified elsewhere.

               Provide spare fuses as specified elsewhere.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1    INSTALLATION

       A.      Mount panel 4 feet to panel center but with maximum height of six feet 6 inches to
               handle of topmost switching device.

       B.      Mount surface type panels a minimum 1 inch off wall on channels.

       C.      Where flush mounted, the fire integrity of the wall in which it is installed must be
               maintained.

       D.      Neatly arrange branch circuit wires and tie together in each gutter with Thomas &
               Betts nylon "Ty-Raps", or approved equal at minimum 4 inch intervals.

       E.      Plug all knockouts removed and not utilized.

3.2    TOUCH UP AND CLEANING

       A.      Vacuum all backboxes clean of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance.

       B.      Touch up scratch marks, etc., with matching paint.

HOUSEKEEPING PADS

       Provide a 4" high reinforced concrete pad beneath all floor mounted panelboards.


                                        END OF SECTION




PANELBOARDS                                                                                 16160-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                    Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                            AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    Provide disconnect switches in accordance with the Contract Documents.

      B.    Related Work Specified Elsewhere

            1.     Setting motors and other equipment.

            2.     Identification.

            3.     Mounting heights.

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.    Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
            with the latest provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

            1.     U.L. Standards #98 (File #4776) and #508.

            2.     Federal Specification W-S-865C.

            3.     NEMA Standard KS1-1975.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Refer to Section 16035 concerning the procedures and additional document for
            submittals.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   SAFETY SWITCHES

      A.    Heavy-duty, single-throw knife switch with quick-make, quick-break mechanism,
            capable of full load operations. Meet NEMA and U.S. Government specifications for
            Class A switches.

      B.    Provide with contact arc-quenching devices, such as magnetic blowouts or snuffing
            plates. Provide self-aligning switchblades with silver alloy contact areas and
            designed so that arcing upon making and breaking does not occur on the final
            contact surfaces. Provide with high-pressure, spring-loaded contact. Mount switch
            parts on high-grade insulating base.




DISCONNECT SWITCHES                                                                  16170-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                             Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                 BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                    AUGUST 9, 2010



      C.    Enclosure: NEMA 1 with hinged door, and defeatable interlock when switch is in
            "On" position and can be positively padlocked in "On" and "Off positions. Utilize
            NEMA 3R (rain-tight) enclosures for exterior installations.

      D.    Size, fusing and number of poles as shown or as required. Where fused, the
            devices must be provided with UL listed rejection feature to reject all but Class R.
            fuses. Provide horsepower rated switch to match motor load if no size is shown.
            Use 3 pole plus solid neutral switches on four wire circuits and 3 pole switches on all
            other circuits, unless otherwise noted.

      E.    Lugs must be U.L. listed for the type conductors used and be front removable.

      F.    Provide six (6) pole switches for connection to motors with the following starter
            types:

            1.      Non-reversing - two step - part winding - star connected.

            2.      Non-reversing - full voltage - two speed separate winding.

            3.      Non-reversing - full voltage - two speed single winding.

            4.      Where otherwise noted.

      G.    Heavy-duty, molded case circuit breaker capable of full load operations. Completely
            sealed enclosure. Togggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON/OFF
            indication clearly visible. Circuit breaker shall include a stunt trip coil where indicated
            on drawings.

      H.    Manufacturer to be the same as that for motor controllers, transformers, switchgear,
            etc.

2.2   TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCHES

      A.    Provide switches that operate at their full rating with fluorescent, tungsten, and
            resistance loads - and at 80% of their rated capacity with motor loads.

      B.    Switches to be heavy duty and have:

            Arc-resisting bodies.

            Slow make-and-break mechanisms.

            Silver alloy contact buttons.

            Side or back wiring with up to No. 10 AWG solid conductors.

      A.    Acceptable manufacturers: Square D Class 2510, 11 or 12; Westinghouse Type
            MS or B100; and General Electric Type RB with enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

DISCONNECT SWITCHES                                                                          16170-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                     Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010




3.1   APPLICATION

      A.     Each motor over 1/2 HP shall be provided with a horsepower-rated safety-type
             disconnect switch.

      B.     Each piece of equipment utilizing multi-phase power shall be supplied with a
             safety-type disconnect switch.

      C.     Each piece of equipment utilizing single-phase power but protected at over 30
             amperes shall be supplied with a safety-type disconnect switch.

      D.     Equipment other than that mentioned above utilizing a toggle type manual control
             switch properly sized and rated for the equipment it disconnects.

      E.     Factory installed disconnect switches may be used to satisfy the above
             requirements with the Architect/Engineer's prior approval.

MOUNTING

      Provide connections and wiring to and from each disconnect switch. Support conduit
             feeder from ceiling or floor.

      Disconnect switches shall be mounted on adjacent wall or from the floor with independent
            supports. Switches shall not be mounted on fan housings.


                                    END OF SECTION




DISCONNECT SWITCHES                                                                   16170-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                              Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION         BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO            AUGUST 9, 2010




DISCONNECT SWITCHES                 16170-4
AE Design Group, Inc.            Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16181 - FUSES (600 VOLTS AND LESS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    Provide fuses in accordance with the Contract Document.

1.2   STANDARDS

      A.    Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
            with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

            1.      UL Standard #198.

            2.      UL Standard #977.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Provide a complete set of shop drawings to include let-through curves for each type
            of fuse, a schedule of spare fuse cabinets with a listing of fuses provided within each
            spare fuse cabinet, and dimensioned drawings of each spare fuse cabinet by type
            and size.

      B.    Short circuit current analysis is based upon Bussman fuse characteristics for
            let-through currents. If Gould-Shawmut or Littlefuse fuses are to be utilized, it is the
            Electrical Contractor's responsibility to provide the appropriate fuse curves and
            let-through values which correspond to the Bussman values shown on the
            Drawings. Submit comparative chart of fuse substitutions for Architect/Engineer and
            for respective Building Department review prior to acceptance of same substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

      A.    Bussman

      B.    Gould-Shawmut

      C.    Littlefuse

2.2   MATERIALS

      A.    General

            1.      Ratings

                    a.     All fuses shall be labeled as UL Class L or UL Class R, current
                           limiting and rated for up to 200,000 amperes. Time delay Class R
                           fuses shall be so labeled.

FUSES (600VOLTS AND BELOW)                                                                 16181-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010




             2.      Feeder Circuits

                     a.     Fuses over 600 amperes shall be UL Class L. Fuses up to 600
                            amperes shall be UL Class RK1. If fuses directly feed motors they
                            shall be UL RK1, labeled Time-delay.

             3.      Branch circuits

                     Fuses shall be UL Class RK1, Dual-Element, labeled as time-delay.

             1.      All fuses shall be so selected as to provide a selectively coordinated system.

             2.      All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.

             3.      All fuses to be of the Class R type.

      B.     Spares: Upon completion of the building, the contractor shall provide the Owner
             with spare fuses as indicated below:

             10 percent (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of installed fuses shall be
                    supplied as spares.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

GENERAL

      Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized.

      All fuses shall be provided by the Contractor.


                                       END OF SECTION




FUSES (600VOLTS AND BELOW)                                                                16181-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                  Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16400 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)

                         SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHBOARD
                             (PARALLEL CONNECTION)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    Provide Service Entrance Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor in accordance with
            the Contract Documents.

      B.    Related Work specified in Division 16000.

            1.     Reviews and Acceptances - Section 16035.

            2.     Identification - Section 16060.

            3.     Switchboards - Section 16440.

            4.     Grounding Systems - Section 16450.

      C.    Related Work specified in other Divisions of these specifications.

            1.     Concrete Housekeeping Pads.

1.2   SUMMARY

      A.    These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a high
            energy transient voltage surge suppression system (abbreviated as TVSS
            throughout). The specified system shall provide effective high energy surge current
            diversion and be suitable for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category A, B and C3
            environments, as tested by ANSI/IEEE C2.11, C62.45.

1.3   STANDARDS

      A.    The specified system shall be design, manufactured, tested and installed in
            compliance with the following codes and standards:

            Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
            American National Standards Institute
            Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.41, C62.45)
            Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIBS PUB 94)
            National Fire Protection Association (NFPA20, 70, 75 and 780)

            National Electric Code
            Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283)
      B.    The systems individual units shall be UL Listed and labeled under UL 1449
            Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) and the surge ratings


TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                   16400-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                       Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                           BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                              AUGUST 9, 2010



            shall be permanently affixed to the TVSS. The units shall also be listed and labeled
            to UL 1283 Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters, and CSA Listed.

      C.    The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules
            utilizing metal oxide varistors (MOV) computer matched to +/- 1 Volt variance and
            tested for manufacturer's defects. The modules shall be designed and constructed
            in a manner that ensures surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, silicon avalanche
            diodes, or selenium cells are unacceptable unless documentation from a nationally
            recognized laboratory demonstrates current sharing of all dissimilar components at
            all surge current levels.

1.4   ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

      A.    Nominal system operating voltage shall be:

            120/208 VAC, Y Configuration,      3 Phase,     4 Wire Plus Ground.

      B.    Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV):

            1.      The TVSS and all components in the suppression patch (including all
                    MOV's, SAD's, and selenium cells) maximum continuous operating voltage
                    shall be greater than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage to
                    ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary RMS overvoltage
                    (swell) conditions.

      C.    Operating Frequency:

            1.      The operating frequency range of the system shall be at least 47 - 63 Hertz.

      D.    Device Ratings - The TVSS shall meet the ratings listed below:

            Switchboard Ampacity                  Minimum Device Rating;
                                                  Surge Current Per Phase

            Up to 1000 AMP                                100 KA
            1001 to 2000 AMP                              200 KA
            Above 2000 AMP                                300 KA

1.5   LIFE CYCLE TESTING

      A.    The TVSS system shall be duty life cycle tested to survive 20KV, 10KA, IEEE
            C62.41 category C3 surge current with less than 5% degradation of clamping
            voltage. The minimum numbers of surges the unit shall be able to protect against
            are:

            Surge Rating  Number of Life Cycle Surges
            Per Phase Per Mode             Per Phase
                       L-N L-G N-G        (L-N + L-G)

            100KA      1,250 1,250 1,250          2,500

TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                    16400-2
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                        Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                          BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                             AUGUST 9, 2010



            200KA      2,500 2,500 2,500         5,000
            300KA      3,750 3,750 3,750         7,500

      B.    All components, including suppression, filtering, and monitoring components, shall
            be individually fused and rated to allow maximum specified surge current capacity.
            For every 100 KA of surge current capacity, 120 amps RMS of internal, integral
            fusing shall be required.

      C.    Individual surge components shall be sand packed and fused at a maximum of 1/2
            amps to prevent violent failure. The fusing shall be UL Listed to be capable of
            interrupting up to 300 KA symmetrical fault current with 600 VAC applied.
            Replaceable fusing is unacceptable. Overcurrent protection that limits specified
            surge currents is not acceptable.

1.6   DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

      A.    Protection Modes: The TVSS shall provide protection as follows:

                    L-N, L-G, N-G: WYE connected system
                    L-L, L-G: Delta connected system

                    Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral

      B.    UL 1449 Ratings

            1.      The maximum UL 1449 Listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the
                    specified protection modes shall not exceed the following in any mode of
                    protection:

            System voltage                        Without disconnect    With disconnect

            120/208 or 120/240 volt               400 volts             500 volts

      C.    Noise Attenuation

            1.      The unit shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter.
                    The filter shall provide insertion loss with a maximum of 60dB from 100 KHz
                    to 100 MHz per 50 ohm insertion loss methodology from MIL 220A. The
                    system shall provide up to 120 dB insertion loss from 100 KHz to 100 MHz
                    when used in a coordinated facility system.

1.7   PERFORMANCE RATINGS

      A.    Surge Current Capacity: The minimum TVSS surge current capacity, per NEMA LS-
            1 1992 shall be as follows:

            Surge Rating per mode         Surge Rating per phase (L-N + L-G)

              50 KA                       100 KA
             100 KA                       200 KA

TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                   16400-3
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                       Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



             150 KA                         300 KA

1.8    SUBMITTALS

       A.   Documentation

            1.      These specifications are based on Current Technology products. All other
                    manufactures shall submit for 10 day pre-approval, a completed TVSS
                    manufacturer's evaluation questionnaire (available from the engineer) and
                    provide detailed compliance or exception statements to all provisions of this
                    specification to allow consideration. Additionally, manufacturers shall submit
                    independent test data from a nationally recognized testing laboratory
                    verifying the following: life cycle testing, overcurrent protection, UL 1449,
                    noise attenuation, and surge current capacity. Failure to do so will result in
                    product disapproval. Any deviation from the published specification will
                    result in an applicable deduct applied.

       B.   Equipment Manual

            1.      The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual with installation, start-
                    up, spare parts' lists, and operating instructions for the specified system.

       C.   Drawings

            1.      Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer
                    that show unit dimensions, weights, component and connection locations,
                    mounting provisions, connection details, and wiring diagram.

1.9    QUALITY ASSURANCE

       A.   The specified system shall be tested at the component and fully assembled level,
            under surge conditions with AC power applied for a minimum of 1 hour. Testing
            shall include but not be limited to quality control checks, dielectric voltage withstand
            test per UL and CSA requirements, UL ground continuity tests, and operational and
            calibration tests.

1.10   ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

       A.   Storage Temperature:            -55 to +85 C (-67 to +187 F)

       B.   Operating Temperature:          -40 to +60 C (-40 to 140 F)

       C.   Relative Humidity:              0% to 95%

       D.   Audible Noise:          less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1.5m)

       E.   Operating Altitude:            0 to 8,000 feet above sea level.

1.11   WARRANTY


TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                       16400-4
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                           Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                AUGUST 9, 2010



      A.    The manufacturer shall provide a full five year parts and labor warranty from the
            date of initial operation against any part failure when installed in compliance with
            manufacturer's written instructions, UL Listing requirements, and any applicable
            national, state or local electrical codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1   ENCLOSURES

      A.    The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 12 dust-tight, drip-
            tight enclosure with no ventilation openings. The cover of the enclosure shall be
            hinged on the left side and require a tool for access to internal components. A
            drawing pocket shall be provided inside the door for storage of unit drawings and
            installation/operation manual. All monitoring indication must be visible without
            opening the door. The enclosure maximum dimensions shall be (30) inches high
            and (24) inches wide and (9) inches deep.

2.2   CONNECTIONS

      A.    The terminals shall be provided to accommodate wire sizes up to #2 AWG.

2.3   INTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND SERVICEABILITY

      A.    All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by way of low
            impedance copper plates. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted
            connections to the plates for reliable low impedance connections. The system shall
            be designed for simple change out of any or all TVSS component modules by a
            qualified electrician. Designs that require factory service are not acceptable. All
            connections, conductors, and terminals must be appropriately sized for specified
            surge current capacity.

2.4   ACCESSORIES

      A.    Unit Status Indicators

            1.     Red and green solid state indicators with printed labels shall be provided on
                   the hinged front cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status. The
                   absence of the green light and the presence of the red light shall reliably
                   indicate that surge protection is reduced and service is needed to restore full
                   operation.

      B.    Dry Contacts for Remote Monitoring

            1.     Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts, one normally open and one
                   normally closed set standard on all units for remote monitoring.

      C.    Undervoltage Detection

            1.     Unit shall be equipped with 70% undervoltage detection capability.


TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                     16400-5
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                         Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                            BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                               AUGUST 9, 2010



      D.    Phase Loss Monitoring

            1.     Unit shall be equipped with phase loss monitoring.

      E.    Power Loss Monitoring

            1.     Unit shall be equipped with power loss monitoring.

      F.    Audible Alarm

            1.     The specified system shall be equipped with an audible alarm that shall be
                   activated when summary alarm contacts are activated. In conjunction with
                   alarm, an alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm and an
                   alarm push-to-test switch shall be provided to test the alarm function. A
                   visible LED will confirm whether alarm is on or disabled. Both switches and
                   the audible alarm shall be located on the unit's hinged front cover.

      G.    Transient Counters

            1.     Dual, adjustable transient counters shall be available to totalize transient
                   voltage surges in both normal and common modes. The readout shall be at
                   least a seven digit LCD located on the unit's hinged front cover. The counter
                   reset switches may be inhibited and must be remotely located. Counter
                   must utilize lithium batteries with a 10 year nominal life to maintain accurate
                   counts in the event of total power loss.

      H.    Remote Monitor Panel

            1.     A self contained, UL Listed, monitoring panel shall be provided to allow
                   remote annunciation of the system status. Input power to the monitoring
                   panel shall be equipped with a 6 foot long input power cord with a 3 NEMA
                   5-15 plug. The monitor panel shall have an audible alarm, red and green
                   LED's an alarm on/off switch to silence, and a push to test alarm switch.

      I.    Integral Fused Disconnect Switch

            1.     The specified system shall include a 300 KAIC integral fused disconnect
                   switch located in-line with the TVSS system enclosure with an external
                   manual operator. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit
                   conductors from the high energy surge current diversion modules. The
                   switch shall be rated per manufacturer recommendations.

2.5   TESTING

      A.    Component Testing and Monitoring

            1.     Unit shall include an on-line circuit which tests and redundantly monitors
                   individual components in all protection modes including neutral to ground
                   (where applicable). Units that require external test sets or equipment is
                   unacceptable.

TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                     16400-6
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                         Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                               BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                  AUGUST 9, 2010




      B.     External Test Capability

             External testing demonstrating surge suppression capability and/or degradation
                    shall be available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

      The installing contractor shall install the parallel TVSS with short and straight conductors as
             practically possible. The contractor shall twist the TVSS input conductors together
             to reduce input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the TVSS
             manufacturer's recommendation practices as found in the installation, operation and
             maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes.


                                       END OF SECTION




TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)                                        16400-7
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                            Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                             BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                AUGUST 9, 2010




TVSS (SERVICE ENTRANCE, PARALLEL CONNECTION)      16400-8
AE Design Group, Inc.                          Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                              BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                 AUGUST 9, 2010



SECTION 16403 - PACKAGED GENERATOR SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1   DESCRIPTION

      A.    General: Provide emergency power system in accordance with the Contract Documents.

      B.    Related Work Specified in Division 16000

            1.      Testing, Acceptances and Certification - Section 16065

            2.      Switchboards - Section 16440

            3.      Grounding Systems - Section 16450

            4.      Transfer Switches - Section 16490

      C.    Related Work Specified in Other Divisions of these Specifications.

            1.      Concrete

            2.      Gas fuel line

            3.      Exhaust system piping

            4.      Insulation of exhaust piping

      D.    Work This Specification

            1.      Packaged engine generator system

            2.      Battery and charger

            3.      Weatherproof enclosure

OPTIONAL

            4.      Exhaust silencer and fittings

            5.      Remote control panel


1.2   STANDARDS

      A.    Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents, comply with the latest
            applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:

            1.      ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000/Volts Maximum).

            2.      ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

            3.      ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

            4.      ANSI/NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities.

GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS)                                                                    16403-1
AE Design Group, Inc.                                                                   Denver, CO
BOULDER RURAL FIRE STATION                                                                     BID SET
BOULDER, COLORADO                                                                        AUGUST 9, 2010



            5.      ANSI/NEMA AB - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

1.3   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION




      A.    Engine generator system to provide source of standby power.

      B.    System Capacity: (85) KW, (106) KVA, at elevation of (5280) feet above sea level, and
            ambient temperature between (-20) and (100) degrees F.; (standby) rating using (engine -
            mounted radiator).

      C.    Operation: In accordance with ANSI/NFPA 99.

1.4   SUBMITTALS

      A.    Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16035.

      B.    Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection
            point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion
            air requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams.

      C.    Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and
            internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery
            charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank and remote annunciator.

      D.    Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5   PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

      A.    Submit record documents under provisions of Section 16030.

      B.    Accurately record location of engine generator and mechanical and electrical connections.

1.6   OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

      A.    Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 160